TW419602B - Optical microswitch having electrostatic microactuator and method for use thereof - Google Patents

Optical microswitch having electrostatic microactuator and method for use thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW419602B
TW419602B TW088100403A TW88100403A TW419602B TW 419602 B TW419602 B TW 419602B TW 088100403 A TW088100403 A TW 088100403A TW 88100403 A TW88100403 A TW 88100403A TW 419602 B TW419602 B TW 419602B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
comb
members
shaped
actuator
micro
Prior art date
Application number
TW088100403A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
John H Jerman
John D Grade
Joseph D Drake
Original Assignee
Seagate Technology
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Seagate Technology filed Critical Seagate Technology
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW419602B publication Critical patent/TW419602B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/35Optical coupling means having switching means
    • G02B6/351Optical coupling means having switching means involving stationary waveguides with moving interposed optical elements
    • G02B6/3512Optical coupling means having switching means involving stationary waveguides with moving interposed optical elements the optical element being reflective, e.g. mirror
    • G02B6/3518Optical coupling means having switching means involving stationary waveguides with moving interposed optical elements the optical element being reflective, e.g. mirror the reflective optical element being an intrinsic part of a MEMS device, i.e. fabricated together with the MEMS device
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B26/00Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements
    • G02B26/08Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light
    • G02B26/0816Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light by means of one or more reflecting elements
    • G02B26/0833Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light by means of one or more reflecting elements the reflecting element being a micromechanical device, e.g. a MEMS mirror, DMD
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B26/00Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements
    • G02B26/08Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light
    • G02B26/0816Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light by means of one or more reflecting elements
    • G02B26/0833Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light by means of one or more reflecting elements the reflecting element being a micromechanical device, e.g. a MEMS mirror, DMD
    • G02B26/0841Optical devices or arrangements for the control of light using movable or deformable optical elements for controlling the direction of light by means of one or more reflecting elements the reflecting element being a micromechanical device, e.g. a MEMS mirror, DMD the reflecting element being moved or deformed by electrostatic means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/42Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements
    • G02B6/4201Packages, e.g. shape, construction, internal or external details
    • G02B6/4216Packages, e.g. shape, construction, internal or external details incorporating polarisation-maintaining fibres
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B11/00Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B11/10Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field
    • G11B11/105Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing
    • G11B11/10532Heads
    • G11B11/10541Heads for reproducing
    • G11B11/10543Heads for reproducing using optical beam of radiation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/12Heads, e.g. forming of the optical beam spot or modulation of the optical beam
    • G11B7/122Flying-type heads, e.g. analogous to Winchester type in magnetic recording
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/12Heads, e.g. forming of the optical beam spot or modulation of the optical beam
    • G11B7/135Means for guiding the beam from the source to the record carrier or from the record carrier to the detector
    • G11B7/1384Fibre optics
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01SDEVICES USING THE PROCESS OF LIGHT AMPLIFICATION BY STIMULATED EMISSION OF RADIATION [LASER] TO AMPLIFY OR GENERATE LIGHT; DEVICES USING STIMULATED EMISSION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION IN WAVE RANGES OTHER THAN OPTICAL
    • H01S3/00Lasers, i.e. devices using stimulated emission of electromagnetic radiation in the infrared, visible or ultraviolet wave range
    • H01S3/09Processes or apparatus for excitation, e.g. pumping
    • H01S3/091Processes or apparatus for excitation, e.g. pumping using optical pumping
    • H01S3/094Processes or apparatus for excitation, e.g. pumping using optical pumping by coherent light
    • H01S3/0941Processes or apparatus for excitation, e.g. pumping using optical pumping by coherent light of a laser diode
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H02GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
    • H02NELECTRIC MACHINES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H02N1/00Electrostatic generators or motors using a solid moving electrostatic charge carrier
    • H02N1/002Electrostatic motors
    • H02N1/006Electrostatic motors of the gap-closing type
    • H02N1/008Laterally driven motors, e.g. of the comb-drive type
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/35Optical coupling means having switching means
    • G02B6/354Switching arrangements, i.e. number of input/output ports and interconnection types
    • G02B6/35442D constellations, i.e. with switching elements and switched beams located in a plane
    • G02B6/3546NxM switch, i.e. a regular array of switches elements of matrix type constellation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/35Optical coupling means having switching means
    • G02B6/354Switching arrangements, i.e. number of input/output ports and interconnection types
    • G02B6/35442D constellations, i.e. with switching elements and switched beams located in a plane
    • G02B6/35481xN switch, i.e. one input and a selectable single output of N possible outputs
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/35Optical coupling means having switching means
    • G02B6/3564Mechanical details of the actuation mechanism associated with the moving element or mounting mechanism details
    • G02B6/3566Mechanical details of the actuation mechanism associated with the moving element or mounting mechanism details involving bending a beam, e.g. with cantilever
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/35Optical coupling means having switching means
    • G02B6/3564Mechanical details of the actuation mechanism associated with the moving element or mounting mechanism details
    • G02B6/3568Mechanical details of the actuation mechanism associated with the moving element or mounting mechanism details characterised by the actuating force
    • G02B6/357Electrostatic force
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/35Optical coupling means having switching means
    • G02B6/3564Mechanical details of the actuation mechanism associated with the moving element or mounting mechanism details
    • G02B6/358Latching of the moving element, i.e. maintaining or holding the moving element in place once operation has been performed; includes a mechanically bistable system
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/24Coupling light guides
    • G02B6/26Optical coupling means
    • G02B6/35Optical coupling means having switching means
    • G02B6/3564Mechanical details of the actuation mechanism associated with the moving element or mounting mechanism details
    • G02B6/3584Mechanical details of the actuation mechanism associated with the moving element or mounting mechanism details constructional details of an associated actuator having a MEMS construction, i.e. constructed using semiconductor technology such as etching

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Plasma & Fusion (AREA)
  • Mechanical Light Control Or Optical Switches (AREA)
  • Optical Recording Or Reproduction (AREA)
  • Lasers (AREA)
  • Micromachines (AREA)

Abstract

An optical microswitch (104) for use with a laser beam that extends along a path comprising a body (213) having an inlet port (150) adapted to receive the laser beam and a plurality of outlet ports (151). A plurality of mirrors (103) coupled to a plurality of micromotors (180) are carried by the bosy. The micromotors selectively move the mirrors from a first position out of the path of the laser beam to a second position into the path of the laser beam to direct the laser beam to one of the outlet ports. Each of the micromotors has at least one electrostarically-driven comb drive assembly (208) therein for moving the respective mirror to one of the first and second positions. A controller (111) is electrically coupled to the micromotors for providing control signals to the micromotors.

Description

419602 A7 B7 經濟部中央橾準局Μ工消费合作社印装 五、發明説明(彳) 發明範圍 本發明大體上關於光學開關,特別關於具有多個可移 動鏡之光學開關。 發明背景 對於用於將光從一光纖切換至另一光纖或將光從自由 空間光束切換至一或更多光纖之開關,一直有很濃厚的興 趣•特別是用在電信及數位網路方面。有多種切換配置是 有用的,包含1x2、lxn、及ηχη,其中η是2至 約6 4之數目。已有多種原理用於習知的開關,包含 效應及機電致動器,且使用這些技術之工作開關現已商業 化》習知的開關是非常昂貴且相當大。 習知的1 X η機電光纖開關典型上係移動輸入光纖以 致於其會與所需的輸出光纖相通訊、移動單一鏡片以致於 輸入光會與所需的輸出光纖耦合、或移動折射的光學元件 直到取得所需的耦合爲止。典型上|將準直透鏡配置於每 —光纖處,以致於準直光被機電致動器切換。此種開關的 —實施例揭示於Minowa等的美國專利號 4,322,126中,其中稜鏡狀結構會於輸入與輸出 光纖之間移動。另一種習知方式揭示於Riza等的美國專利 號5,208,880中,其中單一鏡片會平移以將準直 光偏轉至多個輸出光纖中。其它不同的方式係使用單一旋 轉鏡以將光耦合至多個輸出光纖中,舉例命言,美國專利 號5,647,03 0所掲示者。 -IT--------裝-- (請先閱讀背面+之注意事項' "寫本頁) 訂 線 本紙浪尺度逍用中困國家橾準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) -4- 41 9602 A7 B7 經濟部中央揉準局貝工消資合作社印装 五、發明説明(2 ) 由於習知的機電致動器相當大及昂貴,所以,大部份 的習知方法係使质單一機電致動器*線型或角度式致動器 ,以將輸入光束偏轉。單一的機電致動器典型上具有之機 構係可準確地控制鏡子的位置以將光準確地耦合至輸出光 纖中。此準確的鏡子定位也增加習知致動器的尺寸及成本 ,特別是輸出光纖的數目大於二的情形,此外,其中尙無 簡單方法可用於取得所需的定位解析度。 大部份的習知光學開關係設計成用於電信應用,其中 所使用的光的波長典型上爲紅外線範圍之1.5微米或 1 . 3微米•而且,有很多習知的開關係設計成用於所謂 的多模式光纖,多模式光纖具有相當大的中央蕊心,此中 央蕊心會載送光,特別是用於紅外光。取得高光學耦合所 需之定位準確度係爲光纖的中央光蕊的直徑的5分之一等 級。用於紅外線之大部份的多模式光纖具有約5 0微米之 蕊心直徑,以致於耦合時的定位準確度僅需在約1 0微米 之內,使用傳統技術,可取得此準確度。 在很多光學系統中,希望使用可取得較大光頻寬之單 模式光纖。這些光纖的蕊心直徑在用於紅外線時約爲8微 米,在用於紅光時約爲四微米。因此|對這些系統而言, 所需的定位準確度會縮減至小於1微米,約爲習知的多模 式光學開關的十分之一。 使用矽積體電路製程技術所製造的微型結構已發展出 不同的感測及致動應用。相較於這些及其它應用中的傳統 習知實施,微型結構於成本、可靠度及性能等方面上較有 本紙张尺度逍用中國國家梂準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)_ 5 ---------装-------IT------M (請先閱讀背面之注意事項·寫本頁) 經濟部中央揉準扃貝工消费合作社印装 413GC, A7 _ B7_ 五、發明説明(3 ) 利。積體致動器,亦即,致動器與機械構結構同時製造之 微型結構,從成本、可靠度及組裝的容易性等觀點而言, 是有利的。 已有不同的致動方法用於微型結構的積體致動器上, 微型結構包含靜電式、電磁式、熱式及熱-氣動式。熱式 技術係要以相當低的反應時間提供大的力量。由於要在平 面結構中提供具有充份圈數之積體線圈之困難度及產生磁 場所需的高電流所造成的高功率消耗,所以,電場技術很 複雜。力量會隨著元件之間的間隙減少而增加,所以,葶 電式致動於小尺寸規模方面變得相當有吸引力。靜電式元 件所消耗的功率要低且操作速度通常僅受限於結構的機構 反應。 習知的靜電致動器之驅動力典型上僅藉由使用二種驅 動電極之一而產生的•這二種驅動電極分別爲所請的梳式 驅動指或平行板。平行板電容器會產生正比於驅動電壓平 方及反比於板與板之間的間隙平方之力量。此機制限制此 種致動器之有用的動作範圍,當大間隙時,靜電力無法克 服致動器支撐件的恢復彈力,且在間隙小於最初間隙的約 2/3時,當靜電力浚駕於直線恢復力時,致動器變成不 穩定》對於實際的微型構造元件而言,平行板致動器有用 的動作範圍係小於1 0微米。梳型驅動致動器,諸如Tang 等的美國專利號5,025,346中所述者,特徵在於 —系列指狀組合電極*可使用其電容以在約略等於梳型指 長度的動作範圔內提供相當固定不變的作用力,此動作範 本纸张尺度適用中國國家標準{ CNS ) A4*UM 210X 297公釐)· 6 _ I-^--------^------1T------.^ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項^^寫本頁) 419602 A7 __B7_ 五、發明説明(4 ) / 圍可大於1 0 0微米。可從每一指構件取得的力量相當小 ,以致於實際的梳型驅動致動器典型上具有的指構件數在 1 0至2 0 0之間以產生用於微型結構裝置之適當力童。 習知的梳型驅動裝置所具有的嚴重困難係裝置的最大 動作受限於所謂的機電側不穩定》在理想的情形下,每一 指構件上的側力會正好平衡,但是,假使指構件並未被強 制下移間隙的精確中心,則將由電極產生側力。當增加偏 轉時順向作用力幾乎固定不變時,側力會隨著側偏轉而快 速增加•當側力相對於側位移的微分大於橫向機械彈性係 數時,會發生不穩定。假使此微分超過馬達支撐構造的側 彈性係數時,梳型驅動將迅速移動至側邊,將驅動電極短 路及中斷致動器的順向動作》此習知裝置的表現係說明於 J. Micromech. Microeng. 6 (1996)的 320 — M濟部中*橾隼為—工消费合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項窝本頁) ___________ i 产〆- 3 2 9 頁中 Legtenberg、Groeneveld、及 Elwenspoek 等所 著的"C.omb-drive actuators for large displacements”。它們 的設計具有約4 0微米的最大位移。Legtenberg論文中的 設計技術係說明傳統梳型驅動致動器的最大位移,但未說 明具有實際上較大偏轉之設計。 早期的驅動致動器使用所謂的表面微機械處理所提供 之薄多晶矽層以製造指構件及可移動的、橫向驅動元件。 多晶矽典型上爲1 一 2微米厚。由於這些裝置的橫向特徵 尺寸可以與材料的厚度相比•所以,構件對離平面偏轉的 剛性是很低的。深度反應離子蝕刻(DR i Ε)可在興型 厚度1 00微米的單晶矽中製造類似的結構。DR 1 E說 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家榡準(CNS ) A4規格(210Χ297公釐)' 4 經濟部中央螵準局属工消费合作社印氧 9602 A7 _B7_ 五、發明説明(5 ) 明於 Proceedings Of Transducer'9 5 ( 1 9 9 5 ) * 556-559 頁中,Klassen、Petersen、Noworolski、 Logan , Maluf , Brown , Storment , McCully、及 Kovacs 等所著的”Silicon Fusion Bonding And Deep Reactive Ion Etching; A New Technology For Microstructures·'。這些較 厚的結構可以提供較大的垂直電極面積及較高的離平面偏 轉剛性。近來,其它製造技術,包含較厚的表面微機械加 工多晶矽或光學照相蝕刻界定模中所製造的平板化金屬結 構,己用於增加厚度並因而增加梳型驅動結構的離平面剛 性。這些製造技術中沒有任何一者可獨自地用於改進習知 梳型驅動結構的極限偏轉。 一般而言,本發明的目的係提洪克服上述缺點之光學 微型開關。 發明的另一目的係提供具有上述特徵之光學微型開關 ,其使用至少一靜電微型致動器,在此靜電微型致動器中 具有至少一梳型驅動組件》 發明的另一目的係提供具有上述特徵之光學微型開關 ,其中,靜電微型致動器的梳型驅動組件中的側向不穩定 力會最小。 發明的另一目的係提供具有上述特徵之光學微型開關 ,其中,提供機構,用以將靜電微致動器附加或耦合至外 f.裝舅。 發明的另一目的係提供具有上述特徵之光學微型開關 ,其中,使用靜電微致動器中的梳型驅動組件之,&«.里 1^--------¾------ΪΤ------0 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 本纸張尺度遥k中國國家樑率(CNS ) A4祝格(2丨0X297公釐)~~ 4196 鋰濟部t'央樣率局W?工消费合作社印装 A7 B7 五、發明説明(6 ) 以取得大的偏轉》 發明的另一目的係提供具有上述特徵之光學微型開關 ,其中,多個靜電微致動器會延著微型開關的至少一通道 對齊。 發明的另一目的係提供具有上述特徵之光學微型開關 1以用於磁光資料儲存系統° 發明槪述 本發明係提供利用大偏轉高速微型致動器之光學開關 等等。光學開關可用於不同的系統中,舉例而言,磁光資 料儲存系統、電信系統或資料傳送系統。微型致動器可改 進懸置設計、梳型驅動元件、動態電驅動控制、正位置止 動及位置感測。微致動器可用於不同設計的光學開關或其 它不同的應用,舉例而言:橫..商.共振器、平衡力加速度計 、或袖珍握爪。高的離平面剛性及/或較大的電極面積可 用於創造能產生大的力量及位移之微型結構。 圖式簡述 附圖在很多實施例中是有點槪略的簡圖且倂入於本說 明書中作爲其一部份,附圖係說明發明的數個實施例,以 及配合說明以解釋發明之原理。 圖1係具有本發明的光學微型開開之磁光資料儲存及 取還系統。 \ 圖2係圖1的磁光資料儲存及取還系統之雷射組件。 本紙ft尺度適用中固國家標準{ CNS ) A4规格(2丨0X297公釐)· g C請先聞讀背面之注意事項'-rr寫本頁} 裝. 線 419602 Α7 Β7 經濟部中央樣牟局負工消費合作杜印袈 五、發明説明(7 ) 圖3係視圖’顯示用於圖1的磁光資料及取還系統之 代表性的光學通道,包含霄射源的使用。 圖4 a — 4 g係分別以立體視圖、側視剖面圖、展開 剖面圖、側視圖、前視圖、底視圖、及後視圖,顯示圖1 的磁光資料儲存及取還系統的飛行磁光讀寫頭。 圖5係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電致動器之 實施例的放大平面視圖。 圖6係圖5的靜電微型致動器的平面視圖,在其中鏡 子係處於退縮條件下。 圖7係圖5的靜電微型致動器的平面視圖,在其中鏡 子係處於延伸條件下。 圖8係用於本發明的光學微型開關之靜電微型致動器 的另一實施例之平面視圖。 圖9係延著圖8的線9 - 9觀視之圖8的靜電微型致 動器的剖面圖》 圖10係延著圖8的線10—10觀視之圖8的靜電 微型致動器的剖面圖。 圖11係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電微型致 動器之又一實施例的平面視圖》 圖12係在製造時或操作之前的條件下之本發明的光 學微型開關的平面視圖β 圖1 3係一鏡子延伸及其餘鏡子退縮之圖1 2的光學 微型開關的平面視圖。 ‘ 圖14係本發明的光學微型開關之又一實施例的平面 —---------裝— (請先閲讀背面之注意事項' W寫本頁> 訂 線 本纸张尺度遗用中囷困家樣準(CNS ) Α4规格(210Χ297公釐)-1〇 ^ T 3 6Ό 2 A7 B7 五、發明説明(8 ) 視圖。 圖15係本發明的光學微型開關之另一實施例的平面 視圖11 圖16係本發明的光學微型開關之又一實施例的平面 視圖。 圖17係本發明的光學微型開關之又另一實施例的平 面視圖。 圖18係本發明的光學微型開關之又一實施例的平面 視圖8 圖1 9係本發明的光學微型開關之又一實施例的平面 視圖。 圖2 0係用於本發明的光學微型開關中之靜電微型致 動器的另一實施例的平面視圖》 圖2 1係圖2 0的靜電微型致動器的梭之位置與特定 的驅動電壓之相互關係之圖形。 圖2 2係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電微型致 動器之另一實施、例的平面視圖。 經濟部中央揉準局男工消费合作杜印裝 (請先M讀背面之注意事項',ΐ寫本莧) 圖2 3係用於圖2 2的靜電微型致動器的側向剛性安 全邊界相對於偏轉之圖形。 圖2 4係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電微型致 動器之又一實施例的平面視圖》 圖2 5係用於圖2 4的靜電微型致動器之側向剛性安 全邊界相對於偏轉之圖形。 '' 圖2 6係用於圖2 4之靜電微型致動器之鉗制力相對 本纸張尺度適用中囷國家揉準(CNS〉Α4祝格(210X297公釐) -11 - 經濟部4-央棣率局負工消*·合作杜印*. Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(9 ) 於鉗制電極分離之圖形。 圖2 7係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電微型致 動器之另一實施例的平面視圖。 圖2 8係用於無鏡子附加之本發明的光學微型開關之 靜電微型致動器之又一實施例的平面視圖。 圖2 9係有鏡子附加之圖2 8的靜電微型致動器的平 面視圖》 圖3 0係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電微型致 動器之另一實施例的平面視圖。 圖31係用於本發明的光學微型開關之靜電微型致動 器的又一實施例之平面視圖β 圖3 2係用於本發明的光學微型開關之靜電微型致動 器的又一實施例之平面視圖。 圖3 3係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電微型致 動器之另一實施例之平面視圖。 圖3 4係用於本發明的光學微型開關中的靜電微型致 動器之又另一實施例之平面視圖* 圖3 5係本發明的光學微型開關之另一實施例的平面 ------------装------订------線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項ΛΧ寫本頁) 視圖β 主要元件對照表 9 5 磁光資料儲存及取還系統 9 6 雷射光組件 ‘ 9 7 單模式偏振維持光纖 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家揉準(CNS Μ4规格(210X297公嫠)_ 12 . A 7 B7 經濟部中央揲率局工消费合作社印装 五、 發明説明(10 ) 9 8 光纖 10 0 微晶片 10 1 致動器 10 2 準直透鏡 10 3 鏡 10 3 a 鏡 10 3 b 鏡 10 4 光學開關 X 0 5 致動器臂 10 6 飛行讀寫頭 10 7 磁光碟 10 8 磁光碟表面 10 9 梭 11 1 控制器 11 2 接線 11 3 縱向軸 . 12 0 旋轉致動器磁鐵及線圈組件 1 3 0 懸置件 13 1 支撐件 15 0 入口埠 15 1 出口埠 15 6 入口溝槽 15 7 通道 ’ 16 1 出口溝槽 {請先閲請背面之注意事項寫本頁) 本紙浪尺度遠用中國國家揉準(CNS > A4规格(210 X 297公釐} _ 3 -4 ί θ 60 2, ^ι| Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(11 ) 經濟部t央樣準局貝工消费合作社印袈 1 7 0 組件 1 7 1 二氧化矽 層 1 7 4 金屬層 1 7 5 空氣間隙 1 8 0 致動器 1 8 0 a 致動器 1 8 0 b 致動器 1 8 0 c 致動器 1 8 0 d 致動器 1 9 1 線性偏振 外離雷射光 1 9 2 線性偏振 雷射光 2 0 8 第一可移 動組件 2 0 8 a 第一梳型 驅動構件 2 0 8 b 第二梳型 驅動構件 2 0 8 c 第三梳型 驅動構件 2 0 9 第二可移 動組件 2 0 9 a 第一梳型 驅動構件 2 0 9 b 第二梳型 驅動構件 2 0 9 c 第三梳型 驅動構件 2 0 9 d 梳型驅動 構件 2 1 0 第一固定 組件 2 1 0 a 第一梳型 驅動構件 2 1 0 b 第二梳型 驅動構伴 2 1 0 c 第三梳型 驅動構件 I-^--------^------IT------^ {請先閲讀背面之注意事項'寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家樣隼(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐)_ _ 4 1 9 6 Ο 2 η A7 B7 五、發明説明(12 ) 經濟部中央樣隼局貝工消#合作社印* 2 1 1 梳型驅動指構 件 2 1 2 梳型驅動指構 件 2 1 3 基底 2 1 4 彈簧 2 1 6 連接條 2 1 7 彈簧 2 1 8 延伸件 2 1 8 a 延伸件 2 1 9 托架 2 1 9 a 托架 2 1 9 b 托架 2 2 1 樑 2 2 2 條 2 2 4 彈簧部份 2 2 5 彈簧部份 2 2 6 側表面 2 2 7 側表面 2 3 0 第二固定組件 2 3 0 a 第一梳型驅動 構件 2 3 0 b 第二梳型驅動 構件 2 3 0 c 第三梳型驅動 構件 2 3 1 線性偏振二極 體雷射源 2 3 2 分光鏡 • 2 3 3 耦合透鏡 ----------裝— (請先閲讀背面之注意事項',η寫本頁) -訂 本紙浪尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS) Α4说格(210X297公釐) 4 19 6 0 Α7 Β7 經濟部中央橾準局—工消费合作社印哀 五 發明説明(13 ) 2 3 4 準直透鏡 2 3 5 鏡子 2 3 6 偵測器 2 3 7 差動放大 器 2 3 8 四分之一 波板 2 3 9 偏振分光 鏡 2 4 0 電氣墊 2 4 1 電氣墊 2 4 2 電氣墊 2 4 3 第一端 2 4 4 第二端 2 4 5 摺疊部份 2 4 6 第一可棄 式條 2 4 7 第二可棄 式條 2 4 8 槽 2 4 9 記錄/儲 存層 2 6 1 止動件 2 6 2 限制器 2 6 3 限制器 2 6 4 電氣墊 2 7 1 導線 2 7 2 導線 2 7 3 導線 2 7 4 導線 (諳先閱讀背面之注意事項'"寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標率(CNS)A4规格(210X297公釐)·伯- 419602 A7 B7 五、發明説明(14 ) 經濟部t央樣準局員工消费合作社印装 2 9 2 止動件 2 9 3 止動件 2 9 7 光學隔離器 2 9 8 電氣墊 2 9 9 電氣墊 3 0 1 致動器_ 3 0 2 導線 3 0 3 導線 3 4 9 記錄/儲存層 4 0 0 反射基底 4 1 1 垂直切斷器 4 2 0 鉗制電極 4 2 1 鉗制電極 4 2 2 指狀延伸件 4 4 3 軸向切斷器 4 4 4 滑件本體 4 4 6 接物光件 4 4 7 空氣軸承表面 4 6 0 淺型磁線圈 4 6 1 支撐結構 4 6 2 軛 4 9 3 四分之一波板 5 0 1 致動器 5 6 1 彈簧 I 裝 i 訂 I ! u {請先閲讀背面之注意事項""寫本頁) 本紙張尺度速用中國S家揉準(CNS ) A4洗格(210X297公釐).-J7 . 419602 '4 A7 B7 五、發明説明(15 ) 經濟部中央棵準局貝工消费合作社印袈 5 6 2 彈 簧 5 6 3 第 端 5 6 4 第 二 端 5 6 6 彈 簧 部份 5 6 7 彈 簧 部份 5 6 8 摺 疊 部份 5 6 9 支 撐 件 5 7 1 限 制 器 5 7 2 限 制 器 * 5 7 3 止 動 件 6 0 1 致 動 器 6 0 1 a 第 ― 致動 器 6 0 1 b 第 二 致動 器 6 0 1 c 第 三 致動 器 6 0 1 d 第 四 致動 器 6 0 2 致 動 器 6 0 3 致 動 器 6 0 6 懸 置 的堅 硬支撐件 6 0 7 梭 6 8 0 止 動 件 6 8 1 限 制 器 6 8 2 止 動 件 6 8 6 導 線 6 8 7 電 氣 墊 — ^--------1------ΪΤ------0 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項i寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS > A4規格(210X297公釐) -18- Α7 Β7 經濟部中央梯率局另工消费合作社印装 五、 發明説明(16 ) 6 8 8 6 9 1 6 9 2 6 9 3 6 9 6 6 9 7 6 9 8 7 0 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 7 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 7 7 9 8 0 1 8 0 2 8 0 3 . 8 0 4 8 0 5 8 0 6 8 3 0 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 {請先閲讀背面之注意事項'-寫本頁) _________\ 黏著機構 砂晶圓 反射層 黏著層 多重介電對 具有相當高折射率的層 具有相當低拆射率的層 致動器 懸置的堅硬支撐件 梭 容器 插座 鏡樁部份 彈簧部份 致動器 容器 直立肩部 柱 晶圓部份 頸部 光學開關 微晶片 入口埠 * 出口埠 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家樣準(CNS ) /U规格(210Χ297公釐)_ 19 _ A7 B7 經濟部中央標準扃貝工消费合作社印製 五、 8 3 發明説明(17 ) 6 中央縱軸 8 3 7 通道 8 3 8 溝槽 8 4 1 致動器 8 4 2 致動器 8 4 3 致動器 8 4 4 致動器 8 5 1 光學微型開關 8 5 2 微晶片 8 5 3 入口埠 8 5 4 出口埠 8 5 6 縱軸 8 5 7 通道 8 5 8 溝槽 9 0 1 光學開關 9 0 2 微晶片 9 0 3 入口埠 9 0 4 出口埠 9 0 6 溝槽 9 0 7 第一方向鏡 9 0 8 第二方向鏡 9 1 1 通道 9 1 2 通道 9 1 3 縱軸 I 訂 I H 線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事^萼4寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS ί A4规格< 210X297公釐)_ 2〇 · 419602 A7 B7 經濟部中央椟準局貝工消費合作杜印11 五' 發明説明(18 ) 9 1 4 縱軸 9 1 6 橫軸 9 1 7 托架 9 2 7 溝槽 9 3 1 鏡子 9 3 2 托架 9 4 3 鏡子 9 4 4 托孥 9 5 1 致動器 9 5 2 次級馬達 9 5 6 梭 9 5 7 可移動電極組件 9 5 8 梳型驅動構件 9 6 1 加長的框部份 9 6 2 梳型驅動條 9 6 3 梳型驅動指構件 9 6 6 固定電極組件 9 6 7 梳型驅動構件 9 6 8 梳型驅動條 9 6 9 梳型驅動指構件 9 7 6 彈簧 9 7 7 彈簧 9 7 8 堅硬支撐件 9 8 1 延伸件 --------装------ΐτ------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項'4寫本頁) ...... - -1 ____________ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家樣車(CNS ) Α4说格(210X297公釐)_ 21 - A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印装 五 、 發明説明(19 ) 1 | 9 8 2 梢 1 I 9 8 3 第一止動件 1 9 8 4 第二止動件 請 1 J 1 0 0 1 致動器 先 閲 1 I 讀 1 I 1 0 0 2 加長的梳型 驅 動指構件 背 面 I | 之 1 1 0 0 2 a 近端部份 注 意 1 I 事 1 1 0 0 2 b 自由端部份 I 1 0 0 4 梳型驅動指 構 件 寫 本 1 1 1 0 0 4 a 近端部份 頁 1 1 1 0 0 4 b 自由端部份 1 1 1 0 2 1 致動器 1 I 1 0 2 2 梳型驅動指 構 件 訂 1 1 0 5 1 光學微型開 關 1 1 1 1 0 5 2 微晶片 1 1 1 0 5 3 入口埠 1 1 1 0 5 4 出口埠 線 | 1 0 5 6 溝槽 1 1 0 6 1 中央軸 1 1 1 1 0 6 2 通道 1 1 0 6 7 鏡子 1 1 1 0 6 8 托架 1 1 1 0 7 1 雷射微型光 學 組件 I I 1 0 7 2 準直透鏡 * 1 I 1 0 了 3 分光鏡 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4规格(2H)X 297公釐)-22 ^ Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(20 ) 經濟部中央樣率局貝工消费合作社印装 1 0 8 3 四分之一波板 1 0 8 4 半波板 1 0 8 6 分光器 1 0 8 7 光偵測器 1 0 8 8 容器 1 0 8 9 彈簧 1 0 9 1 溝槽 1 0 9 6 光學微型開關 1 0 9 7 微晶片 1 1 0 1 光學微型開 1 1 0 2 微晶片 1 1 0 6 第一方向鏡 1 1 0 7 第二方向鏡 1 1 1 1 通道 1 1 1 2 通道 1 1 1 3 縱軸 1 1 1 4 縱軸 1 1 1 6 橫軸 1 1 1 7 托架 1 1 2 3 致動器對 1 1 2 3 a 第一致動器 1 1 2 3 b 第二致動器 1 1 2 6 通道 1 1 2 7 輸出埠 本紙張尺度遑用中國國家梂準(CNS > A4规格(210X297公釐) 23 - 41 9602 Jii Α7 Β7 五 、 發明説明(21 ) 1 1 3 1 鏡子 1 1 3 2 托架 1 1 4 3 鏡子 1 1 4 4 托架 1 2 0 2 驅動 條 1 3 0 1 光學 微型開關 1 3 0 2 微晶 片 1 3 0 3 入口 埠 1 3 0 4 出口 埠 1 3 0 7 溝槽 1 3 0 8 溝槽 1 3 1 2 通道 1 3 1 6 鏡子 1 3 1 7 托架 發 明說明 ---*--------裝-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項' 4寫本頁) 訂 •線 Μ濟部中央揉準扃®;工消费合作社印裝 現在參考圖l,圖l係平面視圖,說明磁光(mo) 資料儲存及取還系統之一些基本元件。一些特定的細節會 於此及圖2至4中標明,它們是要說明本發明可用於其中 之可操作系統的一些基本元件。發明不限於僅用於一特定 的M0資料儲存系統,且如下述般,不限於用在MO資料 儲存系統中,也可用於電信或其它系統。 參考圖1,系統9 5包含適用於多個'MO碟片 107之飛行讀寫頭組106,將於下說明其細節。在較 本纸張尺度適用中國國家揉率(CNS ) Α4规格(210X 297公釐).〇4- A7 B7 41 9602 -4 五、發明説明(22 ) 佳實施例中,N等於六,因而以堆叠方式(未顯示)提供 多個六碟片1 0 7。每一碟片1 0 7是雙面並具有第一和 第二背對的平面1 〇 8。設置一個飛行讀寫頭1 0 6以用 於每一MO碟片表面1 〇 8。讀寫頭1 〇 6會藉由懸置件 1 3 0及要定位於ΜΟ碟片1 0 7的表面上之致動器臂 1 0 5而耦合至旋轉的致動器磁鐵及線圈組件1 2 0。在 操作上,ΜΟ碟片1 〇 7會由主軸馬達(未顯示)旋轉以 便在飛行頭1 0 6與旋轉碟片之間產生氣動舉升力》這將 使每一飛行ΜΟ讀寫頭1 〇 6維持在位於每一ΜΟ碟片的 資料記錄表面之上的飛行條件中。舉行力會由懸置件 1 3 0所供應的相等且反向的彈力抵消。在非操作期間, 每一飛行ΜΟ讀寫頭會靜態地維持在離開Μ 0碟片1 0 7 的表面之儲存條件中,典型上係位於相鄰碟片表面的斜坡 上(未顯示)》讀寫頭當然可能著陸於非資料儲存區中的 碟片表面上:但是,此方法不會是最佳的方法》 系統9 5進一步包含雷射光學組件9 6、以至少一輸 入光載送元件或光纖9 8耦合至組件9 6之光學開關或光 學微型開關104、及多組單模式偏振維持(ΡΜ)光纖 9 7。在舉例說明的實施例中,每一組單模式ΡΜ光纖或 輸出光載送元件9 7會經由致動器臂組1 0 5中的個別致 動器臂及懸置件1 3 0而耦合至飛行ΜΟ讀寫頭1 0 6組 中的個別讀寫頭》因此,至少二個ΡΜ光纖9 7爲一組之 六組ΡΜ光纖9 7均會於一端以光學方式_合至光學開關 1 0 4 β每一此組ΡΜ光纖9 7會於另一端耦合至二個爲 --------^------?τ------.線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項又寫本頁) 經濟部中央橾车局属工消費合作杜印製 本紙張尺度遇用中國困家標準(CNS ) A4洗格(2丨0XM7公釐) -25- 9 60 2Ί 經濟部中央橾準扃貝工消費合作社印袈 A7 B7 五、發明説明(23 ) 一組之飛行M0讀寫頭1 0 6組》應瞭解,僅有舉例的 PM光纖數目顯示於圖式中。控制器111藉由接線 1 1 2電耦合至光學開關1 0 4以提供電命令訊號給光學 開關。控制器1 1 1可爲傳統型及包含用以接收一或更多 控制訊號之輸入、會於下述說明之用於每一致動器及梳型 驅動組件之放大器系列及電壓產生器、用於感測梳型驅動 組件的位置之選加機構及用於傳送輸出訊號之輸出。 圖2係顯示圖1的磁光資料儲存及取還系統之雷射光 學組件9 6。現參考圖2及3以作說明,在每一碟片 1 0 7的表面上讀取及儲存資訊需要經由光纖將雷射輸出 運送至飛行讀寫頭以致於光輸出會準確地成像於碟片的表 面上及利用線圈產生磁場,線圈係支撐於接近碟片表面之 飛行讀寫頭1 0 6上。圖2及3之說明係槪述提供光源及 磁場以選擇性存取碟片表面上的資料之理由。在圖2中* 顯示雷射光射組件9 6包含直線偏振二極體雷射源2 3 1 ,其係在可見光或近紫外線頻區中操作並發射足以讀寫 Μ0碟片組1 〇 7之光功率》在第一實施例中,雷射二極 體源可爲R F調變的雷射源。在第二實施例中,直線偏振 雷射源2 3 1可爲分散式的回饋(DFB)雷射源。在舉 例說明的實施例中,選取直線偏振雷射源2 3 1以在 6 3 5. - 6 8 5 n m的範圍之內操作;但是,也可使用其 它波長的雷射源》雷射光學組件9 6又包含:準直透鏡 2 3 4、低波長色散逸漏分光器2 3 2、友耦合透鏡 2 3 3。雷射光學組件9 6會將直線偏振外離雷射光 ----------^------.η------^ (請先聞讀背面之注意事項5,/寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉率(CNS > A4«L格(210X297公釐> -26- 五、發明説明(24 ) Α7 Β7 .«濟部中央橾隼局属工消费合作杜印製 1 9 1 (顯示於圖 至光學開關1 0 4 板2 3 8、鏡子2 偵測器組2 3 6。 表面1 0 8所反射 中)會由光學開關 漏分光鏡2 3 2引 分之一波板2 3 8 在第二實施例中, 2 3 1與準直透鏡 者般,此型差動偵 正交偏振分量中的 碟片1 0 7組中的 量測。在這二個實 差動訊號會由差動 出》本發明未侷限 域中也有其它著名 射的雷射光1 9 2 圖3係顯示代 。在較佳實施例中 包含:光學開關1 飛行Μ 0讀寫頭1 完整說明般,光學 外離的雷射光19 1 )導引(從直線偏振雷射源2 3 1 ) 。雷射光組件9 6又包含:四分之一波 3 5、偏振分光器2 3 9及光二極體或 在第一實施例中,由Μ0碟片1 0 7的 之直線偏振雷射光1 9 2 (圖示於圖1 1 0 4導引至耦合透鏡2 3 3,並由逸 導至差動偵測器,差動偵測器包括:四 、鏡子235、及偏振分光器239。 光學隔離器2 9 7係包含於雷射源 2 3 4之間。如同此技藝中已良好建立 測設計會量測反射雷射光1 9 2的二個 光功率•而差動訊號爲克爾效應在Μ 0 一碟片的表面處感應之偏振旋轉之靈敏 施例中,在由偵測器2 3 6轉換之後, 放大器2 3 7處理以當作訊號2 9 4輸 於上述光學元件及光源之配置,在此領 之用以導引外離雷射光191及偵測反 之技術。 表性的光程,包含D F Β雷射源的使用 ,代表性的光學通道係顯示於圖3中, 04、 ΡΜ光纖組97中的一光繊、及 0 6組中的一讀寫頭。如同下述將更加 開關1 0 4會提供充份的選擇度以導引 1(相對於雷射源231))進入個別 請 先 聞 讀 背 項 訂 線 本纸張尺度遑用中國Β家樣準(CNS > 格(210Χ297公釐)_27 419602 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(25 ) 的單模式PM光纖9 7的個別近側端。外離的雷射光 1 9 1會進一步由單模式PM光纖9 7引導以離開個別的 遠側端*以便通過飛行Μ 0讀寫頭1 〇 6到達個別Μ 0碟 片1 0 7的每一表面下層的記錄/儲存層3 4 9 ^ 以任何適當的雷射源提供外離雷射光1 9 1,較佳地 是由分散式回饋(D F Β )雷射源之直線偏振雷射源 2 3 1所提供。在寫入資訊期間,外離的雷射光1 9 1會 由光學開關1 0 4選擇性地導引至Μ0碟片1 〇 7以藉由 加熱有用的選取點3 4 0至近似記錄/儲存層3 4 9的居 里點而降低記錄/儲存層3 4 9的矯頑磁性。較佳的是, 外離的雷射光1 9 1之光強度保持固定,而時變垂直偏移 磁場會用於界定垂直於Μ0碟片1 0 7的'^上#或"^下# 磁域的樣式。此技術係所謂的磁場調變(MFM)。接著 ,當有用的選取點3 4 0冷卻時,資訊會編碼於個別旋轉 碟片1 0 7的記錄/儲存層3 4 9之內° 經濟部中夬橾隼扃負工消费合作社印装 (请先閱讀背面之注意事項辱填寫本頁) 在讀出資訊期間,外離雷射光1 9 1 (相較於寫入爲 較低強度)會被選擇性地導引至Μ0碟片1 0 7 ’以致於 在何給定的有用點3 4 0處克爾效應會造成(在外離雷射 光1 9 1從記錄/儲存層3 4 9反射時)反射的雷射光 1 9 2具有順時鐘或逆時鐘感應3 6 3之旋轉偏振’順時 鐘或逆時鐘感應係視有用點3 4 0處的磁域極性而定。 上述光程本質上係雙向的β因此’會經由飛行Μ 0讀 寫頭1 0 6而接收反射的雷射光1 9 2且反射的雷射光 1 9 2會進入單模式ΡΜ光纖9 7的遠側端。反射的雷射 本紙張尺度適用中國國家橾準(CNS ) Α4洗格(210Χ297公釐).28- 經濟部中央樣率扃貝工消費合作枉印*.419602 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Industrial and Commercial Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, M Industrial Consumer Cooperative, V. Description of the Invention (ii) Scope of the Invention The present invention relates generally to optical switches, and particularly to optical switches having multiple movable mirrors. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Switches for switching light from one fiber to another or from free-space beams to one or more fibers have always been of great interest, especially for telecommunications and digital networks. A variety of switching configurations are useful, including 1x2, lxn, and ηχη, where η is a number from 2 to about 64. Various principles have been used for conventional switches, including effect and electromechanical actuators, and working switches using these technologies are now commercially available. The conventional switches are very expensive and quite large. Conventional 1 X η electromechanical fiber switches are typically mobile input fibers so that they will communicate with the desired output fiber, move a single lens so that the input light will be coupled with the required output fiber, or move refractive optical elements Until the required coupling is achieved. Typically, a collimating lens is placed at each fiber so that the collimated light is switched by an electromechanical actuator. An example of such a switch is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,322,126 to Minowa et al., In which the 稜鏡 -shaped structure moves between input and output fibers. Another conventional approach is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,208,880 to Riza et al., Where a single lens is translated to deflect collimated light into multiple output fibers. A different approach is to use a single rotating mirror to couple light into multiple output fibers, as shown in, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,647,300. -IT -------- install-(Please read the "+" on the back side first "" write this page) Binding book paper scale standard free use in difficult countries (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm ) -4- 41 9602 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives. V. Description of the invention (2) Since the conventional electromechanical actuators are quite large and expensive, most of the conventional methods A single electromechanical actuator * linear or angular actuator is used to deflect the input beam. A single electromechanical actuator typically has a mechanism that accurately controls the position of the mirror to accurately couple light into the output fiber. This accurate mirror positioning also increases the size and cost of conventional actuators, especially when the number of output fibers is greater than two. In addition, there is no simple method to obtain the required positioning resolution. Most of the conventional optical opening relationships are designed for telecommunication applications, where the wavelength of light used is typically 1.5 microns or 1.3 microns in the infrared range. Also, many conventional opening relationships are designed for The so-called multi-mode fiber has a large central core, which carries light, especially for infrared light. The positioning accuracy required to achieve high optical coupling is one-fifth of the diameter of the central core of the fiber. Most of the multi-mode optical fibers used for infrared have a core diameter of about 50 microns, so that the positioning accuracy during coupling only needs to be within about 10 microns. This accuracy can be achieved using traditional techniques. In many optical systems, it is desirable to use a single-mode fiber that can achieve a larger optical bandwidth. The core diameter of these fibers is about 8 micrometers when used for infrared and about four micrometers when used for red light. So | for these systems, the required positioning accuracy is reduced to less than 1 micron, which is about one-tenth that of conventional multi-mode optical switches. Miniature structures fabricated using silicon integrated circuit process technology have developed different sensing and actuation applications. Compared to traditional and conventional implementations in these and other applications, microstructures are more cost-effective, reliable, and better than the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). 5 --------- Install ------- IT ------ M (Please read the precautions on the back and write this page first) Printed by the Central Ministry of Economy 413GC, A7 _ B7_ V. Description of the invention (3) Benefits. Integrated actuators, that is, microstructures in which the actuator and the mechanical structure are manufactured at the same time, are advantageous from the viewpoints of cost, reliability, and ease of assembly. Different actuation methods have been used for integrated actuators of microstructures, which include electrostatic, electromagnetic, thermal, and thermo-pneumatic types. Thermal technology provides great power with a fairly low response time. Electric field technology is complicated due to the difficulty of providing integrated coils with a sufficient number of turns in a planar structure and the high power consumption caused by the high current required to generate a magnetic field. The force increases as the gap between the elements decreases, so 葶 electric actuation becomes quite attractive in terms of small size. Electrostatic components consume low power and operating speed is usually limited only by the mechanism's structural response. The driving force of the conventional electrostatic actuator is typically generated by using only one of the two types of driving electrodes. These two types of driving electrodes are the required comb drive fingers or parallel plates, respectively. Parallel plate capacitors produce forces proportional to the square of the driving voltage and inversely proportional to the square of the gap between the plates. This mechanism limits the useful range of action of such actuators. When there is a large gap, the electrostatic force cannot overcome the restoring elastic force of the actuator support, and when the gap is less than about 2/3 of the initial gap, The actuator becomes unstable when rectilinear force is applied. "For practical micro-structural components, the useful range of action of a parallel plate actuator is less than 10 microns. Comb drive actuators, such as those described in U.S. Patent No. 5,025,346 to Tang, are characterized by a series of finger combination electrodes * whose capacitance can be used within an action range approximately equal to the length of the comb finger Provides a fairly constant force. The paper size of this action template applies the Chinese national standard {CNS) A4 * UM 210X 297 mm) · 6 _ I-^ -------- ^ ------ 1T ------. ^ (Please read the precautions on the back ^^ write this page) 419602 A7 __B7_ V. Description of the invention (4) / The range can be greater than 100 microns. The force that can be obtained from each finger member is so small that an actual comb drive actuator typically has a number of finger members between 10 and 200 to produce a suitable force for a microstructure device. The serious difficulty of the conventional comb drive device is that the maximum movement of the device is limited by the so-called instability of the electromechanical side. In an ideal situation, the lateral force on each finger member will be exactly balanced. However, if the finger member If the precise center of the gap is not forced down, a side force will be generated by the electrode. When the forward force is almost constant when the deflection is increased, the side force increases rapidly with the side deflection. • When the differential of the side force with respect to the side displacement is greater than the lateral mechanical elasticity coefficient, instability occurs. If this differential exceeds the side elastic coefficient of the motor support structure, the comb drive will move quickly to the side, short the drive electrode and interrupt the forward movement of the actuator. The performance of this conventional device is explained in J. Micromech. 320 in Microeng. 6 (1996)-M * in the Ministry of Economic Affairs * printed by the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives (please read the precautions on the back page) ___________ i 〆-3 2 9 Legtenberg, Groeneveld, and "C.omb-drive actuators for large displacements" by Elwenspoek et al. They are designed to have a maximum displacement of about 40 microns. The design technique in the Legtenberg paper describes the maximum displacement of conventional comb-driven actuators, but Unspecified design with substantial deflection. Early drive actuators used thin polycrystalline silicon layers provided by so-called surface micromechanical processing to make finger members and movable, lateral drive elements. Polycrystalline silicon is typically 1 to 2 Micron thick. Since the lateral feature size of these devices can be compared to the thickness of the material, the stiffness of the component to off-plane deflection is very low. Depth Ion-etching (DR i Ε) can produce similar structures in monocrystalline silicon with a thickness of 100 micrometers. DR 1 E says that the paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 × 297 mm) ' 4 Printed oxygen 9602 A7 _B7_ of the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards and Assistance of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. The description of the invention (5) is shown in Proceedings Of Transducer'9 5 (1 9 9 5) * 556-559 pages, Klassen, Petersen, Noworolski, "Silicon Fusion Bonding And Deep Reactive Ion Etching; A New Technology For Microstructures ·" by Logan, Maluf, Brown, Storment, McCully, and Kovacs. These thicker structures can provide larger vertical electrode area and higher off-plane deflection rigidity. Recently, other manufacturing techniques, including thicker surface micro-machined polycrystalline silicon or photolithographic etched flat mold metal structures, have been used to increase the thickness and thus the off-plane stiffness of the comb drive structure. None of these manufacturing techniques can be used alone to improve the ultimate deflection of the conventional comb drive structure. Generally speaking, the object of the present invention is to provide an optical microswitch which overcomes the above disadvantages. Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical micro switch having the above-mentioned features, which uses at least one electrostatic micro-actuator having at least one comb-type drive assembly in the electrostatic micro-actuator. A characteristic optical micro-switch in which the lateral instability force in the comb-type drive assembly of the electrostatic micro-actuator is minimized. Another object of the invention is to provide an optical micro-switch having the above-mentioned features, wherein a mechanism is provided for attaching or coupling an electrostatic micro-actuator to an external f. Device. Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical micro-switch having the above-mentioned features, in which a comb-type driving assembly in an electrostatic micro-actuator is used, & «. 里 1 ^ -------- ¾ --- --- ΪΤ ------ 0 (Please read and read the notes on the back to write this page) The paper size is far away from China National Liang Liang (CNS) A4 Zhuge (2 丨 0X297 mm) ~~ 4196 Lithium Ministry of Technology t'yang sample rate bureau W? Industrial Consumer Cooperatives printed A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (6) to obtain a large deflection "Another object of the invention is to provide an optical micro switch with the above characteristics, in which a plurality of The electrostatic microactuator is aligned along at least one channel of the microswitch. Another object of the present invention is to provide an optical micro switch 1 having the above characteristics for use in a magneto-optical data storage system. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides an optical switch using a large deflection high-speed micro actuator and the like. Optical switches can be used in different systems, such as magneto-optical data storage systems, telecommunications systems or data transfer systems. Miniature actuators can be modified for suspension design, comb drive elements, dynamic electric drive control, positive position stop and position sensing. Micro-actuators can be used in different designs of optical switches or other different applications, for example: horizontal.quotient.resonators, balanced force accelerometers, or pocket grippers. High off-plane rigidity and / or large electrode area can be used to create microstructures that can generate large forces and displacements. Brief Description of the Drawings The drawings are a bit sketchy in many embodiments and are incorporated in this specification as part of the drawings. The drawings illustrate several embodiments of the invention and cooperate with the explanations to explain the principles of the invention. . Fig. 1 is a magneto-optical data storage and retrieval system having the optical micro-opening of the present invention. Figure 2 is the laser component of the magneto-optical data storage and retrieval system of Figure 1. The ft scale of this paper applies to the national solid standard {CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) · g C, please read the precautions on the back first'-rr write this page} Packing. Line 419602 Α7 Β7 Central Ministry of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Economic Affairs Du Yinxian, Coordination of Consumers and Consumers. V. Explanation of the Invention (7) Figure 3 is a view showing the representative optical channels used for the magneto-optical data and the retrieval system of Figure 1, including the use of a radio source. Figs. 4a-4g show the flying magneto-optical data of the magneto-optical data storage and retrieval system of Fig. 1 in a perspective view, a side sectional view, an unfolded sectional view, a side view, a front view, a bottom view, and a rear view, respectively. Read-write head. Fig. 5 is an enlarged plan view of an embodiment of an electrostatic actuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention. Fig. 6 is a plan view of the electrostatic microactuator of Fig. 5, in which the mirror system is in a retracted condition. Fig. 7 is a plan view of the electrostatic microactuator of Fig. 5 in which the mirror system is in an extended condition. Fig. 8 is a plan view of another embodiment of the electrostatic microactuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention. Fig. 9 is a sectional view of the electrostatic microactuator of Fig. 8 viewed along line 9-9 of Fig. 8 "Fig. 10 is a view of the electrostatic microactuator of Fig. 8 viewed along line 10-10 of Fig. 8 Section view. Fig. 11 is a plan view of still another embodiment of an electrostatic microactuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention "Fig. 12 is a plan view of the optical microswitch of the present invention under conditions at the time of manufacture or before operation β FIG. 13 is a plan view of the optical micro-switch of FIG. 12 with a mirror extended and other mirrors retracted. 'FIG. 14 is a plane of another embodiment of the optical micro switch of the present invention —--------- installation— (Please read the precautions on the back first') W Write this page> CNS Standard A4 (210 × 297mm) -1〇 ^ T 3 6Ό 2 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (8) Figure 15 is another embodiment of the optical micro switch of the present invention Plan view 11 of FIG. 16 is a plan view of still another embodiment of the optical micro switch of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a plan view of still another embodiment of the optical micro switch of the present invention. FIG. 18 is an optical micro switch of the present invention. Plane view of still another embodiment 8 Fig. 19 is a plan view of still another embodiment of the optical micro switch of the present invention. Fig. 20 is another of the electrostatic micro actuator used in the optical micro switch of the present invention. Plan view of the embodiment "Fig. 21 is a graph showing the relationship between the position of the shuttle of the electrostatic microactuator of Fig. 20 and a specific driving voltage. Fig. 2 2 is an electrostatic microactuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention. A plan view of another embodiment of the actuator. The central government of the Ministry of Justice of the People's Republic of China cooperated with the printing of male workers (Please read the “Notes on the back”, transcript 苋) Figure 2 3 is the lateral rigid safety boundary of the electrostatic miniature actuator used in Figure 2 2 Figure of deflection. Figure 24 is a plan view of another embodiment of an electrostatic microactuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention. "Figure 25 is a lateral view of the electrostatic microactuator used in Figure 24. The graph of the rigid safety boundary relative to the deflection. '' Figure 26 is the clamping force of the electrostatic micro-actuator used in Figure 24 relative to the paper size. Applicable to the Chinese standard (CNS> Α4 Zhuge (210X297 mm) ) -11-Ministry of Economic Affairs 4-Central Bureau led the bureau's negative labor * · Cooperative Du Yin *. Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (9) The figure of the clamp electrode separation. Figure 2 7 is an optical micro switch used in the present invention A plan view of another embodiment of the electrostatic microactuator in FIG. 2 is a plan view of another embodiment of the electrostatic microactuator for the optical microswitch of the present invention without a mirror. FIG. 2 9 Plane view of the electrostatic microactuator of Fig. 28 attached with a mirror "Fig. 30 is used for A plan view of another embodiment of the electrostatic microactuator in the optical microswitch of the present invention. Fig. 31 is a plan view of still another embodiment of the electrostatic microactuator for the optical microswitch of the present invention. Fig. 3 2 is a plan view of still another embodiment of the electrostatic microactuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention. Fig. 3 3 is another embodiment of the electrostatic microactuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention. Plan view. Figure 34 is a plan view of still another embodiment of an electrostatic microactuator used in the optical microswitch of the present invention. * Figure 35 is a plan of another embodiment of the optical microswitch of the present invention. ----------- Installation ------ Order ------ line (please read the note on the back first to write this page) View β Main components comparison table 9 5 Magneto-optical data Storage and retrieval system 9 6 Laser light components' 9 7 Single-mode polarization-maintaining optical fiber This paper size is free from the Chinese national standard (CNS M4 specification (210X297 cm) _ 12. A 7 B7 Co-operative printing V. Description of invention (10) 9 8 Optical fiber 10 0 Microcrystalline Sheet 10 1 Actuator 10 2 Collimating lens 10 3 Mirror 10 3 a Mirror 10 3 b Mirror 10 4 Optical switch X 0 5 Actuator arm 10 6 Flight read / write head 10 7 Magneto-optical disk 10 8 Magneto-optical disk surface 10 9 Shuttle 11 1 Controller 11 2 Wiring 11 3 Longitudinal axis. 12 0 Rotary actuator magnet and coil assembly 1 3 0 Suspension 13 1 Support 15 0 Inlet port 15 1 Outlet port 15 6 Inlet groove 15 7 Channel ' 16 1 Exit groove {Please read the notes on the back first and write this page) The paper scale is far from the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 size (210 X 297 mm) _ 3 -4 ί θ 60 2, ^ ι | Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (11) Ministry of Economic Affairs t Central Prototype Bureau Shellfish Consumer Cooperative Seal 1 7 0 Module 1 7 1 Silicon dioxide layer 1 7 4 Metal layer 1 7 5 Air gap 1 8 0 Actuation 1 8 0 a actuator 1 8 0 b actuator 1 8 0 c actuator 1 8 0 d actuator 1 9 1 linearly polarized external laser light 1 9 2 linearly polarized laser light 2 0 8 first Movable assembly 2 0 8 a first comb drive member 2 0 8 b second comb drive member 2 0 8 c third comb drive Moving member 2 0 9 Second movable assembly 2 0 9 a First comb drive member 2 0 9 b Second comb drive member 2 0 9 c Third comb drive member 2 0 9 d Comb drive member 2 1 0 1st fixed assembly 2 1 0 a 1st comb drive member 2 1 0 b 2nd comb drive partner 2 1 0 c 3rd comb drive member I-^ -------- ^- ---- IT ------ ^ {Please read the notes on the back first 'write this page) This paper size is free to use China National Sample (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ _ 4 1 9 6 〇 2 η A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (12) Central sample bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Bei Gong Xiao #Cooperative society seal * 2 1 1 Comb drive finger member 2 1 2 Comb drive finger member 2 1 3 Base 2 1 4 Spring 2 1 6 Connection bar 2 1 7 Spring 2 1 8 Extension 2 1 8 a Extension 2 1 9 Bracket 2 1 9 a Bracket 2 1 9 b Bracket 2 2 1 Beam 2 2 2 Strip 2 2 4 Spring part 2 2 5 Spring part 2 2 6 Side surface 2 2 7 Side surface 2 3 0 2nd fixed assembly 2 3 0 a 1st comb drive member 2 3 0 b 2nd comb drive member 2 3 0 c 3rd comb 2 3 1 Linear Polarization Diode Laser Source 2 3 2 Beamsplitters • 2 3 3 Coupling Lens ------------ Installation-(Please read the precautions on the back ', η copy (Page)-General Chinese National Standards (CNS) for paper scales A4 (210X297 mm) 4 19 6 0 Α7 Β7 Central Government Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs—Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives ’Seals of Five Inventions (13) 2 3 4 Standards Straight lens 2 3 5 Mirror 2 3 6 Detector 2 3 7 Differential amplifier 2 3 8 Quarter wave plate 2 3 9 Polarizing beam splitter 2 4 0 Electrical pad 2 4 1 Electrical pad 2 4 2 Electrical pad 2 4 3 First end 2 4 4 Second end 2 4 5 Folding part 2 4 6 First disposable strip 2 4 7 Second disposable strip 2 4 8 Slot 2 4 9 Recording / storage layer 2 6 1 Stop Item 2 6 2 Limiter 2 6 3 Limiter 2 6 4 Electrical pad 2 7 1 Conductor 2 7 2 Conductor 2 7 3 Conductor 2 7 4 Conductor (Please read the precautions on the back first '" write this page) Paper size Free use of China's National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) · Bo-419602 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (14) Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Standards Printed by the employee consumer cooperative 2 9 2 Stopper 2 9 3 Stopper 2 9 7 Optical isolator 2 9 8 Electrical pad 2 9 9 Electrical pad 3 0 1 Actuator_ 3 0 2 Wire 3 0 3 Wire 3 4 9 Recording / storage layer 4 0 0 Reflective substrate 4 1 1 Vertical cutter 4 2 0 Clamp electrode 4 2 1 Clamp electrode 4 2 2 Finger extension 4 4 3 Axial cutter 4 4 4 Slider body 4 4 6 Light receiving parts 4 4 7 Air bearing surface 4 6 0 Shallow magnetic coil 4 6 1 Support structure 4 6 2 Yoke 4 9 3 Quarter wave plate 5 0 1 Actuator 5 6 1 Spring I I! U {Please read the notes on the back first " " Write this page) This paper size is quickly used in China S family (CNS) A4 wash grid (210X297 mm) .- J7. 419602 '4 A7 B7 5 、 Explanation of invention (15) Seal 5 6 2 Spring 5 6 3 First end 5 6 4 Second end 5 6 6 Spring part 5 6 7 Spring part 5 6 8 Folding part 5 5 9 Support 5 7 1 Limiter 5 7 2 Limiter * 5 7 3 Stopper 6 0 1 Actuator 6 0 1 a Actuator 6 0 1 b Second actuator 6 0 1 c Third actuator 6 0 1 d Fourth actuator 6 0 2 Actuator 6 0 3 Actuator 6 0 6 Suspended hard support 6 0 7 Shuttle 6 8 0 Stopper 6 8 1 Limiter 6 8 2 Stopper 6 8 6 Wire 6 8 7 Electrical pad — ^ -------- 1 ------ ΪΤ-- ---- 0 (Please read the precautions on the back to write this page first) This paper size is free to use the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 size (210X297mm) -18- Α7 Β7 Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Ministry of Economy Printing by Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of Invention (16) 6 8 8 6 9 1 6 9 2 6 9 3 6 9 6 6 9 7 6 9 8 7 0 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 7 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 7 7 9 8 0 1 8 0 2 8 0 3. 8 0 4 8 0 5 8 0 6 8 3 0 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 (Please read the precautions on the back first-write this page) _________ \ Adhesive mechanism Sand wafer Reflective layer Adhesive layer Multiple dielectrics Layers with a relatively high refractive index Layers with a very low rate of release Container upright shoulder post Wafer part of the neck optical switch microchip inlet port * exit port The paper size is free from the Chinese National Standard (CNS) / U specification (210 × 297 mm) _ 19 _ A7 B7 Printed by the Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Five, 8 3 Description of the invention (17) 6 Central longitudinal axis 8 3 7 Channel 8 3 8 Groove 8 4 1 Actuator 8 4 2 Actuator 8 4 3 Actuator 8 4 4 Actuator 8 5 1 Optical micro switch 8 5 2 microchip 8 5 3 inlet port 8 5 4 outlet port 8 5 6 vertical axis 8 5 7 channel 8 5 8 groove 9 0 1 optical switch 9 0 2 microchip 9 0 3 inlet port 9 0 4 Exit port 9 0 6 groove 9 0 7 first directional mirror 9 0 8 second directional mirror 9 1 1 channel 9 1 2 channel 9 1 3 vertical axis I order IH line (please read the notes on the back first ^ 萼 4 write (This page) This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS ί A4 size < 210X297 mm) _ 2〇 · 419602 A7 B7 Central Government Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumption Cooperation, Du Yin 11 5 'Description of invention (18) 9 1 4 vertical axis 9 1 6 horizontal axis 9 1 7 bracket 9 2 7 groove 9 3 1 mirror 9 3 2 bracket 9 4 3 mirror 9 4 4 bracket 9 5 1 Actuator 9 5 2 Secondary motor 9 5 6 Shuttle 9 5 7 Movable electrode assembly 9 5 8 Comb drive member 9 6 1 Extended frame part 9 6 2 Comb drive bar 9 6 3 Comb drive finger Component 9 6 6 Fixed electrode assembly 9 6 7 Comb drive member 9 6 8 Comb drive bar 9 6 9 Comb drive finger member 9 7 6 Spring 9 7 7 Spring 9 7 8 Hard support 9 8 1 Extension- ------ Installation ------ ΐτ ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back '4 to write this page) ......--1 ____________ This paper size applies to China National prototype (CNS) Α4 grid (210X297 mm) _ 21-A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (19) 1 | 9 8 2 Pin 1 I 9 8 3 First stop Actuator 1 9 8 4 Please refer to the second stopper 1 J 1 0 0 1 Actuator first read 1 I Read 1 I 1 0 0 2 Extended comb drive finger back I | 1 1 0 0 2 a near Note on the end part 1 I Matter 1 1 0 0 2 b Free end part I 1 0 0 4 Comb drive finger component book 1 1 1 0 0 4 a Proximal part page 1 1 1 0 0 4 b Free end part 1 1 1 0 2 1 Actuator 1 I 1 0 2 2 Comb drive finger member 1 1 0 5 1 Optical micro switch 1 1 1 1 0 5 2 Microchip 1 1 1 0 5 3 Inlet port 1 1 1 0 5 4 Outlet port line | 1 0 5 6 Groove 1 1 0 6 1 Central axis 1 1 1 1 0 6 2 Channel 1 1 0 6 7 Mirror 1 1 1 0 6 8 Bracket 1 1 1 0 7 1 Laser micro optics II 1 0 7 2 Collimating lens * 1 I 1 0 3 Beamsplitters 1 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (2H) X 297 mm ) -22 ^ Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (20) Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Sample Rate Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1 0 8 3 Quarter wave plate 1 0 8 4 Half wave plate 1 0 8 6 Spectroscope 1 0 8 7 Photodetector 1 0 8 8 Container 1 0 8 9 Spring 1 0 9 1 Groove 1 0 9 6 Optical Micro Switch 1 0 9 7 Microchip 1 1 0 1 Optical Micro Open 1 1 0 2 Microchip 1 1 0 6 First direction mirror 1 1 0 7 Second direction mirror 1 1 1 1 Channel 1 1 1 2 Channel 1 1 1 3 Vertical axis 1 1 1 4 Vertical axis 1 1 1 6 Horizontal axis 1 1 1 7 Bracket 1 1 2 3 actuation 1 1 2 3 a 1st actuator 1 1 2 3 b 2nd actuator 1 1 2 6 Channel 1 1 2 7 Output port This paper size is in accordance with Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 size (210X297 Mm) 23-41 9602 Jii Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (21) 1 1 3 1 Mirror 1 1 3 2 Bracket 1 1 4 3 Mirror 1 1 4 4 Bracket 1 2 0 2 Drive bar 1 3 0 1 Optical Micro switch 1 3 0 2 Microchip 1 3 0 3 Inlet port 1 3 0 4 Outlet port 1 3 0 7 Groove 1 3 0 8 Groove 1 3 1 2 Channel 1 3 1 6 Mirror 1 3 1 7 Bracket invention description --- * -------- Installation-(Please read the precautions on the back first '4 Write this page) Fig. 1 is a plan view illustrating some basic elements of the magneto-optical (mo) data storage and retrieval system. Some specific details are indicated here and in Figs. 2 to 4 to illustrate some basic elements of the operable system in which the present invention can be used. The invention is not limited to being used only for a specific M0 data storage system, and is not limited to being used in an MO data storage system, as described below, but may also be used in telecommunications or other systems. Referring to FIG. 1, the system 95 includes a flying read-write head group 106 suitable for a plurality of 'MO discs 107', details of which will be described below. In this paper size, the Chinese National Kneading Rate (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) is applicable. 〇4- A7 B7 41 9602 -4 V. Description of the Invention (22) In the preferred embodiment, N is equal to six. Stacking method (not shown) provides multiple six-disc 1 0 7. Each disc 107 is double-sided and has first and second back-facing planes 108. A flying read / write head 106 is provided for each MO disc surface 108. The read / write head 1 〇6 is coupled to the rotating actuator magnet and coil assembly 1 through the suspension 1 30 and the actuator arm 1 0 5 to be positioned on the surface of the MIMO disc 10 7. 0. In operation, the ΜΟ Disc 1 07 will be rotated by a spindle motor (not shown) to generate a pneumatic lifting force between the flying head 106 and the rotating disc. This will make each flying MIMO read / write head 1 〇6 Maintained in flight conditions above the data recording surface of each MO disc. The holding force is counteracted by the equal and opposite spring force provided by the suspension 130. During the non-operation period, each flying ΜΟ read / write head will be statically maintained in the storage condition away from the surface of the M0 disc 1 07, which is typically located on the slope of the surface of the adjacent disc (not shown). The write head may of course land on the surface of the disc in a non-data storage area: however, this method will not be the best method. System 9 5 further includes a laser optical component 9 6. It carries at least one input optical carrier element or The optical fiber 98 is coupled to the optical switch or optical microswitch 104 of the component 96, and a plurality of sets of single-mode polarization maintaining (PM) optical fibers 97. In the illustrated embodiment, each group of single-mode PM optical fibers or output optical carrying elements 97 is coupled to the individual actuator arms and suspensions 130 in the actuator arm group 105. Flying ΜΟ read / write heads in individual 106 groups of individual read heads "Therefore, at least two PM optical fibers 9 7 are in a group of six groups of PM optical fibers 9 7 will be optically combined at one end to the optical switch 1 0 4 β Each of this group of PM fiber 9 7 will be coupled to two wires at the other end as -------- ^ ------? τ ------. (Please read the note on the back first The matter is also written on this page.) The Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Central Government Bureau of Vehicles is responsible for industrial and consumer cooperation. The printed paper size meets the standards of Chinese families (CNS) A4 (2 丨 0XM7 mm) -25- 9 60 2Ί橾 Junzhuan Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. Seal A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (23) One group of flying M0 read / write heads 106 group "It should be understood that only the number of PM fiber is shown in the figure. The controller 111 is electrically coupled to the optical switch 104 by wiring 1 12 to provide an electrical command signal to the optical switch. The controller 1 1 1 may be a conventional type and include an input for receiving one or more control signals, and a series of amplifiers and voltage generators for each actuator and comb drive assembly, which will be described below. Selection mechanism for sensing position of comb drive assembly and output for transmitting output signal. Fig. 2 shows the laser optical components 96 of the magneto-optical data storage and retrieval system of Fig. 1. Referring to Figures 2 and 3 for illustration, reading and storing information on the surface of each disc 107 requires the laser output to be transferred to the flying read / write head via optical fiber so that the light output will be accurately imaged on the disc The magnetic field is generated on the surface of the disc and the coil is supported on the flying read / write head 106 near the surface of the disc. The explanations of Figs. 2 and 3 explain the reason for providing a light source and a magnetic field to selectively access data on the surface of the disc. In FIG. 2 * it is shown that the laser light emitting component 9 6 includes a linearly polarized diode laser source 2 3 1, which operates in the visible light or near-ultraviolet frequency region and emits sufficient light to read and write the MO 0 disc group 107. Power> In the first embodiment, the laser diode source may be an RF modulated laser source. In the second embodiment, the linearly polarized laser source 2 3 1 may be a distributed feedback (DFB) laser source. In the illustrated embodiment, a linearly polarized laser source of 2 3 1 is selected to operate in the range of 6 3 5.-6 8 5 nm; however, laser sources of other wavelengths can also be used "laser optics 9 6 also includes: a collimating lens 2 3 4, a low-wavelength dispersive leakage beam splitter 2 3 2, and a friendly coupling lens 2 3 3. Laser optics 9 6 will linearly polarize the laser light out of the laser ------------ ^ ------. Η ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back 5 , / Write this page) This paper size is applicable to China's national kneading rate (CNS > A4 «L grid (210X297mm > -26-) V. Description of the invention (24) Α7 Β7. Consumer cooperation Du printed 1 9 1 (shown in the figure to the optical switch 1 0 4 plate 2 3 8 and mirror 2 detector group 2 3 6. The surface 1 0 8 is reflecting) will leak the beam splitter 2 3 by the optical switch 2 Infrared wave plate 2 3 8 In the second embodiment, 2 3 1 is like a collimator lens, and this type of differential detection is used to measure the polarization in the disc 1 0 7 group. These two real differential signals will be produced by the differential. "There are also other well-known laser beams in the unrestricted area of the present invention. Fig. 3 shows the generation. In the preferred embodiment, it includes: optical switch 1 flying M 0 reading Write head 1 As a complete description, the optically separated laser light 19 1) is guided (from a linearly polarized laser source 2 3 1). The laser light component 9 6 further includes: quarter wave 3 5 and polarization beam splitter 2 3 9 and photodiode or in the first embodiment The linearly polarized laser light 1 9 2 from the M0 disc 10 7 (illustrated in Figure 1 0 4 is guided to the coupling lens 2 3 3, and is guided to the differential detector for differential detection. The device includes: four, a mirror 235, and a polarizing beam splitter 239. The optical isolator 2 9 7 is included between the laser sources 2 3 4. As this technique has been well established, the design will measure the reflected laser light 1 9 2 In the sensitive embodiment of polarization rotation induced by the Kerr effect at the surface of an M 0 disc, after being converted by the detector 2 3 6, the amplifier 2 3 7 processes to The signal 2 9 4 is input to the configuration of the above-mentioned optical components and light sources, and is used here to guide the external laser light 191 and the detection of the reverse technology. The apparent optical path, including the use of the DF Β laser source, represents The optical channel system is shown in Fig. 3, 04, one optical fiber in the PM fiber group 97, and one read / write head in the 06 group. As will be described below, more switches 1 0 4 will provide sufficient selectivity. Use Guide 1 (relative to laser source 231) to enter the individual. Please read and read the back of the book. The paper size is the same as that of China B. S > Grid (210 × 297 mm) _27 419602 Α7 Β7 V. Individual near-end of single-mode PM fiber 9 7 of the invention description (25). The external laser light 1 9 1 will be further composed of single-mode PM fiber 9 7 Guide to leave the individual distal end * so as to reach each individual M 0 disc 1 0 7 by flying the M 0 read / write head 1 0 6 and the recording / storage layer 3 4 9 ^ with any suitable laser source The externally emitted laser light 1 9 1 is preferably provided by a linearly polarized laser source 2 3 1 of a distributed feedback (DF Β) laser source. During the writing of information, the external laser light 1 9 1 is selectively guided by the optical switch 10 4 to the M0 disc 1 07 to heat the useful selection point 3 4 0 to approximate the recording / storage layer. The Curie point of 3 4 9 decreases the coercivity of the recording / storage layer 3 4 9. Preferably, the light intensity of the outgoing laser light 1 9 1 remains fixed, and the time-varying vertical offset magnetic field will be used to define the '^ 上 # or " ^ 下 # magnetic perpendicular to the M0 disc 1 0 7 The style of the field. This technique is called magnetic field modulation (MFM). Then, when the useful selection point 3 4 0 cools down, the information will be encoded within the recording / storage layer 3 4 9 of the individual rotating disc 1 7 ° Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives (Please Read the precautions on the back first and fill in this page) During reading out information, the external laser light 1 9 1 (lower intensity compared to writing) will be selectively guided to the M0 disc 1 0 7 ' So that at a given useful point 3, the Kerr effect will cause (when the external laser light 1 9 1 reflects from the recording / storage layer 3 4 9) the reflected laser light 1 9 2 has clockwise or counterclockwise induction The rotation polarization of 3 6 3 'clockwise or counterclockwise induction depends on the magnetic domain polarity at the useful point 3 4 0. The above-mentioned optical path is essentially a two-way β. Therefore, it will receive the reflected laser light 1 9 2 and the reflected laser light 1 9 2 will enter the far side of the single-mode PM fiber 9 7 via the flying M 0 read-write head 1 0 6. end. Reflected laser This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 washer (210 × 297 mm). 28- Central sample rate of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, cooperation of shellfish consumption *.

SC 2 :V A7 _ B7 五、發明説明(26 ) 光1 9 2會延著單模式PM光纖9 7傳播以在其近側端離 開並由光學開關1 0 4選擇性地導引以傳送至雷射光學組 件9 6以便接著轉換成訊號2 9 4。 圖4 a — 4 g係分別以側視剖面圖、展開剖面圖、側 視圖、前視圖、底視圖、及後視圖,顯示磁光資料儲存的 飛行磁光讀寫頭。在圖4 a中,顯示飛行M0讀寫頭 1 0 6用於M0碟片組1 〇 7之一碟片的記錄/儲存層 3 4 9之上》飛行M0讀寫頭1 0 6包含:滑件本體 4 4 4、空氣軸承表面4 4 7、四分之一波板(未顯示) 、反射基底400、接物光件446、磁線圈460、及 軛4 6 2。滑件本體4 4 4的大小係可容納接物光件 446、單模式PM光纖97、及反射基底400之間的 工作距離。反射基底4 0 0可能包含反射表面,反射表面 係經過對準以將外離雷射光1 9 1及1 9 2導引至記錄/ 儲存層3 4 9及從記錄/儲存層3 4 9導出。雖然滑件本 體444可能包含工業標準 '毫米''微米'奈米 Λ、或 '微微米"滑件,但是也可使用其它大小的滑件本 體4 4 4 (由用於上述飛行ΜΟ讀寫頭1 0 6的元件之尺 寸限制所決定)。因此,在較佳實施例中,滑件本體 4 4 4包括毫米滑件高度(8 8 9 ^m)及平面面積相當 於奈米級滑件之面積(1600χ2032/ίπι) » 單模式PM光纖9 7會延著軸向切斷器4 4 3耦合至 滑件本體4 4 4,且接物光件4 4 6會延鲁垂直的角落切 斷器4 1 1耦合至滑件本體4 4 4。雖然,在較佳實施例 — - -- - . 本紙張尺度逡用中a國家標準(CNS > A4规格(210X297公釐)_ 29 _ ---------抑衣------.玎------0 {请先閎讀背面之注意事項14寫本頁) 經濟部中央標率局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明説明(27 ) 中,軸切斷器4 4 3會延著滑件本體的週圍設置,且垂直 切斷器4 1 1會設置於切斷器本體4 4 4的角落,但是, 軸切斷器4 4 3及垂直切斷器4 1 1也可設置於飛行M0 讀寫頭1 0 6上的其它位置處,舉例而言,在週邊與中心 軸之間、或延著中心軸本身。將光纖97及接物光件 4 4 6定位於非延著中心軸之其它位置可能影響磁光讀寫 頭1 0 6的質量中心,因而影響其飛行動態。因此,飛行 M0讀寫頭1 0 6附加至懸置件之點可能需要調整以補償 磁光讀寫頭1 0 6中心的離心變化。較佳的是,切斷器 443及411可設計成通道、V形溝槽、或任何其它適 當機構,以將單模式光纖9 7及接物光件4 4 6耦合至及 對準飛行M0讀寫頭1 0 6。在較佳實施例中,雷射光 1 9 1及1 9 2會經過光程(至及出自M0碟片1 07的 記錄/儲存層349),光程係包含:單模式PM光纖 9 7、反射基底400、四分之一波板493、及接物光 件4 4 6。在較佳實施例中,單模式PM光纖9 7及接物 光件4 4 6係定位於它們個別的切斷器內以在有用的點 3 4 0 (參考圖3 )之內取得外離雷射光1 9 1的聚焦以 作爲聚焦的光點4 4 8。接著,藉由使用紫外線固化樹脂 或類似的黏著劑,將單模式PM光纖9 7及接物光件 4 4 6固定於適當位置β 關於本發明,要特別注意圖4 c及4 b。這二個圖係 顯示接物光件4 4 6,它們係用於將光點衆焦於碟片的表 面349上界定的尺寸448中。光點會經由軛462及 本紙張尺度逍用r國®家梂準(CNS > A4規格(210X297公釐).30 ----------私衣— {請先閲讀背面之注意事項3寫本炅) .ΤΓ 線 419602 A7 B7 五、發明説明(28 ) 淺形磁線圈4 6 0而聚焦,軛4 6 2及淺形磁線圈4 6 0 係併入於支撐結構4 6 1中及安裝於飛行M0讀寫頭的底 部上或接物光件4 4 6的表面上或接近處,而不會干擾飛 行M0讀寫頭1 0 6的氣動飛行品質。 本發明的光學開關或微型開關係利用微致動器以移動 光鏡。此微型開關或其它應用中的每一微型致動器包含至 少一對相對的梳型驅動構件以提供用於致動器之原動力。 圖5係顯示用於諸如微型開關1 〇 4之光學微型開關中的 稍微簡化的橫向驅動致動器或微型致動器1 0 1,圖5係 代表致動器1 0 1的上平面視圖。致動器1 〇 1的梭 109包含第一及第二可移動的電極組件208、 209 ,第一及第二可移動的電極組件208、 209係接合在 經濟部中央搮隼馬Λ工消费合作社印裝 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項'片寫本頁) -- -- - / 、— —起以便完全一致地一起移動。致動器1 0 1又包含第一 及第二分離的固定組件210、 230。這些組件會垂直 地延伸至致動器101的縱向中心線及集中於此中心線上 。第一可移動的組件208包括第一、第二、及第三梳型 驅動構件208a、208b、208c,每一梳型驅動 構件均垂直地延伸至組件2 0 8、2 0 9的移動方向第 二可移動的組入209包括第一、第二、及第三梳型驅動 構件209a、 209b、 209c,每一梳型驅動構件 均垂直地延伸至組件208、 209的移動方向。致動器 101及其可移動的組件209、 209與固定的組件 2 1 0、2 3 0均係藉由諸如D R I E等^何適當的方式 以矽晶圓製成*在DR I E中,蝕刻某些區域中熔合於基 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家揉準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐)_ 31 _ 經濟部中央樣準局貝工消费合作社印袈 Α7 Β7_ 五、發明说明(29 ) 底2 1 3之薄的、單晶矽層,以形成可移動的組件2 0 8 、209及固定的組件210、 230。以厚的二氧化矽 層,將單晶矽層與基底2 1 3電隔離。如此’可移動的電 極組件2 0 8、2 0 9會與固定的電極組件2 1 0、 2 3 0電絕緣。其它製造技術包含在區域性可廢棄層之上 的絕緣基底上金屬結構的高型態比電鍍°此製程揭示於 Putty及Eddy之美國專利號5,450 * 751" Microstructure For Vibration Gyroscope”中。所造成的結構 包含相當窄及高的懸置彈簧結構、對基底之固定附著點、 及對結構形成電連接之能力。或者’舉例而言’藉由沈積 、圖型化、及蝕刻相當厚的經摻雜的二氧化矽之區域化廢 棄層上的多晶矽°此種製程的實施例說明於1 9 9 5年十 月份的 SPIE Proceedings, Volume 2 6 4 2 標題爲” Micromachined Devices and Components”的 8 4 — 9 4 項中 B. Wenk 等所著的”Thick Polysilicon Based Surface Micromachined Capacitive Accelermeter with Force Feedback Operation”* a 可移動的電極組件208、 209會藉由在移動方向 縱向延伸之堅硬的、加長框構件或連接器條216相連接 。第一可移動的電極組件2 0 8會於複數個縱向間隔位置 處接合至連接器條2 1 6的一端部份而第二可移動的組件 2 0 9會於複數個縱向間隔位置處接合至連接器條2 1 6 的另一端部份。延伸部2 1 8及托架構件k托架2 1 9係 包含於致動器1 0 1的附著機構之內以便將鏡1 0 3牢固 jj--------装------、訂------.ii (請先閱讀背面之注意事項'>寫本貫) 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4洗格(210X297公釐) -32- 419602 經濟部中央橾牵局貝工消*合作杜印製 A7 B7 五、發明説明(30 ) 地附著至梭1 〇 9並因而牢固地附著至可移動電極組件 208、 209。托架219及鏡103會以一角度傾斜 於梭109與可移動電極組件208、 209的移動方向 。梳型驅動構件208a、 208b、 208c、 209a、 209b、 209c均具有條或樑221 ,樑 2 2 1會於一端接合至連接條2 1 6並從條垂直地延伸橫 越致動器。每一條221之長度範圍爲200至2000 微米,較佳的是7 0 0至1 2 0 0微米,更加的是接近界 定個別梳型驅動構件長度之8 0 0米。多個長度相等以平 行移動方向延伸之梳狀構件或指狀構件211系列會固定 於每一條2 2 1。指狀構件2 1 1會延著每一梳型驅動條 2 2 1的長度均勻地間隔且長度範圍均在5至2 0 0微米 ,較佳的是60至130微米,更佳的是90微米》指狀 構件2 1 1係以3至2 5微米之距離間隔,較佳地係以6 至15微米,更佳的是以約10微米。梳型驅動構件 208a、 208b、 208c之梳指211會朝向耦合 至致動器之鏡子1 0 3延伸,而梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a、 209b、 209c的梳指211會離開鏡子延伸》 第一固定的電極組件2 1 0包括第一、第二、及第三 梳型驅動構件210a、 210b、 210c及第二固定 電極組件2 3 0包括第一、第二、及第三梳型驅動構件 230a、230b、230c,每一梳型驅動構件均以 垂直可移動的電極組件208、 209之移動方向延伸° 每一梳型驅動構件21〇a、 210b、 21〇c、 本紙張尺度適用中國國家樣率(CNS > A4说格(2! 〇 X 2町公釐)_ 33 J--------^------tT------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項r寫本頁) 4 經濟部中央橾準局負工消費合作社印裂 ‘ Α7 _Β7 五、發明说明(31 ) 230a、 230b, 230c均具有安裝於基底213 上且延伸橫越致動器之條或樑2 2 2。每一條2 2 2的長 度類似於界定個別的梳型驅動構件長度之條2 2 1的長度 •於大小及形狀上實際上同於梳型驅動指狀構件211之 多個或系列梳狀或指狀構件2 1 2會延著條2 2 2的長度 於複數個間隔位置處固定至梳型驅動條2 2 2。梳型驅動 構件210a、 210b、 210c的梳指212會離開 鏡子103延伸並與梳型驅動構件208a、 208b、 2 0 8 c的梳型驅動指狀構件2 1 1相對,而梳型驅動構 件230a、 230b. 230c會朝向鏡子延伸且與梳 型驅動構件209 a、209b、209 c的梳型驅動指 構件2 1 1相對。 梳型驅動指構件2 1 1係以插間隔之方式配置於指狀 構件2 1 2內。每一相對的致動器1 0 1之梳型驅動構件 組形成靜電驅動梳型驅動機構或組件。每一此梳型驅動組 件的梳型驅動構件208a、 208b、 208c、 209a、 209b及209c係可以相對於個別的梳型 驅動構件210a、 210b、 210c、 230a、 2 3 0 b及2 3 0 c而在第一位置至第二位置及至第三位 置之間移動,第一位置係如同圖6所示般,相對於梳型驅 動構件208a、 210a、 208b、 210b、及 208c、 210c,其中個別的梳型驅動指構件是彼此 間隔的,第二位置係如同圖5所示般,相對於梳型驅動構 件 208a、210 a、208b、210b、及 JJ--------^------.1T------'^ (請先M讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS )厶4規_格(210X297公釐) -34- 經濟部中失橾率扃負工消资合作杜印装 4 丨 9602 A7 __B7_ 五、發明説明(32 ) 208c、210c, 209a, 2 3 0a、209b, 230b、及209c. 230c,其中’當電壓施加於 梳型驅動指構件211、 212之間時’它們並非指狀組 合的而是靜電嚙合,第三位置係如圖7所示般,相對於梳 型驅動構件208a、 210a、 208b、 210b及 2 0 8 c、2 1 0 c,其中,個別的梳型驅動指狀構件彼 此以指狀組合且處於靜電嚙合。當相對於梳型驅動構件處 於第二位置時,梳型驅動指狀構件211、 212實際上 延著垂直於梭1 0 9的移動方向延伸之線結束。指狀構件 211、 212之間的間隔會選取成可在用於致動器 1 0 1之最大允許驅動電壓下,於完全的偏轉範圍內,確 保橫向穩定度》 固定的組件210、 230均會固定地附著於基底 213及用於在圖6所示之第一或退縮位置與圖7所示之 第二或延伸位置之間驅動第一和第二可移動電極組件 208、209,在圖6中第一梳型驅動構件208、 2 1 0係處於間隔位置而第二梳型驅動構件2 0 9、 2 3 0係處於指狀組合,在圖7中第一梳型驅動構件 208、 210係處於指狀組合位置而第二梳型驅動構件 209、 230係處於間隔位置。 梭109及可移動的電極組件208、 209係由配 置於電極組件208、 209的每一端處之彈簧組或可折 疊的懸臂樑組214、 217懸吊於基底έ13之上。彈 簧214會與致動器101—端處的第一梳型驅動構件 表紙張尺度適用+國囲家樣率(〇«>八4规格(210父29^公釐):35_ ~ --------¾------ir------ii (請先閲讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 經濟部中央橾準局員工消费合作社印褽 A7 B7 五、發明説明(33 ) 2 0 8 a相間隔而彈簧2 1 7會與致動器1 0 1相對的另 一端處的第二梳型驅動構件2 0 9 c相間隔。每組彈簧 214、 217均包含第一及第二間隔的彈簧部份224 、225,第一及第二間隔的彈簧部份224、 225當 在釋放位置時係垂直於移動方向延伸並以可折叠部份 245在一端接合(參見圖5) »彈簧部份或樑224、 225以間隔關係實際上延著梳型驅動條221、 222 的整個長度延伸並平行梳型驅動條。彈簧部份2 2 4、 2 2 5均具有相同的剖面,剖面實際上爲長方形。堅硬的 支撐件或加長支撐條131的一端會接合至每一彈簧 214、 217之折疊部份245。每一彈簧214, 2 1 7的第一端243會接合至基底2 1 3,而彈簧 214、 217的第二端244會接合至用於面對連接器 條216的梳型驅動構件208a、 209b之梳型驅動 條2 2 1的個別端。 致動器101的懸吊部份係使用高型態比技術設計的 並包含可移動的電極組件208、 209、梭109、彈 簧214、 217及堅硬的支撐件131·其自基底 2 1 3平面起算的高度在2 0至3 0 0微米之範圍,較佳 的是從6 0至1 5 0微米及更佳的是約8 0微米。 電連接器機構係包含於致動器101中以允許控制器 1 1 1電耦合至可移動的電極組件2 0 8、2 0 9及固定 的電極組件210、 230。特別的是,邊供電氣墊 240、 241、 242形式的電連接器機構。電氣墊 本紙張尺度逍用t國國家棣準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐)_ 〇6 - ij--------蘇------t------線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項'"寫本頁) 419602 A7 B7 五、發明説明(34 ) 2 4 2以導線軌2 7 1形式之導線機構電耦合至第—及第 二可移動的電極組件208、 209。電氣墊240、 241會以導線軌272、 273形式之個別導線機構電 稱合至第一固定的電極組件210及第二固定的電極組件 2 3 0。 -在本發明中,彈簧較佳地呈現高比例的橫向對向前的 彈性係數比。在習知技藝中,係藉由使用配置於對稱的可 移動電極部份之四角落處之四個相對的彈簧或折疊的懸臂 樑而達成此點的(參考美國專利號5,025,346中 的圖1) »但是,在此習知設計中,可移動的電極部份是 偏曲的,彈簧的橫向跚性大幅下降9 本發明可不需使用習知致動器設計的雙向對稱及四個 彈簧。相反地,本發明僅包含二個彈簧或折疊的懸臂樑 214、 217,它們於第一端243耦合至基底213 及於第二端2 4 4耦合至可移動的電極組件2 0 8、 2 0 9。彈簧會藉由於它們之間延伸之懸吊的堅硬支撐件 趣濟部中央橾準局K工消费合作杜印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項j寫本頁) 1 3 1而連接於它們的折叠部份2 4 5。上述結構係設計 成使用諸如DR I E等高型態比技術而製造的,以允許它 們可設計成比習知技藝具有較高的高度或輪廓。彈簧部份 224、 225顯著的較大高度及長方形剖面使彈簧 2 1 4、2 1 7能夠呈現比習知技藝更多的離平面剛性* 亦即基底213的離平面剛性。儘管可移動電極組件僅於 彈簧214、217的端243處固定於ΪΙ底2 1 3,但 是,此離平面剛性仍可用以抑制可移動電極組件2 0 8、 本紙張尺度通用中國國家揉準(CNS > Α4ίΙΙ格(210X297公釐} -37- 經濟部中央樣準局貝工消費合作社印装 419602 A7 _B7__ 五、發明説明(35 ) 209不必要地彎離固定電極組件210、 230的平面 致動器101具有機構以用於限制梭的向前及向後移 動及用以允許控制器1 1 1監視梭1 0 9的位置及特別監 視梭是否處於圖6 6所示之其完全退縮位置中或圖7中所 示之完全延伸位置中。機械止動件2 6 1係堅硬地形成於 基底之上並配置於設置在延伸件218上之第一或前向限 制器262及第二或後向限制器263之間。梭109的 向前移動係受止動件2 6 1與前向限制器2 6 2嚙合所限 制而梭1 0 9的向後移動係受止動件與向後限制器2 6 3 的嚙合所限制。止動件2 6 1藉由形成於基底2 1 3上的 導線軌2 7 4而電連接至也形成於基底2 1 3上的電氣墊 264。墊264允許止動件26 1電耦合至控制器 111。止動件261與限制器262或263之一嚙合 會接合墊2 6 4與墊2 4 2之間的電路。 在操作本發明的致動器1 0 1的一方法中,相對於施 加至電氣墊2 4 2之電位之電壓會由控制器1 1 1經由致 動器1 0 1中的個別電氣墊2 4 0或2 4 1組選擇性地施 加至固定的電極組件2 1 9或2 3 0的梳型指構件2 1 2 以靜態地偏轉可移動的電極組件2 0 8、2 0 9並因而偏 轉圖6中所示的退縮位置與圖7中所示的延伸位置之間的 致動器1 0 1之延伸件2 1 8與相關的鏡子1 0 3。在嚙 合的梳型驅動構件之間的靜電吸引力在指狀組合中幾乎保 持固定。 本纸張尺度逍用中國國家揉率(CNS ) A4洗格(210 X 297公漦)_ 38 _ —Λ^iT^ {請先閲讀背面之注意事項耳4寫本頁) 419602 ^ή 經濟部中央揉準局貝工消费合作社印装 A7 B7 五、發明説明(36 ) 藉由釋放固定電極組件2 3 0上的固定電壓而在致動 器1 0 1中取得延伸條件以致於鏡子1 0 3會朝向對著限 制器2 6 2之延伸位置旋轉。接著,藉由施加固定電壓至 另一固定的電極組件2 1 0,而將鏡子1 0 3固持在延伸 位置2 9 3中。接著,藉由再移除固定電極組件2 1 0上 的固定電壓及藉由再施加固定電壓至固定電極組件2 3 0 ,可使鏡子103縮回。 在梭1 0 9的每一半行程期間,梭首先會由彈簧 214、 217從其偏轉位置拉回至圖5中所示之其釋放 位置,接著,由電極組件208、 210或209、 2 3 0之間協力的靜電嚙合拉動至其另一偏轉位置。 橫向梳型致動器1 0 1的性能會視一些因素而定,這 些因素包含:彈簧214、 217的前向及側向剛性及梳 型驅動指構件211、 212的相對尺寸。性能的交換代 價係在於致動器101允許的操作電壓與尺寸之間以及鏡 1 0 3的位置與切換速度之間。以低操作電壓取得大偏轉 之傳統方法係使電極之間的間隔最小以產生最大的向前力 量及使用具有低的前向剛性之彈簧以產生大的向前位移β 此方法通常用於薄的多晶矽致動器,於此致動器中,低的 離平面剛性可防止使用大的操作電壓a但是,當使用相對 較厚的結構時,這些設計不是最佳的。雖然,當電極之間 的間隔減少時|每一指構件的向前力會增加,但是,橫向 力會增加得較快。當設計用於高偏轉或高力量之高速致動 器時,較佳的設計方法是決定結構所能支撐的最大電壓, 本紙張尺度適用中國困家樣率< CNS ) A4洗格(210X297公釐) 1.1--------裝-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項^真寫本頁) 訂 線 -39- 419602 經濟部中央棣率局貝工消t合作杜印製 A7 B7五、發明説明(37 ) 然後,選擇在該最大電壓下會造成最小的橫向不穩定度之 電極間隔。然後•以彈簧剛性及移動元件的質量,界定致 動器的最大位置及速度》 當最小化致動器的尺寸及因而最小化光學微型開關 1 0 4上致動器所佔據的空間時,本發明也重申上述關係 *在習知技藝中,未充份地限制梳型指構件以防止相對於 與致動器1 0 1的移動方向垂直之微型構開關1 0 4中心 軸相平行之移動,以致於在指構件之間所產生的充份側向 力會造成可移動的電極組件迅速地移向側方而非繼續朝向 延伸的或縮回的位置》當側向力相對於側向位移之微分大 於彈簧的橫向機械彈性係數時,會發生此不穩定。 彈簧部份或樑狀構件224、 225可能比梳型驅動 條221、 222長或短。更特別的是,彈簧部份224 、225具有之長度範圍在200至2000微米,較佳 的是800至2100微米,及具有之寬度範圍在3.5 至5.5微米,較佳的是3.75至4.25微米。圖5 中所示的彈簧部份224、 225均之長度均至少等於致 動器101的梳型驅動條221、 222的長度。致動器 1 〇 1具有約8 0 0微米的長度,約2 5 0 0微米的寬度 及約8 0微米的高度。 樑或彈簧214、 217係顯示於圖5中之未偏轉或 釋放位置中,其中,每一樑狀構件或樑2 2 4、2.2 5均 會以垂直於梭1 0 9的移動方向直線地延伸》當個別的鏡 子處於縮回位置中時,樑224、 225均能於電極組件 --------^-1^------ΐτ-----II (請先閲讀背面之注意事項:寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逍用中國S家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐)_ 4〇 41 96u 經濟部中央揉隼扃員工消費合作社印11 A7 B7 五、發明説明(站) 2 0 9的一移動方向上移動至圖6中所示的第一偏轉位置 。當個別的鏡子1 0 3係處於延伸位置中時,樑2 1 4、 2 1 7也可於電極組件2 0 9的另一相對移動方向中移動 至圖7中所示的第二偏轉位置。當樑2 14、2 17處於 它們個別的第一及第二偏轉位置時,樑2 14、2 17係 處於非線性或彎曲位置中。更特別的是,當個別彈簧 2 1 4、2 1 7從直線或釋放位置移.動至偏轉或彎曲位置 時,每一樑224、 225的相對端會以相對的方向移動 ,每一此方向係平行於梭1 0 9的移動方向》樑或彈簧 2 14、2 1 7的最大側向剛性,亦即垂直於梭1 0 9的 移動方向之方向上的剛性,係發生於處於圖5中所示未偏 轉或釋放位置中的彈簧位於圖2及3中分別顯示的縮回與 延伸位置之中途時。如同所示,當如圖5所示般未偏轉時 •彈簧214、 217係處於直線條件下。 由構件框2 1 6所構成的梭1 0 9又包含致動器 1 0 1抵抗橫向負載及彎曲之整個剛性及減少梭1 0 9的 全部質量》本發明固有的剛性可以不需要將致動器1 0 1 設計成習知技藝中所使用之雙向對稱*允許致動器1 0 1 的寬度減少一半。隨著寬度縮減,可將致動器組1 0 1更 加緊密地一起包裹在微型開關1 0 4中以允許微型開關中 更多的致動器在給定長度的雷射光191上。 本發明的致動器之又一實施例顯示於圖8中,其包含 增加的特徵以改進致動器的性能。使用類似的參考數字以 說明致動器1 0 1中與圖8的致動器1 8 0中類似的元件 本紙張尺度適用中國國家搮準{ CNS ) A钟L格(210X297公釐)αλ . --------^------ir------^ (請先閲讀背面之注$項\^-寫本頁) 4 1 S b 超濟部中央橾準扃貝工消费合作社印¾ A7 _B7 _五、發明説明(39 ) 。致動器1 8 0包含第一及第二可棄式條2 4 6及2 4 7 ,如圖4及5中所示相對於彈簧2 1 4,延著每一彈簧或 樑部份224、 225設置以確保均勻蝕刻並因而確保樑 部份所需的長方形剖面。每一可棄式條之高度近似接合的 樑部份之高度及提供延著樑部份的每一側之窄槽2 4 8。 樑部份與個別的可棄式條之間的閭隔,亦即每一槽2 4 8 的寬度,是可以與裝置中的最小蝕刻特徵相比的。在致動 器1 8 0中*樑部份與每一可棄式條之間的間隔接近八微 米。藉由限制側表面226、 227的的反向蝕刻,可棄 式條246、 247可便於形成平行的、平面側表面 226、 227。更特別的是,槽248的窄寬度會抑制 非平行於槽方向上行進的離子進入槽中並因而抑制其參與 側表面2 2 7、2 2 7之蝕刻。 在舉例說明之致動器1 8 0的操作方法中1致動器 101之第一及第二可移動的電極組件208, 209最 初是靜止的並位於如圖8中所示之延伸與縮回的位置間的 中途。在延伸的位置中,延伸件2 1 8會緊靠前向限制器 262而第一及第二可移動的電極組件208、 209會 緊靠三個第一固定止動牛2 9 3中的至少一者及如圖8所 示之眾多三個第一固定止動件2 9 3,第一固定止動件 293係附著於基底213。止動件293係用於每一梳 型驅動構件208a、 208b、及208c。止動件 2 6 1會與附著至延伸件2 1 8之前向限'制器2 6 1嚙合 。在縮回的位置中,延伸件2 1 8會緊靠後向限制器 (L--------^------1T------.^ (請先聞讀背面之注意事項;^:寫本頁) I - —— / 1__I____ 本紙》尺度逋用中國國家標率(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐) -42- 4 19 6 0 2 at 經濟部中央標準扃属工消费合作社印装 A7 ___B7_五、發明説明(40 ) 263而第一及第二可移動電極組件208、 209會緊 靠附著至基底2 1 3之三個第二固定止動件2 9 2中之至 少一者及如圖8所示附著於基底213之眾多三個第二固 定止動件2 9 2。止動件2 9 2係用於每一梳型驅動構件 209a、 209b、 209c。止動件261嚙合附著 於延伸件2 1 8之後向限制器2 6 3。止動件2 9 2、 2 9 3使光學微型開關1 0 4中鏡子1 0 3位匱容易有再 現性。 可使用類似於 Proceedings Of Transducers'9 5 ( 1 9 9 5 ) ,556 — 559 頁中 Klassen、Petersen , Noworolski , Logan、 Maluf、 Brown , S torment , McCully 、及 Kovacs 所著之 “ Silicon Fusion Bonding And Deep Reactive Ion Etching; A New Technology For Microstructures"論文中所述之製程,製造致動器1 0 1及 1 8 0,在此致程中,底部矽晶圓或基底2 1.3中的淺穴 可允許產生懸吊的或可移動的彈簧2 1 4、2 1 7、梳型 驅動構件208、 209等等。如圖9所示,在需要移動 結構的區域中,於底部晶圓或基底2 1 3中蝕刻深度在5 與5 0微米之間且更佳的是1 0微米之凹陷。使用厚度在 0 . 1與2 . 0微米之間且較佳的是接近1 . 0微米之二 氧化矽層1 7 1,將第二或上晶圓1 7 3熔合於基底 213♦然後,將上晶圓173硏磨及拋光至所需厚度。 在上晶圓的上表面1 7 6上產生金臛層1Ϋ 4以用於電氣 墊240、 241、 242、 264、視覺標視器、等等 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 装 訂 線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4规格(210 X 297公釐)_ 43 .4 經濟部中央標率肩負工消费合作杜印簟 J 6 G 2 .. β A7 _B7____ 五、發明説明(41 ) 。最後,使用深反應離子蝕刻技術,將上晶圈1 7 3蝕刻 以取得所需的高型態比結構β最後的D R I E矽蝕刻會終 止於有二氧化矽層171存在之處及繼續蝕刻至層171 不存在的基底2 1 3中。此製程會產生以具有淺穴1 7 0 的厚度之空氣間隙懸置於基底213上及與基底電絕緣之 可移動的單晶矽結構,舉例而言,彈簧2 14、2 17、 可移動的電極組件208、209、堅硬的支撐件131 及連接器構架216。諸如導線機構286、 287及止 動件292、 293等其它結構會固定地附著於基底 213但以二氧化矽層171與基底電絕緣並以空氣間隙 1 7 5與圍繞的特徵電絕緣》 在諸如切換等某些應用中,鏡子1 0 3的位置之獨立 確認是重要的。當致動器1 8 0中的鏡子1 0 3處於延伸 位置中時,可移動的電極部份2 0 8之前向限制器2 6 2 會與止動件2 6 1嚙合及電接觸。止動件2 6 1會以導線 2 7 4電耦合至電氣墊2 6 4,電氣墊2 6 4可以電耦合 至控制器1 1 1。同樣地,當鏡子1 0 3保持於縮回位置 中時,後向限制器2 6 3會與止動件2 6 1嚙合及電接觸 並因而以導線2 7 4電耦合至電氣墊2 6 4 »因此,可移 動的電極組件2 0 8的部份、梭1 0 9及鏡子1 0 3可以 由控制器111以電方式感測以確認及/或監視微型開關 104的狀態'限制器262、263及止動件261、 292、 293係包含於致動器180的#動止動機構中 本纸張尺度適用中8國家標準(CNS ) Α4规格(210X297公釐)_私· _* I, I ± I I I 裝 I 訂 I I I I I 線 (诗先閱讀背面之注意事項' 乂寫本頁) 4 經濟部中央樣準局月工消费合作杜印裝 9 602 ^ A7 _B7__ 五、發明説明(42 ) 於本發明的致動器中設置其它用於監視梭1 〇 9及可 移動電極組件2 0 8、2 0 9之機構。舉例而言1控制器 111能藉由包含於控制器中的傳統演繹法以決定可移動 的梳型驅動構件208a、 208b、 208c及 209a、 209b、 209c之位置,以量測可移動的 梳型驅動指構件211與協力的相嚙合固定梳型驅動構件 210a、210b、210c、23〇a、230b、 2 3 0 c的梳型驅動指構件2 1 2之間的電容。舉例而言 ,與梳型驅動構件之驅動訊號分離的訊號可由控制器 111傳送至致動器以量測此電容。此方法未要求在電極 之間有實體接觸*舉例而言,如上述之移動止動機構。或 者,在形成致動器期間,可以將延著一個或多個彈簧部份 或懸置件224、 225之第二和第二相對的、垂直側之 矽材料摻雜,以在彈簧部份中產生壓電電阻器。可以以設 在控制器111中之傳統演繹法,量測對應於彈簧214 、217偏轉期間懸置件224、 225的應變變化之壓 電電阻器的電阻改變,以決定梭1 0 9及鏡1 0 3相對於 基底213及固定的電極組件210、 230之位置》 致動器6 0 1 *圖1 1中所示之本發明的致動器之又 一實施例,實際上類似於致動器1 0 1且類似的參考數字 係用以說明致動器1 0 1及6 0 1之類似元件。如同在致 動器101中一般,致動器601包含第一及第二.可移動 的電極組件208、 209及第一和第二夯離的固定電極 組件210、 230,第一及第二可移動的電極組件 本紙張尺度適用中困國家梂準(CNS ) A4洗格(2〗0X 297公釐).45 _- JJ * ~ [ 裝 tl n i 線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項、4寫本頁) 經濟部中央標隼局貝工消费合作社印製 4 19 6 0 2 .4' A7 _B7___ 五、發明説明(43 ) 208、 209是接合在一起以便一致地一起移動β電極 組件208、 209、 210、 230會垂直於致動器的 縱向中心線延伸並集中於此中心線上。致動器6 0 1與致 動器1 0 1不同之處在於第一可移動的組件2 0 8僅包括 第一梳型驅動構件208a ,,第一梳型驅動構件 208a係垂直於組件208、 209的移動方向延伸。 第二可移動組件2 0 9僅包括第一梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a *第一梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a係垂直於組件2 0 8、 2 0 9的移動方向延伸。由於致動器6 0 1僅含有單一梳 型驅動構件208a、 209a,而致動器101含有梳 型驅動構件208a、 208b、 208c、 209a、 209b、 209c,所以,致動器101提供的原動力 幾乎爲致動器6 0 1的三倍。致動器60 1的懸吊設計必 須考慮此力量縮減以取得所需的偏轉。使用單對梳型驅動 組件208、 209可減少致動器601的總長度,而可 如同下述般允許更小巧的光學微型切換開關。 圖1 2係顯示根據本發明製造之光學開關1 0 4的第 一實施例之上平面視圖。開關1 0 4包含微晶片1 0 0形 式之實際平面的組件或裝置,微晶片1 0 0包括至十二個 橫向梳型驅動致動器1 8 0中的少一個及如同所示之一系 列或多個,十二個橫向梳型驅動致動器1 8 0係由厚度約 5 0 0微米之矽晶圓或基底2 1 3所承載。每一靜電驅動 的致動器或馬達1 8 0具有耦合至鏡1 0 3之梭機構或梭 1 0 9,鏡1 0 3係相對於基底或本體2 1 3垂直地配置 本紙浪尺度逋用中國國家揉準(CMS ) A4说格(210X297公釐). 4g . --------;-I^------1T------0 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項' 4寫本頁) 經濟部中夬標率局®C工消费合作社印裝 I 6 u 2 ‘ A7 ______B7_ 五、發明説明(44 ) 。輸入光纖9 8所載送的雷射光1 9 1在下達開關1 0 4 的中心縱向軸1 1 3的通道中繼續行進之前,會被導引經 過開關1 0 4的輸入或入口埠1 5 0及經過準直透鏡 1 0 2。與光學開關1 0 4 —起使用之典型雷射光1 9 1 、192可具有約100至200微米範圍之直徑。如圖 12所示,於輸入埠1 0 5處移除輸入光纖9 8的護套, 接著包層光纖9 8會延著形成於微晶片1 0 0中的入口溝 槽156而延伸進入微晶片100。準直透鏡102會配 置於接近光纖98的尾端在圖1 2中所示的較佳實施例 中*透鏡1 0 2係傳統的微小陡度折射率準直透鏡。或者 ,透鏡1 0 2可爲傳統的微小模造透鏡或傳統的球形透鏡 且在本發明的範圍之內。光纖9 8的尾端係在開關1 0 4 中以致處於準直透鏡1 0 2的聚焦點處。透鏡1 0 2係用 以在光進入微晶片1 0 0的主通道1 5 7之前’將光 1 9 1對準。應瞭解,可在通道,1 5 7的入口處設置未具 有透鏡1 0 2之光學開關。此外,經過對準的輸入雷射光 1 9 1可被導引經過自由空間而進入輸入埠1 5 0,亦即 ,未使用入口光纖9 8,且在本發明的範圍內。 在圖1 2中,顯示致動器或微馬達1 8 0係如同製造 時般處於靜止或歸位位置、延伸與縮回位置之間的中途。 致動器1 8 0會分成第一組或多個六致動器1 8 0 a及第 二組或多個六致動器1 8 0 b,這些致動器1 8 〇 a係延 著第一虛線相間隔,第一虛線係與微晶片‘1 0 0的中心縱 軸1 1 3相互隔開及平行,這些致動器1 8 0 b係延著第 本紙張尺度適用中菌國家揉準(CNS ) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐)_ 47SC 2: V A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (26) The light 1 9 2 will propagate along the single-mode PM fiber 9 7 to leave at its proximal end and is selectively guided by the optical switch 104 to transmit to The laser optics 9 6 is then converted into a signal 2 9 4. Figures 4a-4g show the flying magneto-optical read / write heads for storing magneto-optical data in side cross-sectional views, unfolded cross-sectional views, side views, front views, bottom views, and rear views, respectively. In Fig. 4a, the flying M0 read / write head 106 is used for the recording / storage layer of one of the discs of the M0 disc group 1 07. The flying M0 read / write head 1 0 6 contains: The body 4 4 4, the air bearing surface 4 4 7, the quarter wave plate (not shown), the reflective base 400, the light receiving member 446, the magnetic coil 460, and the yoke 4 6 2. The size of the slider body 4 4 4 can accommodate the working distance between the light receiving member 446, the single-mode PM fiber 97, and the reflective substrate 400. The reflective substrate 4 0 0 may include a reflective surface that is aligned to direct the external laser light 1 9 1 and 1 9 2 to and from the recording / storage layer 3 4 9. Although the slider body 444 may contain industry-standard 'mm' micron nanometer Λ, or 'micron " sliders, other sizes of slider body 4 4 4 (read and written by the above-mentioned flight Μ0 The size limit of the first 106 components is determined). Therefore, in a preferred embodiment, the slider body 4 4 4 includes a millimeter slider height (8 8 9 ^ m) and a planar area equivalent to the area of a nano-scale slider (1600 × 2032 / ίπι) »Single-mode PM fiber 9 7 is coupled to the slider body 4 4 4 along the axial cutter 4 4 3 and the light receiving member 4 4 6 is coupled to the vertical corner cutter 4 1 1 to the slider body 4 4 4. Although, in the preferred embodiment----. A national standard (CNS > A4 size (210X297 mm)) _ 29 _ --------- suppress clothing --- ---. 玎 ------ 0 {Please read the note on the back 14 to write this page first) A7 B7 printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. In the description of the invention (27), The cutter 4 4 3 is installed along the periphery of the slider body, and the vertical cutter 4 1 1 is installed at the corner of the cutter body 4 4 4. However, the shaft cutter 4 4 3 and the vertical cutter The device 4 1 1 may also be disposed at other positions on the flying M0 read / write head 10 6, for example, between the periphery and the central axis, or extending along the central axis itself. Positioning the optical fiber 97 and the light-receiving member 4 4 6 at other positions not extending along the central axis may affect the center of mass of the magneto-optical read / write head 106 and thus affect its flight dynamics. Therefore, the point at which the flying M0 head 106 is attached to the suspension may need to be adjusted to compensate for the centrifugal change in the center of the magneto-optical head 106. Preferably, the cutters 443 and 411 can be designed as channels, V-grooves, or any other suitable mechanism to couple and align the single-mode optical fiber 9 7 and the object light receiving member 4 4 6 to the flying M0. Write head 1 0 6. In the preferred embodiment, the laser light 191 and 192 pass through the optical path (to and from the recording / storage layer 349 of the M0 disc 1 07). The optical path system includes: single-mode PM fiber 9 7. Reflection The base 400, the quarter-wave plate 493, and the light receiving member 4 4 6. In the preferred embodiment, the single-mode PM fiber 9 7 and the light-receiving member 4 4 6 are positioned in their individual cutters to obtain external lightning within a useful point 3 4 0 (refer to FIG. 3). The focus of the incident light 1 9 1 is taken as the focused light spot 4 4 8. Next, by using an ultraviolet curable resin or a similar adhesive, the single-mode PM optical fiber 97 and the object light-receiving member 4 4 6 are fixed in place β. With regard to the present invention, special attention should be paid to FIGS. 4 c and 4 b. These two figures show the object-receiving light members 4 4 6 which are used to focus the light spot on the size 448 defined on the surface 349 of the disc. The light spot will pass through the yoke 462 and the standard of this paper. The country standard (CNS > A4 size (210X297 mm). 30 ---------- Private clothing — {Please read the back Notes 3) 炅) .TΓ line 419602 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (28) The shallow magnetic coil 4 6 0 is focused, and the yoke 4 6 2 and the shallow magnetic coil 4 6 0 are incorporated into the supporting structure 4 6 1 It can be installed on the bottom of the flying M0 read-write head or on or near the surface of the light receiving member 4 4 6 without disturbing the aerodynamic quality of the flying M0 read-write head 1 0 6. The optical switch or micro-opening relationship of the present invention uses a micro-actuator to move the light mirror. Each microactuator in this microswitch or other application includes at least a pair of opposing comb-shaped drive members to provide motive power for the actuator. Fig. 5 shows a slightly simplified lateral drive actuator or microactuator 1 0 1 used in an optical micro switch such as micro switch 104, and Fig. 5 shows an upper plan view of the actuator 101. The shuttle 109 of the actuator 101 includes first and second movable electrode assemblies 208 and 209, and the first and second movable electrode assemblies 208 and 209 are connected to the Central Industrial and Commercial Cooperation Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Printing < Please read the “Notes on the back page” on this page first)---/ /-to move together completely and completely. The actuator 101 further comprises first and second separate fixing assemblies 210, 230. These components will extend vertically to and center on the longitudinal centerline of the actuator 101. The first movable component 208 includes first, second, and third comb-shaped driving members 208a, 208b, and 208c, and each comb-shaped driving member extends vertically to the moving direction of the components 208, 209 The two movable assemblies 209 include first, second, and third comb drive members 209a, 209b, and 209c, and each comb drive member extends vertically to the moving direction of the components 208, 209. The actuator 101 and its movable components 209, 209 and the fixed components 2 1 0, 2 3 0 are all made of silicon wafers by any suitable method such as DRIE. * In DR IE, an These areas are fused to the basic paper size and used in China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specifications (210X297 mm) _ 31 _ Central Samples Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives, India Α7 Β7_ V. Description of the invention (29) Bottom 2 13 thin monocrystalline silicon layers to form movable components 208, 209 and fixed components 210, 230. The single crystal silicon layer is electrically isolated from the substrate 2 1 3 by a thick silicon dioxide layer. In this way, the movable electrode components 208, 209 will be electrically insulated from the fixed electrode components 2 10, 2 3 0. Other manufacturing techniques include high-type-ratio electroplating of metal structures on insulating substrates over regional discardable layers. This process is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,450 * 751 " Microstructure For Vibration Gyroscope "by Putty and Eddy. The resulting structure includes a relatively narrow and high suspension spring structure, a fixed attachment point to the substrate, and the ability to form an electrical connection to the structure. Or 'for example' by deposition, patterning, and etching a relatively thick warp Polycrystalline silicon on doped silicon dioxide regionalized waste layer ° An example of this process is illustrated in SPIE Proceedings, Volume 2 6 4 2 titled "Micromachined Devices and Components" 8 October 1995 — “4 Thick Polysilicon Based Surface Micromachined Capacitive Accelermeter with Force Feedback Operation” by B. Wenk et al. In item 9 * a movable electrode assembly 208, 209 will be a rigid, elongated frame member that extends longitudinally in the direction of movement Or the connector bar 216 is connected. The first movable electrode assembly 208 will be joined at a plurality of longitudinally spaced positions. One end portion of the connector strip 2 1 6 and the second movable component 20 9 are joined to the other end portion of the connector strip 2 1 6 at a plurality of longitudinally spaced positions. The extension portion 2 1 8 and the bracket structure The k-bracket 2 1 9 is included in the attachment mechanism of the actuator 101 to secure the mirror 10 3. -. ii (Please read the notes on the back first '> written book) The paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 wash (210X297 mm) -32- 419602 Co-operation Du printed A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (30) Attached to shuttle 1 109 and thus firmly attached to the movable electrode assembly 208, 209. The bracket 219 and the mirror 103 will be inclined at an angle to the shuttle 109 And the moving direction of the movable electrode assembly 208, 209. The comb-shaped driving members 208a, 208b, 208c, 209a, 209b, and 209c each have a bar or beam 221, and the beam 2 2 1 is joined to the connecting bar 2 1 6 at one end and from The strips extend vertically across the actuator. The length of each strip 221 ranges from 200 to 2000 microns, preferably from 700 to 12 microns, and even closer to defining individual combs. 800 yards length of the drive member. A plurality of comb-shaped members or finger-shaped members 211 series of equal lengths extending in the direction of parallel movement will be fixed to each 2 21. The finger members 2 1 1 are evenly spaced along the length of each comb drive strip 2 2 1 and the length ranges from 5 to 200 microns, preferably 60 to 130 microns, and more preferably 90 microns. The finger-like members 2 1 1 are spaced at a distance of 3 to 25 micrometers, preferably 6 to 15 micrometers, and more preferably about 10 micrometers. The comb fingers 211 of the comb drive members 208a, 208b, and 208c extend toward the mirror 1 0 3 coupled to the actuator, and the comb fingers 211 of the comb drive members 2 0 9 a, 209b, and 209c extend away from the mirror. A fixed electrode assembly 2 1 0 includes first, second, and third comb-type driving members 210a, 210b, 210c and a second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 includes first, second, and third comb-type driving members. 230a, 230b, 230c, each comb drive member extends in the direction of movement of the vertically movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 ° Each comb drive member 21〇a, 210b, 21〇c, this paper size applies to the country of China Sample rate (CNS > A4 Grid (2! 〇X 2machi mm) _ 33 J -------- ^ ------ tT ------ ^ (Please read the back first (Notes on this page are written on this page) 4 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Work Cooperatives' Α7 _Β7 V. Description of the Invention (31) 230a, 230b, 230c all have actuators mounted on the base 213 and extending across Strip or beam 2 2 2. The length of each strip 2 2 2 is similar to the length of strip 2 2 1 which defines the length of the individual comb drive member. • Size and shape In fact, the plurality or series of comb-like or finger-like members 2 1 2 which are the same as the comb-like driving finger 211 are fixed to the comb-like driving bar 2 2 2 at a plurality of spaced positions along the length of the strip 2 2 2. The comb fingers 212 of the comb drive members 210a, 210b, 210c extend away from the mirror 103 and oppose the comb drive finger members 2 1 1 of the comb drive members 208a, 208b, 2 0 8c, and the comb drive members 230a, 230b. 230c will extend toward the mirror and oppose the comb drive finger members 2 1 1 of the comb drive members 209 a, 209b, 209 c. The comb drive finger members 2 1 1 are arranged on the fingers in a spaced manner. Inside the shape-like member 2 1 2. The comb-shaped drive member group of each opposing actuator 1 0 1 forms an electrostatically-driven comb-shaped drive mechanism or assembly. The comb-shaped drive members 208a, 208b, 208c of each comb-shaped drive assembly , 209a, 209b, and 209c can move between the first position, the second position, and the third position relative to the individual comb-shaped driving members 210a, 210b, 210c, 230a, 2 3 b, and 2 3 0 c. The first position is relative to the comb drive members 208a, 2 as shown in FIG. 10a, 208b, 210b, and 208c, 210c, where the individual comb-shaped driving finger members are spaced from each other, and the second position is as shown in FIG. 5, relative to the comb-shaped driving members 208a, 210a, 208b, 210b, And JJ -------- ^ ------. 1T ------ '^ (Please read the notes on the back first and write this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS)规 4 rules _ grid (210X297 mm) -34- Lost rate in the Ministry of Economic Affairs 扃 Industrial and consumer cooperation Du printed 4 丨 9602 A7 __B7_ V. Description of the invention (32) 208c, 210c, 209a, 2 3 0a, 209b, 230b, and 209c. 230c, where 'when a voltage is applied between the comb-shaped driving finger members 211, 212', they are not a combination of fingers but are electrostatically engaged. The third position is as shown in FIG. In the comb-shaped driving members 208a, 210a, 208b, 210b and 2 0c, 2 1 0c, the individual comb-shaped driving finger members are combined with each other in a finger shape and are in electrostatic meshing. When in the second position with respect to the comb drive member, the comb drive finger members 211, 212 actually end along a line extending perpendicular to the moving direction of the shuttle 109. The interval between the finger members 211 and 212 will be selected to ensure the lateral stability within the full deflection range under the maximum allowable driving voltage for the actuator 101. The fixed components 210 and 230 will both Fixedly attached to the base 213 and for driving the first and second movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 between the first or retracted position shown in FIG. 6 and the second or extended position shown in FIG. 7, in FIG. 6 The first comb-shaped drive members 208, 2 0 are in a spaced position and the second comb-shaped drive members 209, 2 3 0 are in a finger combination. In FIG. 7, the first comb-shaped drive members 208, 210 are It is in the finger combination position and the second comb drive members 209 and 230 are in the spaced position. The shuttle 109 and the movable electrode assemblies 208 and 209 are suspended from the base 13 by a spring group or a collapsible cantilever beam group 214 and 217 arranged at each end of the electrode assemblies 208 and 209. The spring 214 and the first comb-shaped driving member at the end of the actuator 101 sheet paper size applicable + country sample rate (〇 «> 8 4 specifications (210 parent 29 ^ mm): 35_ ~ --- ----- ¾ ------ ir ------ ii (Please read the notes on the back to write this page first) Employees' Cooperatives of the Central Economic and Technical Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Seal A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( 33) 2 0 8 a is spaced apart and the spring 2 1 7 is spaced apart from the second comb drive member 2 0 9 c at the other end opposite the actuator 1 0 1. Each set of springs 214, 217 includes a first And second spaced spring portions 224, 225, the first and second spaced spring portions 224, 225, when in the released position, extend perpendicular to the direction of movement and engage at one end with a foldable portion 245 (see FIG. 5) ) »The spring sections or beams 224, 225 extend along the entire length of the comb drive bars 221, 222 in a spaced relationship and are parallel to the comb drive bars. The spring sections 2 2 4, 2 2 5 all have the same cross section. The cross section is actually rectangular. One end of the rigid support or extension support 131 will be joined to the folded portion 245 of each spring 214, 217. Each spring 214, 2 1 The first end 243 of 7 will be joined to the base 2 1 3, and the second end 244 of the springs 214, 217 will be joined to the comb-shaped drive members 208a, 209b for facing the connector bar 216 2 2 Individual ends of 1. The suspension part of the actuator 101 is designed using high aspect ratio technology and includes movable electrode assemblies 208, 209, shuttle 109, springs 214, 217, and a rigid support 131. The height of the substrate 2 1 3 plane is in the range of 20 to 300 microns, preferably from 60 to 150 microns and more preferably about 80 microns. The electrical connector mechanism is included in the actuation The controller 101 allows the controller 1 1 1 to be electrically coupled to the movable electrode assembly 208, 209 and the fixed electrode assembly 210, 230. In particular, an electrical connection in the form of a side power supply air cushion 240, 241, 242 Device mechanism. Electrical pad paper size Standards National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) _〇6-ij -------- 苏 ------ t ---- --- Wire (please read the precautions on the back first &'; write this page) 419602 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (34) 2 4 2 The wire mechanism in the form of a wire track 2 7 1 is electrically coupled to the first-and- Two movable electrode assembly 208, 209. The electrical pads 240, 241 will track the wire 272, the wire 273 in the form of individual bodies is electrically bonded to said first stationary electrode assembly 210 and the second stationary electrode assembly 230. -In the present invention, the spring preferably exhibits a high ratio of lateral to forward elastic coefficient ratios. In the conventional art, this is achieved by using four opposing springs or folded cantilever beams arranged at the four corners of the symmetrical movable electrode portion (refer to US Patent No. 5,025,346). Figure 1) »However, in this conventional design, the movable electrode part is deflected, and the lateral stiffness of the spring is greatly reduced. 9 The present invention can eliminate the need for the two-way symmetry and four of the conventional actuator design. spring. In contrast, the present invention only includes two springs or folded cantilever beams 214, 217, which are coupled to the base 213 at the first end 243 and to the movable electrode assembly 2 4 4 at the second end 2 4 4 9. The springs will be connected to them by the rigid support of the suspension extending between them, printed by the K-Consumer Cooperative Department of the Central Ministry of Standards and Commerce (please read the notes on the back first, write this page) 1 3 1 Fold part 2 4 5. The above structures are designed to be manufactured using high aspect ratio techniques such as DR I E to allow them to be designed to have a higher height or profile than conventional techniques. The significantly larger heights and rectangular cross sections of the spring portions 224 and 225 enable the springs 2 1 4 and 2 1 7 to exhibit more out-of-plane rigidity * than the conventional technique, that is, the out-of-plane rigidity of the base 213. Although the movable electrode assembly is fixed to the bottom 2 1 3 only at the end 243 of the springs 214 and 217, this out-of-plane rigidity can still be used to suppress the movable electrode assembly 208. This paper is in accordance with the Chinese national standard ( CNS > Α4ίΙΙ grid (210X297mm) -37- Printed by the Central Samples Bureau of the Ministry of Economy, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, 419602 A7 _B7__ V. Description of the invention (35) 209 Unnecessarily bend away from the plane of the fixed electrode assembly 210, 230 The actuator 101 has a mechanism for restricting the forward and backward movement of the shuttle and for allowing the controller 1 1 to monitor the position of the shuttle 10 9 and to specifically monitor whether the shuttle is in its fully retracted position as shown in FIG. 6 or In the fully extended position shown in Figure 7. The mechanical stops 2 6 1 are rigidly formed on the base and arranged on the first or forward limiter 262 and the second or rearward direction provided on the extension 218 Between the limiters 263. The forward movement of the shuttle 109 is restricted by the engagement of the stopper 2 6 1 and the backward movement of the shuttle 1 0 9 is restricted by the stopper and the rear limiter 2 6 The engagement of 3 is restricted. The stopper 2 6 1 is formed on the base 2 1 3 The conductor tracks 2 7 4 are electrically connected to an electrical pad 264 also formed on the substrate 2 1 3. The pad 264 allows the stopper 26 1 to be electrically coupled to the controller 111. The stopper 261 and the limiter 262 or 263 An engagement will engage the circuit between pad 2 6 4 and pad 2 4 2. In one method of operating the actuator 1 0 1 of the present invention, the voltage relative to the potential applied to the electrical pad 2 4 2 is controlled by 1 1 1 Via individual electrical pads in actuator 1 0 1 2 4 0 or 2 4 1 set of comb-shaped finger members 2 1 9 or 2 3 0 selectively applied to a stationary electrode assembly 2 1 2 The deflection of the movable electrode assembly 2 0 8, 2 9 and thus deflection of the actuator 2 1 8 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 6 and the extended position shown in FIG. 7 and Associated mirror 1 0. 3. The electrostatic attractive force between the meshing comb-shaped drive members remains almost fixed in the finger combination. This paper is scaled with the Chinese National Kneading Rate (CNS) A4 Washer (210 X 297 male)漦) _ 38 _ — Λ ^ iT ^ {Please read the notes on the back first and write this page) 419602 ^ ή The Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed A7 B7 printed by the Cooperative Consumer Cooperative Fifth, Description of the invention (36) By releasing the fixed voltage on the fixed electrode assembly 230, an extension condition is obtained in the actuator 101, so that the mirror 103 rotates toward the extended position facing the limiter 26.2. Then, by applying a fixed voltage to another fixed electrode assembly 2 1 0, the mirror 103 is held in the extended position 2 93. Then, the mirror 103 can be retracted by removing the fixed voltage on the fixed electrode assembly 210 and applying a fixed voltage to the fixed electrode assembly 230 again. During each half stroke of the shuttle 10, the shuttle is first pulled back from its deflected position by the springs 214, 217 to its released position shown in FIG. 5, and then, by the electrode assembly 208, 210 or 209, 2 3 0 The coordinated electrostatic engagement pulls to its other deflected position. The performance of the lateral comb-type actuator 101 will depend on a number of factors, including the forward and lateral rigidity of the springs 214, 217 and the relative dimensions of the comb-shaped drive finger members 211, 212. The performance exchange price lies between the operating voltage and size allowed by the actuator 101 and between the position of the mirror 103 and the switching speed. The traditional method of obtaining large deflections at low operating voltages is to minimize the spacing between the electrodes to generate maximum forward force and use a spring with low forward rigidity to generate large forward displacements. This method is commonly used for thin Polycrystalline silicon actuators in which low off-plane rigidity prevents the use of large operating voltages a. However, these designs are not optimal when using relatively thick structures. Although, as the interval between the electrodes decreases, the forward force of each finger member increases, but the lateral force increases faster. When designing high-speed actuators with high deflection or high force, the preferred design method is to determine the maximum voltage that the structure can support. < CNS) A4 washing grid (210X297mm) 1.1 -------- installation-- (Please read the precautions on the back ^ Take a photo of this page first) Ordering line-39- 419602 Central Bureau of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperate with Du Du printed A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (37) Then, choose the electrode interval that will cause the minimum lateral instability at this maximum voltage. Then • Define the maximum position and speed of the actuator based on the rigidity of the spring and the mass of the moving element. "When minimizing the size of the actuator and thus the space occupied by the actuator on the optical microswitch 104 The invention also reaffirms the above-mentioned relationship * In the conventional art, the comb-shaped finger member is not sufficiently restricted to prevent parallel movement with respect to the center axis of the micro switch 104 that is perpendicular to the direction of movement of the actuator 101, So that the sufficient lateral force generated between the finger members will cause the movable electrode assembly to move quickly to the side instead of continuing to extend or retract the position. This instability occurs when the differential is greater than the transverse mechanical elastic coefficient of the spring. The spring portions or beam-like members 224, 225 may be longer or shorter than the comb drive bars 221, 222. More specifically, the spring portions 224, 225 have a length in the range of 200 to 2000 m, preferably 800 to 2100 m, and a width in the range of 3.5 to 5.5 m, preferably 3.75 to 4.25 m. Each of the spring portions 224, 225 shown in FIG. 5 has a length at least equal to the length of the comb-shaped driving bars 221, 222 of the actuator 101. The actuator 101 has a length of about 800 micrometers, a width of about 250 micrometers, and a height of about 80 micrometers. The beams or springs 214, 217 are shown in the undeflected or released position in FIG. 5, where each beam-like member or beam 2 2 4, 2. 25 will extend linearly in a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the shuttle 10 9 》 When the individual mirrors are in the retracted position, the beams 224, 225 can be used in the electrode assembly -------- ^-1 ^ ------ ΐτ ----- II (Please read first Note on the back: write this page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) _ 4〇41 96u Central Ministry of Economic Affairs stamped by the staff consumer cooperative 11 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Station) 2 0 9 moves in a moving direction to the first deflection position shown in FIG. 6. When the individual mirror 103 series is in the extended position, the beams 2 1 4 and 2 1 7 can also be moved to the second deflection position shown in FIG. 7 in another relative moving direction of the electrode assembly 20 9. When the beams 2 14, 2 17 are in their respective first and second deflection positions, the beams 2, 14, 2 17 are in a non-linear or curved position. More specifically, when the individual springs 2 1 4, 2 1 7 are moved from a straight or released position to a deflected or curved position, the opposite ends of each beam 224, 225 will move in opposite directions, each in this direction It is parallel to the moving direction of shuttle 1 0 9 "The maximum lateral rigidity of the beam or spring 2 14, 2 1 7 , that is, the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of shuttle 1 0 9 occurs in Figure 5. The springs shown in the undeflected or released position are halfway between the retracted and extended positions shown in Figs. 2 and 3, respectively. As shown, when not deflected as shown in Figure 5 • The springs 214, 217 are in a straight condition. The shuttle 1 0 9 composed of the component frame 2 1 6 also includes an actuator 1 0 1 that resists the entire rigidity of lateral load and bending and reduces the overall mass of the shuttle 1 9. The inherent rigidity of the present invention may not require actuation The actuator 1 0 1 is designed as a two-way symmetry used in conventional arts * allowing the width of the actuator 1 0 1 to be halved. As the width is reduced, the actuator group 1 01 can be packed closer together in the micro switch 104 to allow more actuators in the micro switch to be on the laser light 191 of a given length. A further embodiment of the actuator of the present invention is shown in Fig. 8, which includes added features to improve the performance of the actuator. Similar reference numerals are used to describe similar elements in actuator 101 as in actuator 180 of FIG. 8. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard {CNS) A Zhong L grid (210X297 mm) αλ. -------- ^ ------ ir ------ ^ (Please read the note on the back \ ^-write this page first) 4 1 S b Printed by Bei Gong Consumer Cooperative ¾ A7 _B7 _ V. Description of Invention (39). The actuator 1 8 0 includes first and second disposable strips 2 4 6 and 2 4 7, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, extending relative to the spring 2 1 4 and extending each spring or beam portion 224, The 225 is set to ensure uniform etching and thus the required rectangular cross section of the beam portion. The height of each disposable strip approximates the height of the beam section and provides narrow slots 2 4 8 extending along each side of the beam section. The separation between the beam portion and the individual disposable strips, that is, the width of each slot 2 4 8, can be compared to the smallest etched feature in the device. The distance between the * beam portion of the actuator 180 and each disposable bar is close to eight microns. By restricting the reverse etching of the side surfaces 226, 227, the disposable strips 246, 247 can facilitate the formation of parallel, planar side surfaces 226, 227. More specifically, the narrow width of the groove 248 inhibits ions traveling non-parallel to the groove direction from entering the groove and thus inhibits their participation in the etching of the side surfaces 2 2 7 and 2 2 7. In the illustrated method of operating the actuator 180, the first and second movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 of the actuator 101 are initially stationary and located in the extension and retraction shown in FIG. Halfway between the locations. In the extended position, the extension 2 1 8 will abut against the forward limiter 262 and the first and second movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 will abut against at least one of the three first fixed stoppers 2 9 3 One and a plurality of three first fixed stoppers 2 9 3 as shown in FIG. 8, the first fixed stoppers 293 are attached to the base 213. A stopper 293 is used for each of the comb-type driving members 208a, 208b, and 208c. The stopper 2 6 1 will engage the limiter 2 6 1 before attaching to the extension 2 1 8. In the retracted position, the extension 2 1 8 will be close to the back limiter (L -------- ^ ------ 1T ------. ^ (Please read first Note on the back; ^: write this page) I-—— / 1__I____ This paper "standard uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -42- 4 19 6 0 2 at Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 扃A7 is printed by a consumer cooperative. ___B7_V. Description of the invention (40) 263 and the first and second movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 will be closely attached to the three second fixed stoppers 2 1 3 2 9 At least one of 2 and a plurality of three second fixed stoppers 2 9 2 attached to the base 213 as shown in Fig. 8. The stoppers 2 9 2 are used for each of the comb drive members 209a, 209b, 209c. The stopper 261 engages and attaches to the extension member 2 1 8 and then moves to the limiter 2 6 3. The stopper 2 9 2, 2 9 3 makes the mirror 103 of the optical micro switch 104 easily reproducible. Klassen, Petersen, Noworolski, Logan, Maluf, Brown, Storment, McCully, and Kovacs, can be used similar to Proceedings Of Transducers' 9 5 (1 9 9 5), pages 556-559. Onding And Deep Reactive Ion Etching; A New Technology For Microstructures " process described in the thesis, manufacturing actuators 101 and 180, in this process, the bottom silicon wafer or the shallow hole in the substrate 2 1.3 Allows the creation of suspended or movable springs 2 1 4, 2 1 7, comb drive members 208, 209, etc. As shown in Figure 9, in the area where the structure needs to be moved, the bottom wafer or substrate 2 1 The etch depth in 3 is between 5 and 50 microns and more preferably a depression of 10 microns. Silicon dioxide with a thickness between 0.1 and 2.0 microns and preferably close to 1.0 microns is used Layer 1 71, the second or upper wafer 1 7 3 is fused to the substrate 213, and then the upper wafer 173 is honed and polished to a desired thickness. Gold 臛 is produced on the upper surface 1 7 6 of the upper wafer Layers 1 to 4 are used for electrical pads 240, 241, 242, 264, visual indicators, etc. (Please read the notes on the back first to write this page) Gutter This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) _ 43.4 Ministry of Economy Central Standards shoulders industrial and consumer cooperation Du Yin 簟 J 6 G 2 .. β A7 _B7___ _ 5. Description of the invention (41). Finally, using the deep reactive ion etching technology, the upper crystal ring 1 3 is etched to obtain the required high form ratio structure β. The final DRIE silicon etching will stop where the silicon dioxide layer 171 exists and continue to etch to the layer. 171 does not exist in the base 2 1 3. This process results in a movable single crystal silicon structure with an air gap having a shallow hole thickness of 170, suspended on the substrate 213 and electrically insulated from the substrate. For example, the spring 2 14, 2 17, movable, The electrode assemblies 208 and 209, the rigid support 131 and the connector frame 216. Other structures such as the wire mechanism 286, 287 and the stoppers 292, 293 will be fixedly attached to the substrate 213 but electrically insulated from the substrate with a silicon dioxide layer 171 and electrically insulated from surrounding features with an air gap 175. In some applications, such as switching, independent confirmation of the position of the mirror 103 is important. When the mirror 1 0 3 in the actuator 1 0 0 is in the extended position, the movable electrode portion 2 0 8 forwardly engages the stopper 2 6 2 and engages and makes electrical contact with the stopper 2 6 1. The stopper 2 6 1 is electrically coupled to the electrical pad 2 6 4 by a wire 2 7 4, and the electrical pad 2 6 4 can be electrically coupled to the controller 1 1 1. Likewise, when the mirror 1 0 3 is held in the retracted position, the backward limiter 2 6 3 will engage and make electrical contact with the stopper 2 6 1 and thus be electrically coupled to the electrical pad 2 6 4 with a wire 2 7 4 »Therefore, the part of the movable electrode assembly 208, the shuttle 109, and the mirror 103 can be electrically sensed by the controller 111 to confirm and / or monitor the state of the micro switch 104 'limiter 262, 263 and stoppers 261, 292, and 293 are #movement stopper mechanisms included in actuator 180. This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specifications (210X297 mm) _Private. _ * I, I ± III Pack I order IIIII line (Notes on the back of the poem first read the 'This page') 4 Central Industry Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, monthly consumer cooperation Du printed 9 602 ^ A7 _B7__ V. Description of the invention (42) The actuator of the invention is provided with other mechanisms for monitoring the shuttle 10 and the movable electrode assembly 208 and 209. For example, 1 controller 111 can determine the position of movable comb drive members 208a, 208b, 208c and 209a, 209b, 209c by the traditional deduction method included in the controller to measure the movable comb type. The capacitance between the driving finger member 211 and the comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 2 of the comb-shaped driving members 210 a, 210 b, 210 c, 23 a, 230 b, and 2 3 0 c is fixed by meshing with each other. For example, a signal separated from the driving signal of the comb drive member may be transmitted from the controller 111 to the actuator to measure the capacitance. This method does not require physical contact between the electrodes *, for example, a moving stop mechanism as described above. Alternatively, during the formation of the actuator, a second and second opposite, vertical side silicon material extending along one or more spring portions or suspensions 224, 225 may be doped in the spring portion. Create a piezo resistor. The resistance change of the piezoelectric resistor corresponding to the strain change of the suspension members 224 and 225 during the deflection of the springs 214 and 217 can be measured by the traditional deduction method provided in the controller 111 to determine the shuttle 1 0 9 and the mirror 1 0 3 Position with respect to the base 213 and the fixed electrode assemblies 210 and 230》 Actuator 6 0 1 * Another embodiment of the actuator of the present invention shown in FIG. 1 is actually similar to the actuator 1 0 1 and similar reference numerals are used to describe similar elements of the actuators 10 1 and 6 0 1. As in the actuator 101, the actuator 601 includes first and second movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 and first and second detachable fixed electrode assemblies 210, 230. Mobile electrode assembly This paper is suitable for the standard of the countries with difficulty (CNS) A4 washing grid (2〗 0X 297 mm). 45 _- JJ * ~ [Install tl ni wire (Please read the precautions on the back first, write 4 (This page) Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 19 6 0 2 .4 'A7 _B7___ V. Description of the Invention (43) 208, 209 are joined together to move the beta electrode assembly 208, 209 together uniformly , 210, 230 extend perpendicular to the longitudinal centerline of the actuator and are concentrated on this centerline. The actuator 6 0 1 differs from the actuator 1 0 1 in that the first movable component 2 0 8 includes only the first comb-shaped driving member 208 a, and the first comb-shaped driving member 208 a is perpendicular to the component 208, The moving direction of 209 extends. The second movable component 2 0 9 includes only the first comb-shaped driving member 2 9 a * The first comb-shaped driving member 2 9 a extends perpendicularly to the moving directions of the components 2 08 and 2 0 9. Since the actuator 601 contains only a single comb-type drive member 208a, 209a, and the actuator 101 contains comb-type drive members 208a, 208b, 208c, 209a, 209b, 209c, the motive force provided by the actuator 101 is almost Three times the actuator 6 0 1. The suspension design of the actuator 60 1 must take this force reduction into account to achieve the required deflection. The use of a single pair of comb drive assemblies 208, 209 reduces the overall length of the actuator 601, while allowing for smaller optical micro-switches as described below. Fig. 12 is a top plan view showing a first embodiment of the optical switch 104 manufactured according to the present invention. The switch 104 contains a practically planar component or device in the form of a microchip 100, which includes less than one of twelve lateral comb drive actuators 180 and a series as shown One or more, twelve lateral comb drive actuators 180 are carried by a silicon wafer or substrate 2 1 3 with a thickness of about 500 microns. Each of the electrostatically driven actuators or motors 180 has a shuttle mechanism or shuttle 10 9 coupled to a mirror 103, and the mirror 103 is vertically arranged with respect to the base or the body 2 1 3 China National Standard (CMS) A4 grid (210X297 mm). 4g. --------;-I ^ ------ 1T ------ 0 (Please read the first Note '4 written on this page) I 6 u 2 printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau Standards Bureau C Consumers Cooperatives A7 ______B7_ V. Description of the invention (44). The laser light 1 9 1 carried by the input optical fiber 9 8 is guided through the input of the switch 1 0 4 or the entrance port 1 5 0 before proceeding in the channel that passes the central longitudinal axis 1 1 3 of the switch 1 0 4. And through the collimating lens 1 02. Typical laser light 1 9 1, 192 used with the optical switch 10 4 may have a diameter in the range of about 100 to 200 microns. As shown in FIG. 12, the sheath of the input fiber 98 is removed at the input port 105, and then the cladding fiber 98 extends along the entrance groove 156 formed in the microchip 100 and extends into the microchip. 100. The collimating lens 102 is arranged near the trailing end of the optical fiber 98 in the preferred embodiment shown in Fig. 12 * The lens 102 is a conventional micro-gradient refractive index collimating lens. Alternatively, the lens 102 may be a conventional micro-molded lens or a conventional spherical lens and is within the scope of the present invention. The trailing end of the optical fiber 98 is tied in the switch 104 so as to be at the focal point of the collimator lens 102. The lens 10 2 is used to align the light 191 before the light enters the main channel 1 5 7 of the microchip 100. It should be understood that an optical switch without a lens 102 can be provided at the entrance of the channel 157. In addition, the aligned input laser light 1 9 1 can be guided through free space and into the input port 1 50, that is, the entrance fiber 98 is not used, and is within the scope of the present invention. In Fig. 12, the actuator or micromotor 180 is shown halfway between the rest or home position, the extended and retracted positions, as in the case of manufacture. The actuator 1 80 is divided into a first group or a plurality of six actuators 18 0 a and a second group or a plurality of six actuators 1 8 0 b. These actuators 1 8 〇a extend from the first A dashed line is spaced apart. The first dashed line is spaced from and parallel to the central longitudinal axis 1 1 3 of the microchip '1 0 0. These actuators 1 8 0 b are aligned along the scale of the paper. (CNS) Α4 size (210 X 297 mm) _ 47

---------^------^------1^ (請先聞讀背面之注意事項-Α寫本頁) _______I 419602 經濟部中央棣準局員工消费合作杜印裝 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(45 ) 二虛線相間隔,第一’虛線係與微晶片1 〇 〇的中心縱軸 1 1 3相互隔開及平行。致動器180a與180b係配 置於中心軸113的相對側上並因而彼此相對。致動器 180的鏡103均以45度角傾斜於軸113且大體上 面對輸入埠150。第一致動器180a的鏡103可用 於導引光1 9 1經過9 0度角以致於光1 9 1會於垂直於 中心軸之第一方肉上延伸並朝向裝置的右方。第二致動器 180b的鏡103可用於導引光191經過90度角以 致於光191會於垂直於中心軸之第二方向上延伸並朝向 裝置的左方。因此•第一致動器1 8 0 a的鏡1 0 3會將 光1 9 1導引至相對於第二致動器1 8 0 b的鏡子之方向 〇 與第一致動器1 8 0 a的鏡1 〇 3對齊之第一眾多六 輸出或出口埠1 5 1係設置於微晶片1 0 0的右側上,而 與第二致動器1 8 0 a的鏡1 〇 3對齊之第二眾多六輸出 淳1 5 1係設於微晶片1 0 〇的左側上-出口溝槽1 6 1 會從每一埠1 5 1向內延伸至通道1 5 7以將個別的輸出 光纖9 7載送至接近鏡1 0 3之點》用於每一光纖9 7之 護套(未顯示)係開始於輸出埠1 5 1。應瞭解,可設置 彼此成其它傾斜度或相對於光學開關的軸成其它傾斜角之 鏡子。透鏡1 0 2係配置於鏡子1 0 3與個別的輸出光纖 9 7的進入面之間以將光1 9 1聚焦至光纖9 7中。雖然 ,光學開關1 0 4係顯示成耦合至單模式+ Μ光纖9 7, 但是,開關1 0 4可耦合至任何適當的光纖且在本發明的 本紙张尺度遴用中囷國家標準(CNS ) A4祝格(210X297公裨)_48 —^il· ϋ^— tif— Bn EH (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁)--------- ^ ------ ^ ------ 1 ^ (Please read the notes on the back-write this page first) _______I 419602 Staff Consumption of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative Du printed equipment A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (45) The two dotted lines are spaced apart, and the first dotted line is spaced from and parallel to the central longitudinal axis 1 1 3 of the microchip 100. The actuators 180a and 180b are arranged on opposite sides of the central shaft 113 and thus face each other. The mirrors 103 of the actuator 180 are all inclined to the shaft 113 at an angle of 45 degrees and generally face the input port 150. The mirror 103 of the first actuator 180a can be used to guide the light 191 through a 90 degree angle so that the light 191 will extend on the first square meat perpendicular to the central axis and face the right side of the device. The mirror 103 of the second actuator 180b can be used to guide the light 191 through a 90 degree angle so that the light 191 will extend in a second direction perpendicular to the central axis and toward the left side of the device. Therefore • the mirror 1 0 3 of the first actuator 1 8 0 a will guide the light 1 9 1 to the direction of the mirror relative to the second actuator 1 8 0 b and the first actuator 1 8 0 The first number of six output or exit ports 1 5 1 aligned with the mirror 1 a of a are arranged on the right side of the microchip 100 and the first aligned with the mirror 1 0 3 of the second actuator 1 8 0 a Two, many and six outputs are installed on the left side of the microchip 100. The outlet groove 1 6 1 will extend from each port 1 5 1 to the channel 1 5 7 to separate the individual output fibers 9 7 Carrying to the point close to the mirror 103> The sheath (not shown) for each optical fiber 9 7 starts at the output port 1 51. It should be understood that mirrors may be provided at other inclination to each other or at other inclination angles with respect to the axis of the optical switch. The lens 10 2 is disposed between the mirror 103 and the entrance surface of the individual output fiber 97 to focus the light 1 9 1 into the fiber 97. Although the optical switch 104 is shown to be coupled to a single mode + M fiber 9 7, the switch 104 can be coupled to any suitable fiber and used in the paper standard of the present invention (CNS) A4 Zhuge (210X297 public benefit) _48 — ^ il · ϋ ^ — tif— Bn EH (Please read the precautions on the back to write this page)

•tT 線 4 19 6 0 2 A7 _B7 五、發明説明(46 ) 範圍之內。 延著通道1 5 7的中心或中間處的縱向軸1 1 3,串 列地配置成對的透鏡1 〇 2。第一或上透鏡1 〇 2係配置 於相鄰於輸出光纖9 7之透鏡1 0 2下約4毫米處並用以 將雷射光1 9 1再聚焦。在通道1 5 7中間之第二或下透 鏡1 0 2會以光1 9 1離開上透1 〇 2的聚焦點二倍之間 距相間隔並用以將雷射光再對準以延著通道1 5 7的下半 部中的縱軸1 1 3行進。 經濟部中央樣率局貝工消费合作社印製 (讀先閱讀背面之注意事項% 4寫本頁) 如圖1 3所示,在操作期間,控制器1 1 1指令下之 —特定鏡1 0 3 a會由個別的致動器1 8 0 b完全地延伸 至光191的通道中的位置中,而在控制器111的指令 下之其餘鏡1 0 3 b會完全地退回至離開光1 9 1的通道 之位置中》光1 9 1會從特定的延伸鏡1 0 3 a反射並因 而由鏡1 0 3 a選擇性地導引至個別的輸出埠1 5 1及與 其耦合之輸出光纖97。光19 1離開輸出埠1 5 1並可 能被導引經過自由空間或者由第二光纖及/或透鏡9 7引 導至目的地。也可將光1 9 2從任一輸出埠1 5 1導引至 輸入埠1 50。在上述實施例中,知道每一鏡χ 〇3應可 在其完全退縮與完全延伸的位置之間,位移至少光1 9 1 的寬度。用於光學開關1 0 4之典型雷射光1 9 1之直徑 約爲1 0 0至2 0 0微米範圍,藉由致動器1 8 0至少取 得鏡1 0 3之此更加直線的位移》如同先前所述,.習知的 致動器典型上在合理的切換速度之下僅提傧4 0微米的位 移。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家橾率(CNS ) A4祝格(210X297公釐)[49 - ~~ 4 1960 2 .-4 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(47 ) 經濟部中央棣準局貝工消费合作社印裝 I— -------—-裝-I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項'^寫本瓦) 由於本發明使用鏡1 0 3以在輸入埠1 5 0與特別輸 出埠1 5 1之間耦合光1 9 1,所以,所使用的鏡子之品 質是重要的。爲了使導因於吸收、散射,及散焦之光損耗 最小,鏡1.0 3的表面必須是反射的、平滑的、及平坦的 。對於較不重要的應用,在裝置製造期間,可以在適當位 置處形成鏡1 0 3以作爲蝕刻表面的垂直牆。鏡1 0 3可 從很薄的矽晶圓中分別地製成•接著.,如同關於致動器 6 0 1之圖1 0所示*藉由任何適當的黏著劑6 8 8而對 齊及附著於延伸件2 1 8上的托架2 1,舉例而言,適當 的黏著劑6 8 8可爲設於New Brunswick, NJ.之Norland Produc ts出售的Norland ΝΕΑ 123M,其爲一種紫外線引發 黏著劑。鏡1 0 3可由具有層6 9 2之薄矽晶圓6 9 1製 成,層6 9 2係具有諸如黃金等任何適當反射金靥,其係 以薄黏著層693固定於晶圓691,黏著層693係由 絡或任何其它適當材料所製成。用於層6 9 2之其它適當 的反射材料包含鋁和銀,而用於黏著層6 9 3之其它適當 材料包含鈦β矽晶圖691之厚度在20至300微米範 圍且較佳的是約8 0微米,而反射層的厚度在〇 . 0 5至 0.30範圍且較佳的是約0.15微米。黏著層具有約 0.005微米之厚度。以室溫下餘留的內部應力最小之 方式,沈積金屬層。矽厚度對金龎厚度之大比例也會使因 塗著層與矽的不同熱膨張率所造成的鏡彎曲最小β所造成 的鏡子之特徵在於黃金或其它反射金屬的窩反射率以及拋 光的矽之低表面粗糙度及高平坦度。 本紙張尺度逋用中固國家揉準(CNS > Α4ΛΙ格(210Χ297公釐)· 5〇 - 419602 A7 B7 五、發明説明Us ) 其它層或塗著層可選加地沈積於反射層6 9 2之上以 增加鏡子1 0 3的反射率》在圖1 0中所示的鏡子1 〇 3 中,已將多重介電對6 9 6沈積於反射層的頂部上*每一 對6 9 6係由沈積於具有相當低反射率的層6 9 8上之具 有相當高反射率的層6 9 7所構成》在鏡子1 0 3用於諸 如微型開關1 8 0之光學微型開關之情形中,層6 9 7及 698之厚度均等同於電射光191、 192的波長之四 分之一。用於層6 9 7之適當金靥包含氧化铈及氧化鈦, 而用於層6 9 8之適當材料包含氟化鎂及二氧化矽。 具有其它微致動器配置之本發明的光學開關可用於選 擇性地將被輸入光纖9 8導引至開關中的雷射光1 9 1重 新導引》圖1 4中所示之光學微型開關8 3 0係由微晶片 8 3 1形成,微晶片8 3 1係由諸如上述關於開關1 0 4 之任何適當機構所製成。類似的參考數字用於說明微型開 關1 0 4及8 3 0之類似元件。光學開關8 3 0包含耦合 至入口光纖9 8之入口埠8 3 2及多個外離或出口埠 8 3 3,出口埠8 3 3係延著開關8 3 0的一側間隔及耦 合至個別輸出光纖9 7。中心縱軸8 3 6會延著開關 8 3 0的中央通道8 3 7以平行於入口埠8 3 2並垂直於 出口埠8 3 3之方式延伸'•第一眾多八致動器或微型致動 器1 8 0 a係延著第一虛線縱向地間隔,第一虛線會以與 光學開關8 3 0的中心軸8 3 6相平行及相間隔之方式延 伸。第二眾多四致動器或微型致動器1 8 0 b會延著第二 虛線縱向地間隔,第二虛線會以與軸8 3 6平行及間隔之 本紙張尺度逍用中a國家標率(CNS >八4規格(210X297公釐)-51 —書 II - I —I—] - ^^1 I {請先閲讀背面之注意事項' t寫本頁) 訂 線 經濟部中央樣率局貝工消费合作社印*. 經濟部中夾標率扃負工消费合作社印裝 419602 A7 B7 五、發明説明(49 ) 方式延伸。縱向軸8 3 6會於第一組致動器1 8 0 a與第 二組致動器1 8 0 b之間延伸》以此方式*致動器或微型 馬達1 8 0 a會與致動器或微型馬達1 8 0 b相對。 致動器1 8 0 a包含安裝於托架2 1 9 a上的鏡 103a,而致動器180b包含安裝於托架219b上 的鏡103b,馬達l〇3a、103b均實際地類似於 上述的馬達103。鏡103a、1.0 3b均大體上面對 輸入埠8 3 2。透鏡配置於每一鏡與溝槽8 3 8之間,用 以載送光纖97至個別的出口埠833。鏡103a、 1 0 3 b均以4 5度角相對於縱軸8 3 6傾斜以便將撞擊 於其上之雷射光1 9 1再引導經過9 0度角。每一致動器 1 0 8 a中的托架2 1 9 a係形成爲安裝於其上的鏡 1 0 3 a會以相對於致動器1 8 0 a爲向前之方向偏轉雷 射光191。每一致動器108b中的托架219b係形 成爲安裝於其上的鏡1 0 3 b會以朝向致動器1 8 0 b之 方向偏轉雷射光19 1。如此,鏡103a、103b均 會以眾多平行方向偏轉雷射光1 9 1,因而爲單一方向, 以致於雷射光總是從光學開關8 3 0的一側離開。 微型致動器1 8 0 a係延著微晶片8 3 1的第一虛線 以四組背對背成對的方式配置。如此,每一相鄰對的致動 器180a之延伸件218a、托架219a及鏡 1 0 3 a均延著這些致動器1 8 0 a的接合側設置.。在微 晶片8 3 1中的致動器1 8 0 a之此配置岢允許二個最尾 端鏡1 0 3 a設置於接近微型開關8 3 0的中心以減少微 本纸張尺度通用中國圃家橾準(CNS > A4规格< 210X297公釐)~~. « - ' L-------^--^------1T------線 (請先«讀背面之注意ί項,,_.v寫本頁) 經濟部中央橾準局負工消費合作社印袈 19602 ^ A7 __B7_____ 五、發明説明(50 ) 型開關內的雷射光191、 192的通道長度。結果,輸 入準直透鏡1 0 2可設置於微型開關8 3 0的更內部。致 動器1 8 0 a的背對背配置也允許二個中心透鏡1 〇 2被 設置於二致動器1 8 0 a的最中心前方*允許進一步縮減 雷射光191、 192的通道長度》 輸入的雷射光191會從輸入埠832延著中心縱軸 8 3 6行進,直到其嚙合控制器1 11所選取的鏡 l〇3a、103b ^ 第一致動器 180a 的鏡 l〇3a 與梭1 0 9係可從鏡1 0 3離開雷射光1 9 1的路徑之第 —或縮回位置移動至鏡的反射表面置於雷射光的路徑之第 二或延伸位置|以便將雷射光導引經過個別的出口埠 833 第二致動器180b的鏡103b與梭109係 可從鏡1 0 3 b離開雷射光1 9 1的路徑之第一或縮回位 置移動至鏡的反射表面置於雷射光191的路徑中之第二 或延伸位置。 每一致動器1 8 0 b的延伸件2 1 8及托架2 1 9係 構造成當鏡1 0 3 b處於其縮回的或離開路徑位置時會離 開雷射光1 9 1的路徑。由於鏡1 0 3b與托架2 19b 係相對於進入的雷射光1 9 1而對齊,所以,致動器 1 8 0 b比致動器1 8 0 a需要更大的移動或偏轉以便將 鏡1 0 3 b及托架2 1 9縮離雷射光1 9 1的路徑。舉例 而言,圖1 3中的致動器1 8 0 b相較於致動器1.80 a 需要額外的5 0微米偏轉。因此,在致動盔1 8 0 b的梳 型驅動組件中的梳型驅動指構件211、 212比致動器 本紙張尺度速用中國國家標準(CNS)A4规格(210X297公釐)_ 53 ---------^------tr------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項、六寫本頁) 經濟部中央橾準局貝工消费合作社印製 419602 A7 B7 五、發明说明(51 ) 1 8 0 a中對應的元件還要長》尺寸上的增加,使得致動 器1 8 0 b需要較大的驅動電壓β在眾多平行方向中,自 光學開關8 3 0向外之雷射光1 9 1的方向,且因而爲單 一方向,會減少有開關8 3 ◦置於其中之光學資料儲存系 統9 5的複雜性。 圖1 5係顯示另一光學開關,其會選擇性地引導輸入 的雷射光1 9 1自光學開關的一側以.單一方向朝外。其中 之光學微型開關8 5 1與光學微型開關1 0 4及8 3 0具 有類似性且使用類似的參考數字說明微型開關1 0 4、 8 3 0及8 5 1之類似元件。加長的光學開關8 5 1係由 微晶片8 5 2形成,微晶片8 5 2在其一端具有入口埠 8 5 3並在其一側上具有間隔的眾多十二個輸出埠8 5 4 *縱軸8 5 6會延著光學開關8 5 1的通道8 5 7以平行 於入口埠8 5 3及垂直於出口埠8 5 4之方式延伸。開關 8 5 1具有二組配置於通道8 5 7內之透鏡對1 0 2,以 便當光1 9 1經由通道8 5 7向上行進時,將雷射光 1 9 1再聚焦及再對準》二組透鏡對1 0 2會將通道分割 成長度均爲約四毫米之三個區段。 延著虛線,以縱向間隔定位之方式,配置眾多十二個 致動器1 8 0,虛線係以與縱軸8 5 6相平行及相間隔之 方式延伸。致動器180均具有鏡103 ’鏡103係以 4 5度角相對於縱軸8 5 6傾斜以將雷射光重新導引經過 9 0度角。每一致動器1 8 0的鏡1 0 3保安裝於托架 2 1 9上並因而將雷射光1 9 1導引經過配置於相鄰於致 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS > Λ4蛛格(2丨0X297公釐)^54- ' ---------裝------訂------線 (請先閲讀背面之注項' t寫本頁) ____. 41 9602 «ΐ 經濟部中央揉準局貝工消费合作社印輦 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(52 > 動器1 8 0的後端之個別出口埠8 5 4而回至致動器 180。入口光襻98係耦合至入口埠853,而出口光 纖9 7係耦合至每一出口埠8 5 4 »透鏡1 〇 2係配置於 每一鏡與溝槽8 5 8之間,用以載運光纖9 7至個別的出 口埠854。鏡103均可由個別的致動器180之梭 1 0 9在第一或縮回位置與第二或延伸位置之間移動,在 第一或縮回位置中,鏡1 0 3係離開雷射光1 9 1的路徑 *在第二或延伸位置中,鏡1 〇 3係在雷射光1 9 1的位 置中。應瞭解,光學開關8 3 0可設有致動器1 8 0以將 雷射光191引導至致動器的前方且係在本發明的範圍之 內。光學開關8 5 1的設計可有效率地使用基底2 1 3的 表面積》 圖1 6係顯示本發明的光學開關之又一實施例,其中 外離的雷射光1 9 1僅從光學開關的單一側離開。其中光 學開關9 0 1係由微晶片9 0 2形成,微晶片9 0 2具有 單一輸入埠903,輸入埠903會耦合至微晶片902 的一側上之输入光纖9 8 »溝槽9 0 6係設於微晶片 9 0 2中以自入口埠9 0 3載送輸入光織9 8。耦合至 PM光纖9 7之眾多十二埠9 0 4會於與輸入埠9 0 3相 同的微晶片9 0 2側上間隔。 實際上類似於上述鏡1 0 3之第一及第二方向馬達 907、 908係包含於光學開關901的機構之內以便 交錯地導引雷射光1 9 1分別延著微晶片0 0 2的向下延 伸通道9 1 1或向上延伸通道9 1 2 °通道9 1 1、 本紙張尺度遴用中國國家揉準(CNS > A4*t格(210X297公釐)·站· —---------裝— (請先閲讀背面之注意事項/Λ-寫本頁)• tT line 4 19 6 0 2 A7 _B7 V. The scope of the invention description (46). A pair of lenses 102 are arranged in series along the longitudinal axis 1 1 3 at the center or middle of the channel 1 5 7. The first or upper lens 102 is disposed about 4 mm below the lens 102 adjacent to the output fiber 97, and is used to refocus the laser light 191. The second or lower lens 1 0 2 in the middle of the channel 1 5 7 will be separated by the light 1 9 1 from the focal point of the upper lens 1 2 and spaced twice and used to re-align the laser light to extend the channel 1 5 The longitudinal axis 1 1 3 in the lower half of 7 travels. Printed by the Shell Sample Consumer Cooperative of the Central Sample Rate Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (read the precautions on the back and read the 4% on this page). As shown in Figure 13, during operation, the controller 1 1 1 under the instruction-specific mirror 1 0 3 a will be completely extended by the individual actuator 1 8 0 b into the position in the channel of light 191, and the remaining mirrors 1 0 3 b will be completely retracted to leave the light 1 9 under the instruction of the controller 111 In the position of the channel of "1", the light 1 9 1 will be reflected from the specific extension mirror 1 0 3 a and thus selectively guided by the mirror 1 0 3 a to the individual output port 1 5 1 and the output fiber 97 coupled thereto. . The light 19 1 leaves the output port 15 1 and may be guided through free space or by a second fiber and / or lens 9 7 to a destination. It is also possible to direct light 192 from any output port 1 51 to input port 1 50. In the above embodiments, it is known that each mirror χ 03 should be able to be displaced by at least the width of light 191 between its fully retracted and fully extended positions. The typical laser light 1 9 1 used in the optical switch 104 has a diameter in the range of 100 to 2000 micrometers. At least this more linear displacement of the mirror 1 0 3 is obtained by the actuator 1 8 0. As mentioned previously, conventional actuators typically only provide a displacement of about 40 microns at reasonable switching speeds. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Zhuge (210X297 mm) [49-~~ 4 1960 2 .-4 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (47) Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Install I— -------—- Install-I (please read the note on the back first '^ Writing tile) Because the present invention uses a mirror 1 0 3 for input port 1 50 and special output port 1 5 1 The light is coupled between 191, so the quality of the mirror used is important. In order to minimize the loss of light due to absorption, scattering, and defocusing, the surface of the mirror 1.0 3 must be reflective, smooth, and flat. For less important applications, mirrors 103 can be formed in place as vertical walls of the etched surface during device fabrication. Mirrors 1 0 3 can be made separately from very thin silicon wafers. • Then, as shown in Figure 10 for actuator 6 0 1 * Aligned and attached with any suitable adhesive 6 8 8 The bracket 2 1 on the extension 2 1 8, for example, a suitable adhesive 6 8 8 may be Norland ΝΑ 123M sold by Norland Produc ts of New Brunswick, NJ., Which is a UV-initiated adhesive . The mirror 10 3 may be made of a thin silicon wafer 6 9 1 having a layer 6 9 2. The layer 6 9 2 is provided with any suitable reflective gold foil, such as gold, which is fixed to the wafer 691 with a thin adhesive layer 693, which is adhered. The layer 693 is made of metal or any other suitable material. Other suitable reflective materials for layer 6 9 2 include aluminum and silver, and other suitable materials for adhesive layer 6 9 3 include titanium β-silicon. The thickness of the pattern 691 is in the range of 20 to 300 microns and is preferably about 80 microns, and the thickness of the reflective layer ranges from 0.05 to 0.30 and is preferably about 0.15 microns. The adhesive layer has a thickness of about 0.005 microns. The metal layer is deposited in such a way that the internal stress remaining at room temperature is minimal. The large ratio of silicon thickness to the thickness of gold tin also minimizes the bending of the mirror caused by the different thermal expansion rates of the coating layer and silicon. The mirror caused by β is characterized by the reflectivity of gold or other reflective metals and polished silicon Low surface roughness and high flatness. This paper uses the standard of the solid state of China (CNS > A4Λ1 (210 × 297 mm) · 50- 419602 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention Us) Other layers or coating layers can be optionally deposited on the reflective layer 6 9 2 In order to increase the reflectivity of the mirror 103, in the mirror 10 shown in Fig. 10, multiple dielectric pairs 6 9 6 have been deposited on top of the reflective layer. Each pair of 6 9 6 series Consists of a layer 6 9 7 having a relatively high reflectance deposited on a layer 6 9 8 having a relatively low reflectance. In the case where the mirror 1 0 3 is used for an optical micro switch such as a micro switch 1 8 0, the layer The thicknesses of 6 9 7 and 698 are equal to one-fourth of the wavelengths of the electro-optic light 191 and 192. Suitable materials for layer 6 97 include cerium oxide and titanium oxide, and suitable materials for layer 6 98 include magnesium fluoride and silicon dioxide. The optical switch of the present invention with other micro-actuator configurations can be used to selectively guide the laser light 1 9 1 redirected into the switch by the input fiber 9 8. The optical micro-switch 8 shown in FIG. 1 4 30 is formed from microchip 831, and microchip 831 is made from any suitable mechanism such as the switch 104 described above. Similar reference numerals are used to describe similar components of the miniature switches 104 and 830. The optical switch 8 3 0 includes an inlet port 8 3 2 and a plurality of external or exit ports 8 3 3 coupled to the inlet fiber 9 8. The outlet port 8 3 3 is spaced along one side of the switch 8 3 0 and is coupled to an individual Output fiber 9 7. The central longitudinal axis 8 3 6 extends along the central channel 8 3 7 of the switch 8 3 0 in a manner parallel to the inlet port 8 3 2 and perpendicular to the outlet port 8 3 3 '• The first numerous eight actuators or miniature actuators The actuator 1 8 0 a is longitudinally spaced along the first dotted line, and the first dotted line will extend parallel to and spaced from the central axis 8 3 6 of the optical switch 8 3 0. The second plurality of four actuators or micro-actuators 1 8 0 b will be longitudinally spaced along the second dashed line, and the second dashed line will be parallel to and spaced from the axis 8 3 6 in the paper standard. (CNS > 8 4 specifications (210X297 mm) -51 — Book II-I —I —]-^^ 1 I {Please read the precautions on the back first 't write this page) Central Sample Rate Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Pui Gong Consumer Cooperatives *. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by the negative consumer co-operative cooperatives 419602 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (49) The method is extended. The longitudinal axis 8 3 6 will extend between the first group of actuators 1 0 0 a and the second group of actuators 1 8 0 b. In this way * the actuator or micromotor 1 8 0 a will actuate Or micro motors 1 0 0 b opposite. The actuator 180a includes a mirror 103a mounted on the bracket 2 1a, and the actuator 180b includes a mirror 103b mounted on the bracket 219b. The motors 103a, 103b are practically similar to those described above. Motor 103. The mirrors 103a, 1.0 3b generally face the input port 8 3 2. The lens is arranged between each mirror and the groove 8 3 8 for carrying the optical fiber 97 to a separate exit port 833. The mirrors 103a and 10 3 b are inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis 8 3 6 so as to guide the laser light impinging on it 1 9 1 through an angle of 90 degrees. The bracket 2 1 9 a in each actuator 10 8 a is formed as a mirror 1 0 3 a mounted thereon, which deflects the laser light 191 in a forward direction with respect to the actuator 1 8 a. The bracket 219b in each actuator 108b is shaped as a mirror 1 0 3 b mounted thereon, which deflects the laser light 19 1 in a direction toward the actuator 1 8 0 b. In this way, the mirrors 103a, 103b each deflect the laser light 191 in a plurality of parallel directions, and thus are in a single direction, so that the laser light always leaves from one side of the optical switch 830. The micro-actuators 1 8 0 a are arranged along the first dotted line of the micro-chip 8 3 1 in four groups of back-to-back pairs. In this way, the extension 218a, the bracket 219a, and the mirror 103a of each adjacent pair of actuators 180a are disposed along the joint side of these actuators 180a. This configuration of the actuator 1 8 0 a in the microchip 8 31 allows two end mirrors 1 0 3 a to be placed close to the center of the micro switch 8 3 0 to reduce the micro paper size. Furniture standard (CNS > A4 specifications < 210X297 mm) ~~. «-'L ------- ^-^ ------ 1T ------ line (please first «Read the note on the back, and _.v write this page) Seal 19602 ^ A7 __B7_____ of the invention description (50) type of laser light channels in the switch (50) type switch length. As a result, the input collimator lens 102 can be disposed further inside the micro switch 830. The back-to-back configuration of the actuator 180a also allows the two center lenses 102 to be placed at the most central front of the two actuators 180a. * Allows further reduction of the channel length of the laser light 191, 192. The light 191 travels from the input port 832 along the central longitudinal axis 8 3 6 until it engages the mirrors 103a, 103b selected by the controller 1 11 and the mirror 103a of the first actuator 180a and the shuttle 1 0 9 It can be moved from the 1st or the retracted position of the mirror 1 0 3 to the path of the laser light 1 9 1 to the mirror's reflective surface to the second or extended position of the laser light path | in order to guide the laser light through the individual Exit port 833 The mirror 103b and shuttle 109 of the second actuator 180b can be moved from the first or retracted position of the path of the mirror 1 0 3 b to the laser light 1 9 1 to the reflecting surface of the mirror and placed on the laser light 191 The second or extended position in the path. The extension 2 1 8 and the bracket 2 1 9 series of each actuator 1 0 0 b are configured to leave the path of the laser light 1 9 1 when the mirror 1 0 3 b is in its retracted or off-path position. Since the mirror 1 0 3b and the bracket 2 19b are aligned with respect to the incoming laser light 1 9 1, the actuator 1 8 0 b requires more movement or deflection than the actuator 1 8 0 a to move the mirror 1 0 3 b and the bracket 2 1 9 retract the path of the laser light 1 9 1. For example, actuator 180b in Figure 13 requires an additional 50 micron deflection compared to actuator 1.80a. Therefore, the comb-shaped driving finger members 211, 212 in the comb-shaped driving assembly for actuating the helmet 180b are faster than the actuator. This paper scale uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 53- -------- ^ ------ tr ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back, write this page first) Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs 419602 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (51) The corresponding components in 1 8 0 a are longer. The increase in size makes the actuator 1 8 0 b require a larger driving voltage β. In many parallel directions, the optical switch 8 3 0 The direction of the laser light 1 9 1 outward, and thus a single direction, will reduce the complexity of the optical data storage system 9 5 with the switch 8 3 ◦ placed therein. Fig. 15 shows another optical switch, which selectively guides the input laser light 191 from one side of the optical switch in a single direction outward. Among them, the optical micro switch 8 51 is similar to the optical micro switches 104 and 8 30 and similar reference numerals are used to describe similar components of the micro switch 104, 8 3 0, and 8 51. The elongated optical switch 8 5 1 is formed by a microchip 8 5 2 which has an inlet port 8 5 3 at one end and a plurality of twelve output ports 8 5 4 at one side * 5 The axis 8 5 6 extends along the channel 8 5 7 of the optical switch 8 5 1 parallel to the inlet port 8 5 3 and perpendicular to the outlet port 8 5 4. The switch 8 5 1 has two sets of lens pairs 1 0 2 arranged in the channel 8 5 7 so that when the light 1 9 1 travels upward through the channel 8 5 7, the laser light 1 9 1 is refocused and re-aligned. The group lens pair 102 divides the channel into three sections each having a length of about four millimeters. A plurality of twelve actuators 180 are arranged in a longitudinally spaced manner along the dotted line, and the dotted line extends parallel to and spaced from the longitudinal axis 8 56. The actuators 180 each have a mirror 103 'which is tilted at an angle of 45 degrees relative to the longitudinal axis 8 56 to redirect the laser light through an angle of 90 degrees. Each mirror 1 8 0 of the actuator 1 0 3 is mounted on the bracket 2 1 9 and thus guides the laser light 1 9 1 through a position adjacent to the paper. The Chinese national standard (CNS > Λ4 spider grid (2 丨 0X297 mm) ^ 54- '--------- install -------- order ------ line (please read the note on the back first' t copybook Page) ____. 41 9602 «ΐ Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Central Bureau of Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives 辇 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (52 > Individual exit port 8 5 4 at the rear end of the actuator 1 8 0 and return to actuation器 180。 The entrance optical beam 98 is coupled to the entrance port 853, and the exit fiber 9 7 is coupled to each exit port 8 5 4 »The lens 1 〇2 is arranged between each mirror and the groove 8 5 8 The optical fiber 97 is carried to the individual exit port 854. The mirror 103 can be moved between the first or retracted position and the second or extended position by the shuttle 10 of the individual actuator 180, and the first or retracted position In position, the mirror 1 0 3 is the path away from the laser light 1 9 1 * In the second or extended position, the mirror 1 0 3 is in the position of the laser light 1 9 1. It should be understood that the optical switch 8 3 0 can be set There are actuators 180 to direct the laser light 191 to the The front of the device is within the scope of the present invention. The design of the optical switch 8 5 1 can efficiently use the surface area of the substrate 2 1 3 "FIG. 16 shows another embodiment of the optical switch of the present invention, wherein The separated laser light 1 9 1 only exits from a single side of the optical switch. The optical switch 9 0 1 is formed by a microchip 902. The microchip 902 has a single input port 903. The input port 903 is coupled to the microchip. The input fiber 9 8 »groove 9 0 6 on one side of the 902 is provided in the microchip 9 0 2 to carry the input optical weave 9 8 from the inlet port 9 0 3. Many twelve 12 coupled to the PM fiber 9 7 Port 904 will be spaced on the same microchip 902 side as input port 903. Actually, the first and second direction motors 907 and 908 of the mirror 103 are included in the optical switch 901. Within the mechanism to guide the laser light staggered 1 9 1 downwardly extending channel 9 1 1 or upwardly extending channel 9 1 2 respectively extending along the microchip 0 0 2 1. Channels of this paper are selected from China Standard (CNS > A4 * t (210X297 mm) · Station · —--------- Installation— (Please read the precautions on the back / Λ- This page)

1ST 線 經濟部4-央橾準局夷工消费合作社印¾ 4 1 b 6 Ο 2' ^ A7 ____B7_ _ 五、發明説明(53 ) 9 12會延著個別的縱軸9 13、9 14延伸,縱軸 9 1 3、9 1 4係彼此相互間隔地及平行地延伸且與微晶 片9 〇 2的側邊相間隔地及平行地延伸。鏡9 0 7、 908均以相對於軸913、 914之45度角傾斜且均 面對入口埠903。橫軸9 16會從入口埠903延伸跨 過垂直於軸913、 914之微晶片902β 第一方向馬達9 0 7係附著於致動器6 0 1並可在光 學開關9 0 1內在第一或縮回的位置與第二或延伸的位置 間向上及向下移動,在第一或縮回位置中,鏡9 0 7係處 於離開延著橫軸916延伸之雷射光191的路徑之向上 位置中,在第二或延伸位置中,鏡子9 0 7係處於雷射光 1 9 1的路徑內的向下位置中並因而用於將雷射光偏轉 9 0度角以致於光1 9 1會延著第一路徑向下延伸,第一 路徑係延著開關的第一縱軸913延伸。 第二方向馬達9 0 8係配置於第一鏡9 0 7之後並藉 由從微晶片9 0 2中蝕刻的托架9 1 7而堅固地安裝至微 晶片9 0 2。當第一鏡9 0 7係處於其退縮位置中時,輸 入的雷射光1 9 1會嚙合鏡908。第二鏡908係用以 將光1 9 1向上導引經過9 0度角,以致於光會延著第二 通道行進,第二通道係延著微晶片9 〇 2的第二縱軸。 眾多第一致動器1 8 0 a係延著第一虛線縱向間隔, 第一虛線係平行於第一縱軸913延伸’至少一第二致動 器及如同所示之單一致動器1 8 0 b會配詹於第二虛線’ 第二虛線也會平行縱軸9 1 3延伸。四個致動器1 8 0 a 本紙張尺度適用中國國家樣準(CNS ) A4规格(210X 297公釐) 56 _ --------------tr------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項「寫本頁) '.. / 經濟部中央搮隼局負工消费合作社印装 419602 4 A7 £7__ 五、發明説明(54 ) 實際上係相對於第二致動器1 8 〇 b而縱軸9 1 3係於致 動器180a與180b之間延伸。第一致動器180a 包含四個致動器84 1、8 42、843及844·它們 係依序地從下通道8 3 7的上方至底部延著第一虛線縱向 地間隔。致動器8 4 1、8 4 2係延著第一虛線側接側配 置以致於其延伸件2 18會延著致動器8 4 1、8 4 2的 相鄰側彼此平行地延伸。致動器8 4.3、8 4 4類似地延 著第一虛線側接側配置,以致於其延伸件2 1 8會延著致 動器843、 844的相鄰側彼此平行地延伸。 眾多第三致動器1 8 0 c係延著第三虛線縱向地間隔 ,第三虛線係平行第二縱軸914延伸’且至少一第四致 動器及如同所示之單一致動器1 8 0 d係配置於第四虛線 之上,第四虛線也平行於第二縱軸9 1 4延伸。一般而言 ,第一及第二致動器或微型致動器180 a、180b係 配置於橫軸9 1 6的一側上以致於在微晶片9 0 2的一半 上,第三及第四致動器或微型致動器1 8 0 c及1 8 0 d 係配置於橫軸9 1 6的其它側上以便在微晶片9 0 2的另 —半上。更特別的是,以上縱軸9 1 4爲中心之致動器的 配置係以下縱軸913爲中心之致動器的配置之鏡影像。 如此,四個致動器1 8 0 c係實際地相對於第四致動器 1 8 0 d且縱軸9 1 4係在致動器1 8 0 c與致動器 1 8 0 d之間延伸。第三致動器1 8 0 c的四個致動器 8 4 1 — 8 4 4係依序從上通道9 1 2的底部至上方延著 第三虛線縱向地間隔。 本纸張尺度適用t國國家揉準(CNS > Α相t格(210X297公漦).g7 _1ST Line Ministry of Economy 4-Central Bureau Quasi Bureau Yigong Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. ¾ 4 1 b 6 Ο 2 '^ A7 ____B7_ _ V. Description of the invention (53) 9 12 will extend along the individual vertical axis 9 13, 9 14 The longitudinal axes 9 1 3 and 9 1 4 extend spaced apart from each other and parallel to each other and extend spaced apart from and parallel to the sides of the microchip 90 2. The mirrors 907, 908 are inclined at a 45-degree angle with respect to the axes 913, 914, and both face the entrance port 903. The horizontal axis 9 16 will extend from the entrance port 903 across the microchip 902β perpendicular to the axes 913 and 914. The first direction motor 9 0 7 is attached to the actuator 6 0 1 and can be the first or The retracted position moves up and down between the second or extended position. In the first or retracted position, the mirror 907 is in an upward position away from the path of the laser light 191 extending along the horizontal axis 916. In the second or extended position, the mirror 9 0 7 is in a downward position within the path of the laser light 1 9 1 and is thus used to deflect the laser light by a 90 degree angle so that the light 1 9 1 will extend along the first A path extends downward, and the first path extends along the first longitudinal axis 913 of the switch. The second direction motor 9 0 8 is disposed behind the first mirror 9 0 7 and is firmly mounted to the micro chip 9 0 2 by a bracket 9 1 7 etched from the micro chip 9 0 2. When the first mirror 9 07 series is in its retracted position, the input laser light 1 9 1 will engage the mirror 908. The second mirror 908 is used to guide the light 191 upward through an angle of 90 degrees, so that the light travels along the second channel, which extends along the second longitudinal axis of the microchip 902. The plurality of first actuators 18 0 a are longitudinally spaced along a first dashed line, and the first dashed line extends parallel to the first longitudinal axis 913 'at least one second actuator and a single actuator 1 8 as shown 0 b will match Zhan to the second dotted line. The second dotted line will also extend parallel to the longitudinal axis 9 1 3. Four actuators 1 8 0 a This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 56 _ -------------- tr ----- -^ (Please read the note on the back "write this page" '.. / Printed by the Consumer Affairs Cooperative of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 419602 4 A7 £ 7__ 5. Description of the invention (54) is actually relative to the second The actuator 1 8 〇b and the longitudinal axis 9 1 3 extend between the actuators 180a and 180b. The first actuator 180a includes four actuators 84 1, 8 42, 843, and 844. They are dependent on Sequentially, the first dotted line extends longitudinally from above to the bottom of the lower channel 8 3 7. The actuators 8 4 1 and 8 4 2 are arranged side by side along the first dotted line so that the extension 2 18 thereof is extended. Adjacent sides of the actuators 8 4 1 and 8 4 2 extend parallel to each other. The actuators 8 4.3 and 8 4 4 are similarly arranged along the first dashed side so that their extensions 2 1 8 will The adjacent sides of the actuators 843 and 844 extend parallel to each other. The plurality of third actuators 1 8 0 c are longitudinally spaced along a third dotted line, and the third dotted line extends parallel to the second longitudinal axis 914. At least one fourth actuator and as The single actuator 1 80 d shown is arranged above the fourth dotted line, which also extends parallel to the second longitudinal axis 9 1 4. Generally speaking, the first and second actuators or micro-actuations The actuators 180 a and 180 b are arranged on one side of the horizontal axis 9 1 6 so that the third and fourth actuators or micro-actuators 1 8 0 c and 1 8 0 are on half of the microchip 9 0 2. d is disposed on the other side of the horizontal axis 9 1 6 so as to be on the other half of the microchip 9 0 2. More specifically, the configuration of the actuator centered on the vertical axis 9 1 4 is the lower vertical axis 913 The mirror image of the configuration of the central actuator. Thus, the four actuators 18 0 c are actually relative to the fourth actuator 18 0 d and the vertical axis 9 1 4 is at the actuator 1 8 0 c and actuator 1 8 0 d. The third actuator 1 8 0 c has four actuators 8 4 1 — 8 4 4 which extend sequentially from the bottom of the upper channel 9 1 2 to the top. It is spaced longitudinally along the third dashed line. This paper size is applicable to countries and countries (CNS > Α 相 t 格 (210X297 公 漦) .g7 _

Jr--------^------1T------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意ί項1-4窝本頁) 經濟部中央棣隼局貝工消费合作社印裝 Α7 __Β7_ 五、發明説明(Μ ) 致動器180a — 18〇d均具有鏡103,鏡 1 0 3係可在第一或縮回位置與第二或延伸位置之間移動 ,第一或縮回位置係不在雷射光1 9 1被第一方向鏡 9 0 7重新導引或偏轉至第三及第四致動器1 8 0 c、 1 8 0 d或由第二方向鏡9 0 8重新引導及偏轉至第一和 第二致動器180a、 180b之路徑上,在第二或延伸 位置中,鏡1 0 3的反射表面係配置於雷射光1 9 1的路 徑中。這些鏡103大體上均面對方向鏡907、 908 且均以4 5度角相對於它們個別的第一縱軸9 1 3或第二 縱軸9 1 4而傾斜,以藉由反射而相對於此縱軸將雷射光 1 9 1導引經過9 0度角。更特別的是,每一鏡均成角度 傾斜以便選擇性地在單一方向上導引雷射光191經過光 學微型開關9 0 1的一側上之個別的出口埠9 0 4。偏轉 的雷射光會由準直透鏡1 0 2接收*準直透鏡1 0 2接著 會將雷射光發射至輸出光纖9 7之一。溝槽9 2 7係設置 於微晶片9 0 2中以載運光纖至個別的出口埠9 0 4。 如上所述,以同於光學微型開關8 3 0之微型致動器 180a的方式,延著個別的走道911、 912以二組 背對背成對之方式配置微型致動器1 8 0 a及1 8 0 c。 微晶片902中的致動器180a、 180c的此配置允 許下方及上方通道中的致動器8 4 4之鏡1 0 3設於較接 近個別的方向鏡907、 908,以減少微型開關901 中的雷射光191、 192的路徑長度並0而增加開關 901的耦合效率。致動器180a、 180c的背對背 本紙乐尺度邁用中國S家糅準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐)~~_58: -------^-I私衣------ΐτ----- (請先聞讀背面之注意事項.,f寫本頁} ----- . - ^ l·_____ 41 9602 A7 B7 經濟部中央樣準扃員工消费合作杜印裂 五 發明説明(56 ) 1 1 配 置 也允許致動 器 6 0 1 位於致動器8 4 1 的 前方 » 允許 1 1 進 步 減 少微型 開 關 9 0 1 內 的雷射光 1 9 1 、1 9 2 的. 1 路徑 長 度 〇 請 I 1 鏡 9 3 1 會 藉 由 位於 下 通 道9 1 1 的 下 端 處從 微 晶 片 先 閲 讀 1 1 9 0 2 中 蝕刻 形 成 之 托 架而 堅 固地安裝 至 微 晶 片9 0 2 Q 背 £r 之 i 1 鏡 9 3 1 係 配 置 於 第 — 與 第 二 致動器1 8 0 a 、1 8 0 b 注 意 事 1 1 的 鏡 1 0 3 之 下 及在 最 低致 動 器1 8 0 a 之 前 。鏡 9 3 1 項 1 I 係以 4 5 度 角 相 對 於 縱 軸 9 1 3傾斜。 世 田 第 一 及第 二 致 動 寫 本 裝 I 器 1 8 0 a % 1 8 0 b 的 鏡 1 0 3均處 於 縮 回 位置 時 雷 頁 I 1 射 光 1 9 1 會 被 鏡 9 3 1 偏轉 9 0度角 以 在 離 開第 — 致 動 1 1 器 1 8 0 a 的 方 向 上 行 經 準 直 透鏡1 0 2 而 進 入延 伸 經 m t 1 輸出 埠 9 0 4 之 獅 出 光 纖 9 7 。藉由苐 三 致 動 器1 8 0 c 訂 I 之 前的 上 通 道 9 1 2 的 頂部 之 托架9 4 4 類 似的 鏡 1 1 I 9 4 3 可 牢 固 地 安 裝 至 微 晶 片 9 0 2。 鏡 9 4 3係以 實 際 1 1 1 上 同 於 鏡 9 3 1 之 方 式 操 作及 當第一及 第 二 致 動器 1 1 1 8 0 C 、 1 8 0 d 的 鏡 1 0 3均處於 縮 回 位 置中 時 f 用 線 1 以 將 雷 射 光 1 9 1 偏 轉 經 過 個別的輸出埠 9 0 4 ° 鏡 I 1 0 3 、 9 3 1 及 9 4 3 會 將 雷射光以 眾 多平行方 向偏 轉 1 1 及 因 而 爲 單 — 方 向 以 致於 雷 射光1 9 1 總 是 從光 學 微 型 1 J 開 關 9 0 1 的 — 側 離 開 0 使 用 固定安裝 的 鏡 9 3 1 1 1 9 4 3 以 取 代 又 — 微 型致 動 器 及附著的 可移 動 鏡, 可 進 —— I 步減少 通 道 9 1 1 9 1 2 的 長度及因 而減少 雷射 光 1 I 1 9 1 % 1 9 2 的路 徑 長 度 〇 如同所見 y 岢使用光 學 開 關 1 1 9 0 1 以 將 雷 射光 1 9 1 選 擇 性地導引 至十 二 個输出光 纖 1 1 1 本纸張尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4洗格(210X 297公釐).=9- 經濟部中央橾率局貝工消费合作社印製 A7 _B7_ 五、發明説明(57 ) 9 7 之一。 光學微型開關9 0 1有利於降低雷射光1 9 1或雷射 光1 9 2必須行經光學開關之最大路徑。方向鏡9 0 7、 908會將雷射光19 1偏轉經過通道9 11、9 12之 一,通道911、 912於長度上均比開關104的通道 157、開關830的通道837及開關85 1的通道 8 5 7短。此縮減的路徑長度會增加開關9 0 1的耦合效 率。應瞭解*本發明的光學開關之其它實施例可具有致動 器進一步細分的部份以使雷射光191、 192的最大行 經路徑最小。 類似於任何上述開關之光學微型開關可具有類似於上 述整合於光學開關的微晶片上的雷射光學組件9 6之光學 組件。圖1 7中所示之光學微型開關1 0 5 1係由微晶片 1 0 5 2所形成,微晶片1 0 5 2係由諸如上述關於開關 1 0 4之任何適當的機構所製成。微型開關1 0 5 1與上 述開關1 0 4及8 3 0具有類似性且使用類似的參考數字 以說明開關104、 830及1051類似的元件。微型 開關1 0 5 1包含入口埠1 0 5 3及眾多延著開關 105 1的二側間隔之出口埠1054。出口埠1054 會耦合至個別的輸出光纖9 7,其一部份顯示於圖1 7中 *每一輸出光纖9 7會延伸經過個別的出口埠1 0 5 4而 至設於微晶片1 0 5 2中的通道或溝槽1 0 5 6。中央縱 軸1 0 6 1會從入口埠1 0 5 3延著中央_道1 0 6 2延 伸,中央通道1 〇 6 2係縱向地延伸經過微晶片1 0 5 2 本纸張尺度通用中國國家橾牟(CNS > A4洗格(210X297公釐)_ g〇 IJ~, 抑衣 I 、1T-^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項'^寫本頁) 419602 ^ 經濟部中央樣準局真工消費合作社印装 A7 B7 五、發明説明(58 ) 的中心。 第一眾多致動器或微型致動器1 8 0 a會延著第一虛 線縱向地間隔,第一虛線係以與中央軸1 〇 6 1相平行及 間隔之方式延伸。第二眾多致動器或微型致動器1 8 0 b 係延著第二虛線縱向地間隔,第二虛線係以與軸1 0 6 1 相平行及間隔之方式延伸。中央縱軸1 0 6 1會於第一致 動器1 8 0 a與第二致動器1 8. 0 b.之間延伸’第一致動 器1 8 0 a與第二致動器1 8 0 b係相對於縱軸1 0 6 1 而彼此相對的。雖然在開關1 0 5 1中設置六個第二致動 器180b,但是,可設置單一或任何眾多致動器180 。 第一眾多致動器1 8 0 a及第二眾多致動器1 8 0 b 均包含安裝於托架2 1 9上的鏡1 0 3。鏡1 0 3均以 4 5度角相對於縱軸1 0 6 1傾斜以致大體上面對入口埠 1 0 5 3及相對於軸1 06 1將雷射光1 9 1導引經過 9 0度角。被重新導引的雷射光1 9 1會從每一鏡1 0 3 反射,延著致動器1 8 0前方延伸的路徑而離開個別的出 口埠1 0 5 4。鏡1 0 3均可由個別致動器1 8 0的梭 1 0 9驅動而在第一或縮回位置與第二或延伸位置之間移 動,在第一或縮回位置中,鏡子係離開雷射光1 9 1的路 徑,在第二或延伸位置中,鏡子係配置於從入口埠 1 0 5 3延伸的雷射光路徑中。鏡1 〇 6 7係藉由通道 1 0 6 2的頂部處之托架1 〇 6 8而牢固地安裝至微晶片 1102。當第一及第二致動器180a、 180b的鏡 本纸張尺度通用中國國家橾準(CNS>A4規格(210Χ297公釐)„61 - 丨| I I I I 裝 II I I 訂— I I —1 I 線 (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項-、V寫本頁) 經濟部中夬樣隼局員工消费合作社印11 4 19602,^® A7 B7 五、發明説明(59 ) 1 0 3均處於縮回位置中時,鏡1 0 6 7係用以將雷射光 19 1偏轉經過個別的輸出埠1054。鏡1 0 6 7可消 除在光學開關1 0 5 1中使用一致動器之需要,且藉由如 此作法,可減少開關1 0 5 1的複雜性及縮減雷射光行經 開關1 0 5 1之準直路徑。 包含雷射微型光學組件1 0 7 1之雷射微型光學機構 會安裝於入口埠1 0 5 3之前的微晶片1 0 5 2的底部處 之基底2 1 3上。諸如雷射光學組件9 6等微型光學組件 1 0 7 1包含實際上類似於準直光件2 3 4之準直光學透 鏡1 0 7 2,以從線性偏振雷射源2 3 1及聚焦透鏡(未 顯示)接收雷射光。組件1 0 7 1又包含實際上類似於上 述分光器2 3 2之低波長色散洩漏分光器1 0 7 3。組件 1 7 0 1具有實際上類似上述四分之一波板2 3 8之四分 之一波板1083、選加的半波板1084、偏振分光器 1086及光偵測器1 087。光偵測器1087會將所 收到的光訊號轉換成電訊號。微型光組件1 0 7 1的每一 元件可藉由適當的機構安裝至基底2 1 3。舉例而言,用 於將光學透鏡1 0 7 2對準之諸如插座1 0 8 8等凹壁或 插座•可設於基底2 1 3中以容納組件1 70 1的每一元 件,元件係藉由諸如黏著劑及/或彈簧1 0 8 9等適當機 構而固定於個別的凹壁之內。於微晶片1 0 5 2中設置眾 多溝槽1 0 9 1以便雷射光行經微型光組件1 0 71。 如同此技藝中所習知,不同設計的波fel 0 8 3、 1084、偏振分光器1086及偵測器1087會藉由 I ^ 裝-- {請先聞讀背面之注意事項' 4寫本頁)Jr -------- ^ ------ 1T ------ line (please read the note on the back first 1-4 nests on this page) Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed A7 __Β7_ 5. Description of the invention (M) The actuators 180a-180d all have a mirror 103, and the mirror 103 series can be moved between the first or retracted position and the second or extended position. The retracted position is no longer laser light 1 9 1 redirected or deflected by the first directional mirror 9 0 7 to the third and fourth actuators 1 0 0 c, 1 8 0 d or by the second directional mirror 9 0 8 Redirected and deflected to the path of the first and second actuators 180a, 180b, in the second or extended position, the reflective surface of the mirror 103 is arranged in the path of the laser light 191. These mirrors 103 generally face the directional mirrors 907, 908 and are all inclined at an angle of 45 degrees relative to their respective first longitudinal axis 9 1 3 or second longitudinal axis 9 1 4 to reflect relative to This vertical axis guides the laser light 191 through a 90 degree angle. More specifically, each mirror is angled to selectively guide the laser light 191 in a single direction through a separate exit port 9 0 4 on one side of the optical micro switch 9 0 1. The deflected laser light is received by the collimator lens 102. The collimator lens 102 then transmits the laser light to one of the output fibers 97. The groove 9 2 7 is provided in the microchip 902 to carry the optical fiber to the individual outlet port 904. As described above, the micro-actuators 1 8 0 a and 1 8 are arranged in two sets of back-to-back pairs along the individual walkways 911 and 912 in the same manner as the micro-actuators 180 a of the optical micro-switches 830. 0 c. This configuration of the actuators 180a, 180c in the microchip 902 allows the mirrors of the actuators 8 4 4 in the lower and upper channels to be located closer to the individual directional mirrors 907, 908 to reduce the number of micro switches 901. The path lengths of the laser lights 191 and 192 are zero and increase the coupling efficiency of the switch 901. The back-to-back paper scales of the actuators 180a and 180c use the Chinese S-standard (CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm) ~~ _58: ------- ^-I 私 衣 ------ ΐτ ----- (Please read the precautions on the back., f write this page} -----.-^ l · _____ 41 9602 A7 B7 Central Ministry of Economics, Prospective Employees ’Cooperation on Consumer Goods Description of the invention (56) 1 1 The configuration also allows the actuator 6 0 1 to be located in front of the actuator 8 4 1 »Allows 1 1 to further reduce the laser light 1 9 1, 1 9 2 in the micro switch 9 0 1 Path length 〇 I 1 Mirror 9 3 1 will be firmly mounted to the microchip 9 0 2 Q by mounting the bracket formed by etching from the microchip 1 1 9 0 2 at the lower end of the lower channel 9 1 1 first. I 1 mirror 9 3 1 is arranged at the first and second actuators 1 8 0 a, 1 8 0 b Note 1 1 below the mirror 1 0 3 and at the lowest actuator 1 8 0 a Before. Mirror 9 3 1 Item 1 I is tilted at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the longitudinal axis 9 1 3. Seta First and Second Actuating Notebooks I 1 0 0 a% 1 8 0 b The mirrors 1 0 3 are in the retracted position. The light sheet I 1 shoots light 1 9 1 and will be deflected by the mirror 9 3 1 at an angle of 9 0 degrees to leave the first-actuate 1 1 The direction of 1 8 0 a goes up through the collimating lens 1 2 and enters the lion out fiber 9 7 extending through the mt 1 output port 9 0 4. The upper channel 9 before I is ordered by the three actuators 1 8 0 c 1 2 The top bracket 9 4 4 Similar mirror 1 1 I 9 4 3 can be firmly mounted to the microchip 9 0 2. The mirror 9 4 3 operates in the same way as the mirror 9 3 1 in actual 1 1 1 And when the mirrors 1 0 3 of the first and second actuators 1 1 1 0 0 C, 1 8 0 d are in the retracted position, f is used to deflect the laser light 1 9 1 through the individual output ports 9 0 4 ° The mirrors I 1 0 3, 9 3 1 and 9 4 3 deflect the laser light in many parallel directions 1 1 and are therefore unidirectional-so that the laser light 1 9 1 is always switched from the optical micro 1 J switch 9 0 1 of — Side leave 0 Use fixed mount mirror 9 3 1 1 1 9 4 3 In place of — micro-actuators and attached movable mirrors, you can go — I step to reduce the length of the channel 9 1 1 9 1 2 and thus reduce the laser light 1 I 1 9 1% 1 9 2 The path length is as you see. Y Use optical switch 1 1 9 0 1 to selectively guide the laser light 1 9 1 to twelve output fibers 1 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Xiege (210X 297mm). = 9- Printed by A7 _B7_, the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. One of the invention description (57) 9 7. The optical micro switch 9 0 1 is beneficial to reduce the laser light 1 9 1 or the laser light 1 9 2 must travel the maximum path of the optical switch. The directional mirrors 9 0 7, 908 deflect the laser light 19 1 through one of the channels 9 11 and 9 12. The channels 911 and 912 are all longer in length than the channel 157 of the switch 104, the channel 837 of the switch 830 and the channel of the switch 85 1. 8 5 7 short. This reduced path length increases the coupling efficiency of the switch 901. It should be understood that * other embodiments of the optical switch of the present invention may have further subdivided portions of the actuator to minimize the maximum path of laser light 191, 192. An optical micro-switch similar to any of the above-mentioned switches may have an optical component similar to the laser optical component 96 integrated on the microchip of the optical switch described above. The optical microswitch 1051 shown in FIG. 17 is formed of a microchip 1052, and the microchip 1052 is made of any appropriate mechanism such as the switch 104 described above. The micro switch 1 0 5 1 is similar to the above-mentioned switches 104 and 8 30 and uses similar reference numerals to describe similar components of the switches 104, 830, and 1051. The micro switch 1051 includes an inlet port 1053 and a plurality of outlet ports 1054 extending on both sides of the switch 1051. The exit port 1054 will be coupled to a separate output fiber 9 7, a part of which is shown in FIG. 17 * each output fiber 9 7 will extend through the individual exit port 1 0 5 4 to the microchip 1 0 5 Channel or groove in 2 1 0 5 6. The central vertical axis 1 0 6 1 extends from the entrance port 1 0 5 3 and extends along the central channel 1 0 6 2, and the central channel 1 0 6 2 extends longitudinally through the microchip 1 0 5 2橾 牟 (CNS > A4 Washing (210X297mm) _ g〇IJ ~, Yi Yi I, 1T- ^ (Please read the notes on the back first '^ Write this page) 419602 A7 B7 is printed on the center of the industrial and consumer cooperatives. 5. The center of the invention description (58). The first numerous actuators or microactuators 1 8 0 a will be longitudinally spaced along the first dotted line, which is connected to the central axis. 1 0 6 1 parallel and spaced extension. The second plurality of actuators or micro-actuators 1 8 0 b are longitudinally spaced along a second dotted line, and the second dotted line is parallel to the axis 10 6 1 Extended in a spaced manner. The central longitudinal axis 1 0 6 1 will extend between the first actuator 1 8 0 a and the second actuator 1 8. 0 b. 'The first actuator 1 8 0 a and The second actuators 18 0 b are opposed to each other with respect to the longitudinal axis 10 6 1. Although six second actuators 180 b are provided in the switch 1 0 5 1, a single or any plurality of actuators may be provided. Actuator 180. The first plurality of actuators 18 0 a and the second plurality of actuators 1 8 0 b each include a mirror 1 0 3 mounted on a bracket 2 19. The mirrors 1 0 3 are at 45 degrees. The angle is inclined with respect to the longitudinal axis 1 0 6 1 so as to substantially face the entrance port 1 0 5 3 and guide the laser light 1 9 1 with respect to the axis 1 06 1 through an angle of 90 degrees. The redirected laser light 1 9 1 will reflect from each mirror 1 0 3 and leave the individual exit port 1 0 5 along the path extending in front of the actuator 1 0 0. The mirror 1 0 3 can be shuttled by the individual actuator 1 8 0 1 0 9 is driven to move between the first or retracted position and the second or extended position. In the first or retracted position, the mirror is a path away from the laser light 191, and in the second or extended position, The mirror is arranged in the laser light path extending from the entrance port 105. The mirror 106 is fixedly mounted to the microchip 1102 by a bracket 106 at the top of the channel 1062. When the mirror and paper sizes of the first and second actuators 180a and 180b are in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS > A4 size (210 × 297 mm) „61-丨 | IIII II II order — II —1 I line ( Please read it first Note on the side-, V write this page) Printed by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China 11 4 19602, ^ ® A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (59) 1 0 3 0 6 7 is used to deflect the laser light 19 1 through the individual output port 1054. Mirror 1 0 6 7 eliminates the need to use an actuator in optical switch 1 0 51, and by doing so, it can reduce the complexity of switch 1 0 5 1 and reduce the accuracy of laser light passing through switch 1 0 5 1 Straight path. The laser micro-optical mechanism containing the laser micro-optical component 1 0 7 1 will be mounted on the base 2 1 3 at the bottom of the micro-chip 1 0 5 2 before the inlet port 10 5 3. A miniature optical component 1 0 7 1 such as a laser optical component 9 6 includes a collimating optical lens 1 0 7 2 which is practically similar to a collimated light member 2 3 4 from a linearly polarized laser source 2 3 1 and a focusing lens (Not shown) Receives laser light. The module 1 0 7 1 further includes a low-wavelength dispersion leak splitter 1 0 7 3 which is actually similar to the above-mentioned splitter 2 3 2. The module 17 0 1 has a quarter wave plate 1083, an optional half wave plate 1084, a polarization beam splitter 1086, and a light detector 1 087, which are actually similar to the quarter wave plate 2 3 8 described above. The light detector 1087 converts the received light signal into an electric signal. Each element of the miniature optical module 1 0 7 1 can be mounted to the substrate 2 1 3 by an appropriate mechanism. For example, a recessed wall or socket such as socket 1 0 8 8 for aligning the optical lens 1 7 2 • Can be provided in the base 2 1 3 to accommodate each component of the component 1 70 1 It is fixed in the individual concave wall by a suitable mechanism such as an adhesive and / or a spring 1089. A plurality of grooves 1 0 9 1 are provided in the micro wafer 1 0 5 2 so that the laser light passes through the micro optical module 1 0 71. As is known in this art, different designs of wave fel 0 8 3, 1084, polarizing beam splitter 1086 and detector 1087 will be installed by I ^-{Please read the precautions on the back first '' 4Write this page )

*1T 線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉丰(CNS ) A4规格< 2丨0X297公釐) • 62- 經濟部中央橾嗥局貝工消费合作杜印裝 A7 B7 五、發明説明(60 ) 差動訊號以量測反射的雷射光1 9 2之二正交偏振分量中 相對於輸入的雷射光1 9 1之光功率,差動訊號係藉由® 敏地量測MO碟片1 〇 7的個別表面1 0 8處由克爾效應 所感應的偏振旋轉而得的。此差動訊號可由差動放大器 2 3 7處理而以電訊號輸出。 在微晶片1 0 5 2上包含微光組件1 0 7 1可簡化組 件1071與透逆102、鏡103及開關1051的其 它光學元件之對齊。 以精確方式,DR I E蝕刻用於對齊基底上的微型組 件1 0 7 1的元件之基底2 1 3的凹壁或其它特徵。 類似於組件1 0 7 1之微型光組件可設置於此處之其 它開關中且在本發明的範圍內。舉例而言,此組件可設置 於圖1 6中所示的光學微型開關9 0 1之微晶片9 0 2上 »由微晶片1 0 9 7彤成的且實際上同於微型開關9 0 1 之光學微型開關1 0 9 6係顯示於圖1 8中。在圖1 8中 使用類似的參考數字以說明光學微型開關9 0 1及 1 0 9 6的類似元件。微型光組件1 0 7 1係在第二與第 四致動器18 Ob、18 0之間及在連接至第一方向鏡 9 0 7的方向微型致動器6 0 1之前方,安裝於微型晶片 1 0 9 7 上。 光學微型開關1 0 9 6有利於提供輸出光纖9 7及在 微型晶片1 0 9 7上包含微型光組件1 0 7 1,每一输出 光纖均在微晶片1 0 9 7的相同側上離開\微型開關 1 〇 9 6的二通道設計及每一通道中的鏡1 0 3的緊密包 表纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS > A4规格(210X297公釐)_ 1.--------裝-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項,嗓寫本頁) 訂 線 經濟部中央標隼局貝工消费合作社印装 41 9602 .、 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(61 ) 裝,可提供開關1 0 9 6增加的耦合效率° 圖1 9係顯示具有類似於組件1 〇 7 1之另一微型光 學組件之光學微型開關。其中,光學微型開關1 1 0 1係 由微晶片1 1 0 2所形成且在很多方面類似於此處之光學 微型開關901及1096 ’微晶片1102係由諸如參 考光學微型開關1 0 4之上述任何適當機構所製成。實際 上類似於上述鏡1 0 3之第一及第二方向鏡1 1 〇 6、 1 1 0 7係包含於光學開關1 1 〇 1的機構或組件內以交 錯地引導雷射光1 9 1延著微晶片1 1 〇 2向下延伸的通 道1 1 1 1或向上延伸的通道1 1 12。通道1 1 1 1、 1112會延著個別的縱縱向軸1113、1114延伸 ,個別縱向軸1113、 1114係相間隔且以彼此平行 及平行於微晶片1102的側邊之方式延伸。鏡1106 、1107均以45度角相對於個別軸1113、 1 1 1 4傾斜。橫軸1 1 1 6會延伸跨過垂直於軸 1113、 1114之微晶片1102的中心。第一方向 鏡1 1 0 6係附著於致動器6 0 1及以實際同於第一致動 器9 0 1中的方向鏡9 0 7之方式操作。當第一方向鏡 1 1 0 6處於其縮回位置中時,輸入的雷射光1 9 1會嚙 合第二方向鏡1 1 07,第二方向鏡1 107實際上同於 致動器901的第二方向鏡908 ·第二方向鏡1 107 會藉由從微晶片1 1 0 2中蝕刻的托架1 1 1 7而牢固地 安裝至微晶片1 1 〇 2並以同於第二方向鏡9 0 8的方式 操作以將雷射光1 9 1導引經過9 0度角以致於光會延著 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐)· 64 _ -------^¾------tr-----—線 {請先閲讀背面之注意事^1啼寫本頁) 經濟部中央標率局負工消费合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明説明(62 ) 第二路徑行進,第二路徑係延著微晶片1 1 〇 2的第二縱 軸 1 1 1 4。 眾多第一致動器6 0 1係延著下縱軸1 1 1 3的一側 配置且眾多第二致動器6 0 1 b係延著軸1 1丄3的相對 側配置,以致於由第一方向鏡1 1 0 6所偏轉的雷射光 191會於第一與第二致動器601a、601b之間延 伸。第一及第二致動器6 0 1 a、6 0 1 b因而會相對於 縱1 1 13而彼此相對。更特別的是,第一致動器 6 0 1 a包含眾多延著軸1 1 1 3縱向地間隔之致動器。 如同所示,第一致動器6 0 1 a包含延著縱向軸1 1 1 3 縱向地間隔之第一及第二組致動器對1 1 2 3。每一致動 器對1 1 2 3包含延著虛線以側邊接側邊之方式配置的第 一與第二致動器1 1 2 3 a及1 1 2 3 b .,虛線係垂直於 縱軸1 1 1 3延伸。相對於軸1 1 1 3而言,第一致動器 1 123a係配置於第二致動器1 123b之後。如此, 第二致動器1 1 2 3 b延伸件2 1 8會延著致動器 1 1 23a朝向致動器1 1 23b的前方延伸,終止於幾 乎等於第一致動器1 1 2 3 a的延伸件2 1 8的終止點之 點。 第一及第二致動器1123a、1123b的鏡 1 0 3係以彼此緊密接近之方式配置於延著軸1 1 1 3之 縱向間隔的位置處每一第一與第二致動器1 1 2 3 a、 1 123b的鏡103可被致動器從第一或縮回位置移動 至第二或延伸位置,第一或縮回位置係離開雷射光的路徑 --------^------ΐτ------.^ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項τ^寫本頁) 本紙張尺度通用t國國家揉率(CNS ) Α4规格(210Χ297公釐) -65- 41 9602」《 a7 B7 五、發明説明(63 ) ,第二或延伸位置係配置於雷射光1 9 1的路徑中。托架 2 1 9均以4 5度角相對於軸1 1 1 3傾斜以將雷射光 1 9 1導引經過9 0度角。被偏轉的雷射光會向致動器的 前方延伸以致於由準直透鏡1 0 2所接收,準直透鏡 1 0 2接著會將雷射光1 9 1發射至輸出光纖9 7之一。 於微晶片1 1 0 2中設置通道1 1 2 6以接收輸出光纖 9 7。通道1 1 2 6會延伸至設置於微晶片1 1 0 2側邊 上的輸出埠1 1 27。第一致動器60 1 a的第二致動器 對1 1 2 3係配置於第一致動器6 0 1 a的第一致動器對 1 1 2 3之下》 經濟部中央揉牟局貝工消费合作社印装 第二致動器601b包含單一致動器對1 123,單 一致動器對1 1 2 3係配置於與第一致動器6 0 1 a的上 致動器1 1 2 3相關之準直透鏡1 0 2以及與第一致動器 6 0 1 a的下致動器對1 1 2 3有關的準直透鏡之間。準 直透鏡對1 0 2係配置成相對於第二致動器6 0 1 b的鏡 1 0 3以將個別的雷射光1 9 1射入個別的輸出光纖9 7 中β這些光纖9 7會延伸經過個別的通道1 1 2 6而至設 於與對應於第一致動器6 0 1 a的輸出埠1 1 2 7相對的 微晶片1 102側上的個別輸出埠1 127。鏡1 13 1 會藉由從微晶片1 1 0 2中蝕刻的托架1 1 3 2而堅固地 安裝於微晶片1 1 0 2。鏡1 1 3 1係配置於第—及第二 致動器601a、 601b的鏡103之下的下通道 1 1 1 1的尾端處及在第一致動器6 0 1纟的下方致動器 對1 1 2 3的前方處。鏡1 1 3 1係以4 5度角相對於縱 -66- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逋用中國S家樣率(CNS > 格(210X297公簸) 41 9 B 0 A7 B7 五、發明説明(64 ) 軸I 1 1 3傾斜。當第一及第二致動器6 ◦ 1 a、 6 0 1 b的鏡1 〇 3均處於縮回位置時,雷射光1 9 1會 由鏡1 1 3 1偏轉9 0度角以致在離開第一致動器 6 0 1 a的方向上行進經過準直透鏡1 〇 2進入延伸經過 輸出埠1127之输出埠97。 於上縱軸1 1 1 4的一側上之第一致動器6 0 1 a的 上方配置眾多第三致動器6 0 1 c及在上縱軸1 1 1 4的 相對側上的第二致動器6 0 1 b的上方配置眾多第四致動 器601d«第三及第四致動器601c、 601d均包 含具有第一及第二微型致動器1123a、1123b之 單一致動器或微型致動器對1 1 2 3。由第二方向鏡 1 1 0 7偏轉之雷射光1 9 1會於第三與第四致動器 601c、 601d之間延伸,第三與第四致動器 601c、 601d係相對於上縱軸1114而彼此相對 經濟部中央樣準局貝工消费合作社印装 {請先閲讀背面之注意事項 Ϋ寫本頁) 的。鏡1 143係藉由第三致動器601 c前方的上通道 1 1 1 2之頂部處的托架1 1 4 4堅固地安裝至微晶片 1 102。鏡1 143會以實際同於鏡1 13 1的方式操 作並當第一及第二致動器601c、 601d的鏡103 均處於縮回位置中時用以將雷射光191偏轉經過個別的 輸出埠1 1 27。如同所視*可使用光學開關1 101以 選擇性地將雷射光1 9 1導引至十二個輸出光纖9 7之一 0 微型光學組件1 0 7 1係安裝於第一^三致動器 601a、601c之間及在連接至第一方向鏡1106 本紙張尺度遑用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4洗格(210 X 297公釐)_ 6了 419602 A7 _B7_ 五、發明説明(65 ) 的致動器6 0 1之前方的微晶片1 I 〇 2之上。與上述有 關光學開關1 0 5 1中所討論的理由相同’在光學開關 1101上包含微型光學組件1071是有利的。應瞭解 ,可設置諸如微型開關11〇1等光學微型開關而無微型 光學組件1 0 7 1且在本發明的範圍之內。 光學微型開關1 1 0 1的致動器對1 1 2 3可允許上 及下通道11 11、11 12中的鏡.103可放置成延著 個別軸1113、 1114縱向地緊密在一起以減少雷射 光191、 192的對準路徑。堅固地安裝於個別通道 1111、1112的尾端處之鏡1131及1143可 以免除在光學開關1101中需要二個微型致動器之需要 。鏡1131、 1143因而也減少雷射光行經開關 1 1 0 1的對準路徑。 應瞭解,有很多不同的微型致動器以及上述的微型致 動器101、 180及601可用於此處之光學開關。舉 經濟部中央橾準局貞工消费合作社印裝 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項I4寫本頁) 例而言,圖2 0顯示本發明的微型致動器之另一實施例, 其可用於本發明的任可光學微型開關。其中所示之致動器 3 0 1實際上類似於致動器1 8 0。致動器3 0 1中的第 —可移動電極組件2 0 8僅設有第一及第二梳型驅動構件 208a、208b,而第二可移動電極組件209僅設 有第一及第二梳型驅動構件209a、 209b。致動器 3 0 1中的第一固定電極組件2 1 0僅設有第一及第二梳 型驅動構件2 1 0 a、2 1 0 b,而第二固定電極組件 2 3 0僅設有第一及第二梳型驅動構件2 3 0 a、 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4規格(2!〇X2!)7公董)~ ~~ • 〇〇 -* 1T paper size is applicable to China National Kung Fung (CNS) A4 specifications < 2 丨 0X297 mm) • 62- Shellfish consumer cooperation cooperation with Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed A7 B7 V. Description of invention (60) Poor The motion signal is used to measure the optical power of the reflected laser light 1 9 2 bis orthogonal polarization component relative to the input laser light 1 9 1. The differential signal is used to sensitively measure the MO disc 1 〇7 The rotation of the polarization induced by the Kerr effect at 108 points on the individual surface. This differential signal can be processed by a differential amplifier 2 3 7 and output as a telecommunication signal. Including a micro-optic component 1 0 7 1 on the microchip 10 5 2 can simplify the alignment of the component 1071 with other optical elements of the transflective lens 102, the mirror 103, and the switch 1051. In a precise manner, DR IE etches the concave walls or other features of the substrate 2 1 3 used to align the components of the miniature component 1 0 1 on the substrate. Micro-optical modules similar to module 1071 can be provided in other switches herein and are within the scope of the invention. For example, this component may be provided on the microchip 9 0 2 of the optical micro switch 9 0 1 shown in FIG. 16 »formed by the micro chip 1 0 9 7 and actually the same as the micro switch 9 0 1 The optical micro switch 10 0 6 is shown in FIG. 18. Similar reference numerals are used in FIG. 18 to illustrate similar components of the optical microswitches 9 0 1 and 10 9 6. The miniature optical module 1 0 7 1 is installed between the second and fourth actuators 18 Ob and 18 0 and in front of the miniature actuator 6 0 1 which is connected to the first directional mirror 9 0 7. Wafer 1 0 9 7. Optical micro switch 1 0 9 6 is beneficial to provide output optical fiber 9 7 and contains micro optical component 1 0 7 1 on the micro chip 1 0 9 7, each output fiber leaves on the same side of the micro chip 1 0 9 7 \ The two-channel design of the micro switch 1 0096 and the tightly packed paper size of the mirror 103 in each channel are in accordance with the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 1 .----- --- Packing-- (Please read the notes on the back first, and voicing this page) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, 41 9602., Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (61) Provides the increased coupling efficiency of the switch 1 0 9 6 ° Figure 19 shows an optical micro switch with another micro optical component similar to the component 1 107. Among them, the optical micro switch 1 1 0 1 is composed of a microchip 1 1 The optical microswitches 901 and 1096 'microchips 1102 formed and similar in many respects here are made of any suitable mechanism such as the reference optical microswitch 1 104 above. Actually similar to the mirror 1 0 described above. 3 of the first and second directional mirrors 1 1 06, 1 1 0 7 are included in the optical switch 1 1 〇1 The mechanism or component guides the laser light in a staggered manner 1 9 1 runs down the microchip 1 1 〇2 the channel 1 extending downward 1 1 1 1 or the channel 1 1 12 extending upward. Channel 1 1 1 1, 1112 will Extending along the individual longitudinal and longitudinal axes 1113, 1114, the individual longitudinal axes 1113, 1114 are spaced apart and extend parallel to each other and parallel to the sides of the microchip 1102. The mirrors 1106, 1107 are at an angle of 45 degrees relative to the individual The axes 1113, 1 1 1 4 are tilted. The horizontal axis 1 1 1 6 will extend across the center of the microchip 1102 perpendicular to the axes 1113, 1114. The first directional mirror 1 1 0 6 is attached to the actuator 6 0 1 and Operate in the same way as the directional mirror 9 0 7 in the first actuator 9 0 1. When the first directional mirror 1 1 0 6 is in its retracted position, the input laser light 1 9 1 will engage the first The two-way mirror 1 1 07, the second-way mirror 1 107 is actually the same as the second-way mirror 908 of the actuator 901. The second-way mirror 1 107 will use the bracket 1 etched from the microchip 1 1 2 1 1 7 and securely mounted to the microchip 1 1 02 and operated in the same manner as the second directional mirror 9 0 8 to guide the laser light 1 9 1 through a 90 degree angle so that Light will be extended to the size of this paper. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 size (210X297 mm) · 64 _ ---------- ^ ¾ ------ tr ------- line {Please First read the note on the back ^ 1 write this page) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperative V. Invention Description (62) The second path travels along the microchip 1 1 〇 The second vertical axis of 2 is 1 1 1 4. The many first actuators 6 0 1 are arranged along one side of the lower longitudinal axis 1 1 1 3 and the many second actuators 6 0 1 b are arranged along the opposite side of the shaft 1 1 丄 3, so that The laser light 191 deflected by the first directional mirror 1 106 may extend between the first and second actuators 601a and 601b. The first and second actuators 6 0 1 a, 6 0 1 b will therefore face each other with respect to the longitudinal 1 1 13. More specifically, the first actuator 6 0 1 a includes a plurality of actuators spaced longitudinally along the shaft 1 1 1 3. As shown, the first actuator 6 0 1 a includes first and second sets of actuator pairs 1 1 2 3 longitudinally spaced along the longitudinal axis 1 1 1 3. Each actuator pair 1 1 2 3 includes first and second actuators 1 1 2 3 a and 1 1 2 3 b arranged side by side along a dotted line. The dotted line is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis. 1 1 1 3 extended. With respect to the shaft 1 1 1 3, the first actuator 1 123a is disposed after the second actuator 1 123b. In this way, the second actuator 1 1 2 3 b extension 2 1 8 will extend along the actuator 1 1 23a toward the front of the actuator 1 1 23b, ending at almost equal to the first actuator 1 1 2 3 The point at which the extension of a extends 2 1 8. The mirrors 1 0 3 of the first and second actuators 1123a, 1123b are arranged in close proximity to each other at each longitudinally spaced position along the axis 1 1 1 3. Each of the first and second actuators 1 1 The mirror 103 of 2 3 a, 1 123b can be moved by the actuator from the first or retracted position to the second or extended position, and the first or retracted position is the path away from the laser light -------- ^ ------ ΐτ ------. ^ (Please read the note on the back τ ^ first write this page) The paper size is universal t country country kneading rate (CNS) Α4 size (210 × 297 mm) -65 -41 9602 "" a7 B7 5. Description of the invention (63), the second or extended position is arranged in the path of the laser light 191. The brackets 2 1 9 are inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the axis 1 1 1 3 to guide the laser light 1 9 1 through a 90 degree angle. The deflected laser light will extend toward the front of the actuator so that it is received by the collimating lens 10 2, which will then emit the laser light 1 9 1 to one of the output fibers 9 7. A channel 1 1 2 6 is set in the microchip 1 102 to receive the output optical fiber 9 7. The channel 1 1 2 6 will extend to the output port 1 1 27 provided on the side of the microchip 1 10 2. The second actuator pair 1 1 2 3 of the first actuator 60 1 a is arranged below the first actuator pair 1 1 2 3 of the first actuator 6 0 1 a. "Central Ministry of Economic Affairs The second actuator 601b printed by the local shellfish consumer cooperative includes a single actuator pair 1 123, and the single actuator pair 1 1 2 3 is an upper actuator 1 arranged on the first actuator 6 0 1 a. 1 2 3 between the collimating lens 1 2 and the collimating lens 1 1 2 3 associated with the lower actuator pair 1 1 2 3 of the first actuator 6 0 1 a. The collimating lens pair 1 0 2 is arranged relative to the mirror 1 0 3 of the second actuator 6 0 1 b to inject individual laser light 1 9 1 into individual output fibers 9 7. These fibers 9 7 will Extending through individual channels 1 1 2 6 to individual output ports 1 127 provided on the microchip 1 102 side opposite to the output port 1 1 2 7 corresponding to the first actuator 6 0 1 a. The mirror 1 13 1 is firmly mounted on the microchip 1 1 2 by a bracket 1 1 3 2 etched from the microchip 1 1 2. The mirror 1 1 3 1 is actuated at the tail end of the lower channel 1 1 1 1 under the mirror 103 of the first and second actuators 601a and 601b and below the first actuator 6 0 1 纟. Device in front of 1 1 2 3. Mirror 1 1 3 1 is at a 45 degree angle relative to the vertical -66- (Please read the precautions on the back to fill out this page) This paper size uses the Chinese sample rate (CNS > grid (210X297)) 9 B 0 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (64) The axis I 1 1 3 is tilted. When the first and second actuators 6 ◦ 1 a and 6 0 1 b are in the retracted position, Lei The incident light 1 9 1 is deflected by the mirror 1 1 3 1 by a 90 degree angle so as to travel in a direction away from the first actuator 6 0 1 a and pass through the collimating lens 1 0 2 into the output port 97 extending through the output port 1127. A plurality of third actuators 6 0 1 c and a plurality of third actuators 6 0 1 c on the side of the upper vertical axis 1 1 1 4 are disposed above the first actuator 6 0 1 a. A plurality of fourth actuators 601d are arranged above the two actuators 6 0 1 b. The third and fourth actuators 601c and 601d each include a single actuator having first and second miniature actuators 1123a and 1123b. Or micro-actuator pair 1 1 2 3. The laser light 1 9 1 deflected by the second directional mirror 1 1 0 7 will extend between the third and fourth actuators 601c, 601d, and the third and fourth actuators. Actuators 601c, 601d are relative to the upper vertical Axis 1114 is opposite to each other, printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives (please read the precautions on the back first, write this page). The mirror 1 143 is firmly mounted to the microchip 1 102 by a bracket 1 1 4 4 at the top of the upper channel 1 1 1 2 in front of the third actuator 601 c. Mirror 1 143 will actually operate in the same manner as mirror 1 13 1 and will be used to deflect laser light 191 through individual output ports when the mirrors 103 of the first and second actuators 601c, 601d are in the retracted position. 1 1 27. As seen * Optical switch 1 101 can be used to selectively guide laser light 1 9 1 to one of twelve output fibers 9 7 0 micro-optical components 1 0 7 1 series mounted on the first three actuators 601a, 601c and connected to the first directional mirror 1106 This paper size uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 wash case (210 X 297 mm) _ 6 419 602 A7 _B7_ V. The description of the invention (65) Above the microchip 1 IO2 before the actuator 601. For the same reason as discussed above with respect to the optical switch 1051, it is advantageous to include a micro-optical component 1071 on the optical switch 1101. It should be understood that an optical micro-switch such as a micro-switch 110 may be provided without the micro-optical component 1071 and is within the scope of the present invention. The pair of actuators 1 1 0 1 of the optical micro switch 1 1 2 3 can allow the mirrors in the upper and lower channels 11 11, 11 12. The 103 can be placed longitudinally close together along individual axes 1113, 1114 to reduce thunder The alignment paths of the emitted light 191 and 192. Mirrors 1131 and 1143 that are sturdyly mounted at the rear ends of individual channels 1111 and 1112 can eliminate the need for two miniature actuators in the optical switch 1101. The mirrors 1131, 1143 thus also reduce the alignment path of the laser light passing through the switch 1 1 0 1. It should be understood that there are many different micro-actuators, as well as the micro-actuators 101, 180, and 601 described above, which can be used for the optical switches herein. For example, printed by the Zhengong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Quasi-Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the note on the back I4 to write this page). For example, FIG. 20 shows another embodiment of the miniature actuator of the present invention, which can be used for The optical micro switch of the present invention. The actuator 3 0 1 shown therein is actually similar to the actuator 1 0 0. The first movable electrode assembly 208 of the actuator 3 01 is provided with only the first and second comb-type driving members 208a, 208b, and the second movable electrode assembly 209 is provided with only the first and second comb Type driving members 209a, 209b. The first fixed electrode assembly 2 1 0 in the actuator 3 0 1 is provided only with the first and second comb-shaped driving members 2 1 0 a, 2 1 0 b, and the second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 is provided only with The first and second comb-shaped driving members 2 3 0 a, this paper size is free from the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2! 〇X2!) 7 (Dongguan) ~ ~~ • 〇〇-

A A 經濟部中央橾準局貝工消费合作杜印裝 A7 B7 五、發明説明(66 ) 2 3 0 b。致動器3 0 1進一步包含二組加長的電容鉗制 電極或鉗4 2 0及一組相對的電容鉗制電極或鉗4 2 1, 鉗4 2 0係耦合至固定的梳型驅動構件2 1 0 a和 2 3 0 b的梳型驅動條2 2 2之垂直平面,鉗4 2 1係附 著至可移動的梳型驅動構件2 0 8 b及2 0 9 a的梳型驅 動條2 2 1之垂直平面。梳型驅動構件2 1 0 a的背側上 的電極或鉗4 2 0與梳型驅動構件2.0 8 b背側上的電極 或甜4 2 1係可在間隔的位置與另一位置之間移動的,該 間隔的位置係發生於當梳型驅動構件2 0 8 a、2 0 8 b 的梳型驅動指構件2 1 1與梳型驅動構件2 1 0 a、 2 1 0 b的梳型驅動指構件2 1 2處於指狀組合的關係時 ,而在該另一位置中該鉗420、 421係彼此緊密接近 1其係發生於梳型驅動構件208a、208b的梳型驅 動指構件211與梳型驅動構件210a、210b的梳 型驅動指構件2 1 2彼此間隔時•同樣地,梳型驅動構件 2 3 0 b的背側上的電極或鉗4 2 0與梳型驅動構件 2 0 9 a的背側上的電極或鉗4 2 1係可在間隔位置與另 一位置之間移動,該間隔位置係發生於梳型驅動構件 209a、 209b的梳型驅動指構件211與梳型驅動 構件230a、230b的梳型驅動指構件212處於指 狀組合關係時,在另一位置中該鉗420、 421係彼此 緊密接近,其係發生於梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a、2 0 9 b 的梳型驅動指構件2 1 1與梳型驅動構件2 3 0 a、 2 3 0 b的梳型驅動指構件2 1 2彼此間隔時β當在彼此 —U-------裝------訂------線 {锖先聞讀背面之注意事項再、_ r本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4祝格(210X297公釐) -69- 419602 經濟部中央棣率扃負工消资合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明説明(67 ) 如此緊密接近時,鉗420、 421係較佳地間隔約5微 米。 致動器3 0 1的止動機構及鏡監視機構不包含止動件 261及限制器262和263。相反地,致動器301 設有後方止動件2 9 2,後方止動件2 9 2會與托架 2 1 9嚙合以限制梭1 0 9的前向移動。後方止動件 2 9 2係藉由導線或軌線3 0 2而電親合至電氣墊2 9 8 及前方止動件2 9 3係藉由導線或軌線3 0 3而電耦合至 電氣墊2 9 9。墊2 9 8及2 9 9可以電耦合至控制器 1 1 1以允許監視處於縮回及延伸位置中的梭1 0 9。添 加的後方止動件2 9 2及前方止動件2 9 3係用於第二梳 型驅動構件2 0 8 b及第一梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a的每一 尾端。 在致動器3 0 1的操作方法中,在致動器啓動期間, 由控制器111將脈沖電壓交錯地施加至第一及第二固定 電極組件210、 230以使第一及第二可移動的電極組 件208、 209共振而取得梭109的最大振盪位置。 控制器1 1 1包含傳統的機構以便在電極組件2 0 8的半 行程期間將這些脈沖電壓施加於相對的梳型驅動構件之間 ,在電極組件2 0 8的半行程期間,這些相對的梳型驅動 構件係朝向彼此移動以將這些相對的梳型驅動構件的梳型 驅動指構件211、 212驅動至它們的第三或完全指狀 組合的位置。在較佳程度的共振下,將穩^電壓施加於經 過墊2 4 0之固定的第一梳型驅動構牛2 1 0 a上的鉗 本紙張尺度適用t國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐).jq --I-------裝-- (锖先閱讀背面之注意事項-Λ·寫本页) 訂 4 1 9 6 0 2 - 'νί A7 _B7_. 五、發明説明(68) 4 2 0與經過墊2 4 2的可移動第二梳型驅動構件 208b上的鉗421之間以將電極組件208、 209 移動至它們的縮回位置及將鏡1 0 3固持在縮回位置中。 當鏡1 0 3係要保持在延伸位置中時,梳型驅動構件 2 1 0 a及2 0 8 b之間的電壓會首先被釋放,而第一與 第二可移動的電極組件208、 209會在彈簧214的 順向彈簧力之下旋轉朝向它們的第二位置,在第二位置中 鏡1 0 3係處於延伸位置中。然後,可將電壓脈沖施加至 第一與第二梳型驅動構件2 10 a、2 10b的梳型驅動 指構件2 1 2以將個別的第一與第二梳型驅動構件 208a、 208b組件的梳型驅動指構件211朝向彼 此拉近,並因而將可移動的電極組件208、 209的鉗 經濟部中夬樣準局男工消费合作社印装 (讀先聞讀背面之注意事項、t寫本頁) I-*·+ 421朝向固定的電極組件210、230之鉗420移 動*然後,將穩定電壓施加於經過墊2 4 1的固定梳型驅 動構件2 3 0 b上的鉗4 2 0與經過墊2 4 2的可移動梳 型驅動構件2 0 9 a上相對的鉗4 2 1之間以將可移動的 電極組件208、 209及鏡103固持在緊靠止動件 2 9 2的延伸位置中》機械式的止動件2 9 2及2 9 3較 佳地界定延伸與縮回位置並防止可移動的電極組件2 0 8 、209上的鉗421接觸固定電極組件210、 230 上的鉗4 2 0 * 現在參考微型致動器3 0 1,說明本發明的致動器啓 動及操作之另一方法。圖2 1底部的二圖中所顯示的輸 入驅動電壓係由控制器111提供以在圖21中的上方圖 本紙法尺度遴用中國8家標準(CNS ) A4说格(210X297公釐)~~~7Λ 經濟部中央橾準局員工消费合作社印装 4 19602 ^ A7 B7 五、發明説明(69 ) 形中所示的梭1 0 9中造成移動。在開始時I五個4 5伏 特的脈沖均會由控制器111藉由電氣墊240而施加至 第一及第二回歸的梳型驅動構件230a、 230b以造 成致動器或微型馬達1 0 1以增加至1 0 0微米的振幅振 澄。在此啓動程序期間,電氣墊2 4 1及2 4 2係保持固 定於零伏特。在這些4 5伏特脈沖中的最後一個之後,立 即將4 5伏特施加至第一與第二梳型驅動構件2 1 0 a、 2 1 0 b,以致於第一梳型構件2 1 0 a上的鉗或鉗電極 4 2 0靜電力與第二梳型驅動構件2 0 8 b上的鉗或鉗電 極4 2 1之間的靜電力可將梭1 〇 9固持在其縮回位置· 約離圖2 0中所示的其靜止位置1 〇 〇微米》在梭1 〇 9 的完全縮回位置處,鉗420、 421幾乎相隔5微米以 致於所施加的電壓可將梭1 0 9固持在此縮回位置中。一 旦將4 5伏特施加至第一固定的電極組件2 1 0時,則可 移動的電極組件2 0 8之梳型驅動指構件2 1 1及固定的 電極組件210的梳型驅動指構件212約間隔10◦微 米,以致於在它們之間未施加吸引力。 如同圖2 1中可見,施加至固定的電極組件2 1 0之 4 5伏特會在約1 1毫秒時被釋放。接著,當梭1 0 9開 始旋轉朝向其延伸位置時,將4 5伏特的短脈沖施加至固 定的電極組件210>此時,鉗電極420、 421充份 地間隔以致於在它們之間未遭受任何靜電力》相反地,施 加至組件2 1 0之脈沖電壓係用以將電極組件2 0 8的梳 型驅動指構件211驅動朝向相對的電極組件210之梳 !_---------批衣------1T------^ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項' A寫本頁) 本纸張尺度適用中國國家橾丰(CNS ) A4*t格(2丨0><297公釐) -72- 1 9 60Π 4 1 960 2」碥 a? B7 五、發明説明(70 ) 型驅動指構件2 1 2。脈沖電壓會補償半行程期間所遭受 的能量損耗並因而將梭1 0 9旋轉至其完全延伸的位置。 此時將4 5伏特電位施加至第二固定電極組件2 3 0以在 設於第二梳型驅動構件2 3 0 b的背側上之鉗4 2 0與配 置於第二梳型驅動構件2 0 9 b的背側上之相對鉗4 2 1 之間提供靜電力。這些力量會將梭1 0 9固持於其延伸位 置中。在接近1 2毫秒時,梭會從其延伸位置釋放且接著 將4 5伏特脈沖施加至第二固定的電極組件2 3 0以驅動 相對的第二可移動電極組件2 0 9並因而驅動梭1 0 9至 它們的縮回位置,在縮回位置中 > 梭接著會由施加至第一 固定電極組件2 1 0之4 5伏特所固持。應瞭解,在啓動 振盪期間,脈沖電壓會以不同的配置依序地施加至第一固 定電極組件2 1 0及/或第二固定電極組件2 3 0中的一 者或二者以在梭1 〇 9中取得共振。也應瞭解,可由控制 器1 1 1提供非正方形的驅動電壓至本發明的致動器以操 作致動器。 經濟部中夬樣準局貝工消f合作杜印裂 (請先閱婧背面之注意事項—1;寫本頁) i V . 如上所述,使用DRIE技術設計致動器301,允 許不同的結構更高且因而具有比習知技藝中的類似結構更 大的垂直表面積。鉗420、 421因而包括較大的垂直 表面積之固定電極組件210、 230及可移動的電極組 件2 0 8、2 0 9,因此,對於鉗之間的任何給定距離而 言,相對的鉗420、42 1之間可形成比習知技藝還大 的吸引力。 ^ 假使使用梳型驅動指構件211、 212的相互嚙合 本纸張尺度逍用中國8家揉牟(CNS ) A4*t格·( 210X297公釐) • 73· 經濟部中央樣準扃負工消f合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明説明(71 ) 以將固定的電極組件固持於它們的完全偏轉位置時,鉗 420、42 1將可移動電極組件208、209固持於 它們的完全偏轉位置所需之施加至固定的電極組件210 、2 3 0之電壓比施加至固定的電極組件所需之電壓少約 四倍。或者,將全電壓施加至較少數目的梳型驅動指構件 或齒2 1 1、2 1 2以提供相同的鉗制力。 在致動器3 0 1中,電極或鉗電極4 2 0及4 2 1均 包括眾多小的指狀延伸件4 2 2,眾多小的指狀延伸件 4 2 2垂直地延伸至梳型驅動條及延著梳型驅動條的長度 間隔。延伸件4 2 2具有3至2 5微米之長度’較佳的是 從5至1 5微米之範圍及更佳的是約1 3微米》當電極 4 2 0、4 2 1係彼此緊密接近並增加會有指狀電極 4 2 0、4 2 1之間的吸引力施加於上之表面積時,延伸 件或齒218至少部份地齒狀組合。鉗420、 421可 以不具延伸件4 2 2並因而爲平坦的或具有其它形態且在 本發明的範圍之內。 假使可移動的電極組件2 0 8 b由個別的梳型驅動構 件2 10a、208b自縮回位置釋放時,當致動器 101之Q爲14時,可移動的電極組件208、 209 會以每半週期減少1 0%之振幅,圍繞靜態停止位置前後 旋轉。因此,當電極組件208、 209的初始縮回距離 係離靜態位置1 0 0微米時,除非藉由可移動的電極組件 2 0 9及固定的電極組件2 3 0的靜電作角而於系統上執 行增加的工作,否則,相對的鉗電極4 2 1、4 2 0必須 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家揉率(CNS ) A4规格U10>: 297公釐).74 ----------裝-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項-..f寫本頁)A A Shellfish consumer cooperation of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du Yinzhuang A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (66) 2 3 0 b. The actuator 3 0 1 further includes two sets of elongated capacitor clamping electrodes or clamps 4 2 0 and a set of opposite capacitor clamping electrodes or clamps 4 2 1, and the clamp 4 2 0 is coupled to a fixed comb-shaped driving member 2 1 0 a and 2 3 0 b are the vertical planes of the comb drive strips 2 2 2 and the pliers 4 2 1 are attached to the movable comb drive strips 2 0 8 b and 2 0 9 a. Vertical plane. Electrode or forceps on the back side of the comb drive member 2 1 0 a 4 2 0 and 2.0 8 b Comb drive electrode or sweet 4 2 1 series can be moved between spaced positions and another position The position of this interval occurs when the comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 a and 2 0 8 b of the comb-shaped driving member 2 1 1 and the comb-shaped driving member 2 1 0 a, 2 1 0 b When the finger members 2 1 2 are in a combination of fingers, and in this other position, the pliers 420, 421 are in close proximity to each other 1 which is caused by the comb-shaped driving finger members 211 and combs of the comb-shaped driving members 208a, 208b When the comb-type driving finger members 210a, 210b of the comb-type driving finger members 2 1 2 are spaced apart from each other • Similarly, the electrodes or pliers 4 2 0 on the back side of the comb-type driving member 2 3 0 b and the comb-shaped driving member 2 0 9 a The electrodes or pliers 4 2 1 on the back side can be moved between a spaced position and another position, which occurs in the comb-shaped driving finger member 211 and comb-shaped driving member 230a of the comb-shaped driving members 209a, 209b. When the comb-shaped driving finger members 212 and 230b are in a finger-shaped combination, the pliers 420 and 421 are close to each other in another position. Recently, it is a comb-shaped driving finger member 2 1 1 and a comb-shaped driving finger member 2 1 1 and a comb-shaped driving finger member 2 3 0 a, 2 3 0 b of the comb-shaped driving finger member 2 1 9 2 When spaced from each other, β should be on each other—U ------- installation ------ order ------ line {锖 first read the precautions on the back, then _ r this page) this paper Standards apply to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 Zhuge (210X297 mm) -69- 419602 Printed by the Central Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Consumers and Consumers Cooperatives A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (67) When it is so close, the clamp 420, 421 series are preferably spaced about 5 microns apart. The stopper mechanism and the mirror monitoring mechanism of the actuator 301 do not include the stopper 261 and the limiters 262 and 263. In contrast, the actuator 301 is provided with a rear stopper 2 9 2, and the rear stopper 2 9 2 is engaged with the bracket 2 1 9 to restrict the forward movement of the shuttle 10 9. The rear stopper 2 9 2 is electrically coupled to the electrical pad 2 9 8 through a wire or rail 3 0 2 and the front stopper 2 9 3 is electrically coupled to the electrical pad through a wire or rail 3 0 3 Air cushion 2 9 9. The pads 2 9 8 and 2 9 9 may be electrically coupled to the controller 1 1 1 to allow monitoring of the shuttle 1 9 in the retracted and extended positions. The added rear stopper 2 9 2 and the front stopper 2 9 3 are used for each tail end of the second comb-type drive member 2 0 8 b and the first comb-type drive member 2 0 9 a. In the operation method of the actuator 301, during the activation of the actuator, a pulse voltage is staggeredly applied to the first and second fixed electrode assemblies 210, 230 by the controller 111 to make the first and second movable The electrode assemblies 208 and 209 of the magnetic resonance device obtain the maximum oscillation position of the shuttle 109. The controller 1 1 1 contains a conventional mechanism to apply these pulse voltages between the opposing comb-type drive members during the half-stroke of the electrode assembly 208. During the half-stroke of the electrode assembly 208, these opposing combs The type driving members are moved towards each other to drive the comb-shaped driving finger members 211, 212 of these opposing comb-shaped driving members to their third or fully finger-combined position. Under a better degree of resonance, a stable voltage is applied to the fixed first comb drive structure 2 1 0 a through the pad 2 4 0. The paper size of the clamp is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210X297 mm) .jq --I ------- install-- (锖 read the precautions on the back-Λ · write this page) Order 4 1 9 6 0 2-'νί A7 _B7_. V. Invention Explanation (68) Between 4 2 0 and the forceps 421 on the movable second comb drive member 208 b passing through the pad 2 4 2 to move the electrode assemblies 208, 209 to their retracted positions and to hold the mirror 1 0 3 In the retracted position. When the mirror 103 is to be held in the extended position, the voltage between the comb-shaped driving members 2 10 a and 2 0 8 b is first released, and the first and second movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 They will rotate towards their second position under the forward spring force of the spring 214, in which the mirror 103 series is in the extended position. Then, a voltage pulse may be applied to the comb drive finger members 2 1 2 of the first and second comb drive members 2 10 a, 2 10 b to separate the individual first and second comb drive members 208 a, 208 b. The comb-shaped driving finger members 211 are drawn closer to each other, and thus the movable electrode assemblies 208 and 209 are printed in a sample of the quasi-station male laborer's consumer cooperative (read the notes on the back, t-book (Page) I- * · + 421 moves toward the clamp electrode 420 of the fixed electrode assembly 210, 230 * Then, a stable voltage is applied to the clamp-shaped drive member 2 3 0 b passing through the pad 2 4 1 and the clamp 4 2 0 and Pass the movable comb-shaped driving member 2 0 2 of the pad 2 4 2 between the opposing pliers 4 2 1 to hold the movable electrode assembly 208, 209 and the mirror 103 in close proximity to the extension of the stopper 2 9 2 "Position" mechanical stoppers 2 9 2 and 2 9 3 preferably define extended and retracted positions and prevent the movable electrode assemblies 2 0 8, 209 from the clamps 421 on the fixed electrode assemblies 210, 230. Plier 4 2 0 * Now referring to the micro-actuator 3 0 1, another method for activating and operating the actuator of the present invention will be described.The input drive voltages shown in the two figures at the bottom of Figure 2 are provided by the controller 111 to select the eight Chinese standards (CNS) A4 grids (210X297 mm) in the paper method of the upper figure in Figure 21 ~~ ~ 7Λ Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 19602 ^ A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (69) Causes the movement in shuttle 109 shown in the figure. At the beginning, five pulses of 45 volts will be applied by the controller 111 to the first and second returning comb drive members 230a, 230b through the electric pad 240 to cause an actuator or a micromotor 1 0 1 Vibrate with an amplitude increased to 100 microns. During this start-up procedure, the electrical mats 2 4 1 and 2 4 2 remain fixed at zero volts. Immediately after the last of these 45 volt pulses, 45 volts were applied to the first and second comb drive members 2 1 0 a, 2 1 0 b, so that the first comb drive member 2 1 0 a The electrostatic force between the tongs or tongs electrode 4 2 0 and the tongs or tongs electrode 4 2 1 on the second comb drive member 2 0 8 b can hold the shuttle 1 09 in its retracted position. At its resting position of 100 micrometers shown in Fig. 20, at the fully retracted position of the shuttle 109, the clamps 420, 421 are almost 5 micrometers apart, so that the applied voltage can hold the shuttle 109 here In the retracted position. Once 45 volts are applied to the first fixed electrode assembly 210, the comb-shaped driving finger member 21 of the movable electrode assembly 208 and the comb-shaped driving finger member 212 of the fixed electrode assembly 210 are approximately They are spaced 10◦ microns apart so that no attractive force is applied between them. As can be seen in Fig. 21, 45 volts applied to the fixed electrode assembly 21 0 to 50 will be released in about 11 milliseconds. Then, when the shuttle 10 started to rotate toward its extended position, a short pulse of 45 volts was applied to the fixed electrode assembly 210 > At this time, the clamp electrodes 420, 421 were sufficiently spaced so as not to suffer between them. Any electrostatic force "Conversely, the pulse voltage applied to the module 2 10 is used to drive the comb-shaped driving finger member 211 of the electrode assembly 208 toward the comb of the opposite electrode assembly 210! _------- --Batch --------- 1T ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back first 'A write this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Fengfeng (CNS) A4 * t grid (2丨 0 > < 297 mm) -72- 1 9 60Π 4 1 960 2 ″ 碥 a? B7 V. Description of the invention (70) type driving finger member 2 1 2. The pulsed voltage compensates for the energy loss incurred during the half-stroke and thus rotates the shuttle 109 to its fully extended position. At this time, a potential of 45 volts is applied to the second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 to clamp 4 2 0 provided on the back side of the second comb-type drive member 2 3 0 b and the second comb-type drive member 2 An electrostatic force is provided between the opposing pliers 4 2 1 on the back side of 0 9 b. These forces will hold shuttle 10 in its extended position. At approximately 12 milliseconds, the shuttle is released from its extended position and then a 45 volt pulse is applied to the second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 to drive the opposite second movable electrode assembly 2 0 9 and thus drive shuttle 1 0 9 to their retracted position, in which the shuttle will then be held by 4 5 volts applied to the first fixed electrode assembly 2 10 0. It should be understood that, during the start-up oscillation, the pulse voltage is sequentially applied to one or both of the first fixed electrode assembly 2 1 0 and / or the second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 in different configurations in order to shuttle 1 〇9 resonance was obtained. It should also be understood that a non-square driving voltage may be provided by the controller 1 1 1 to the actuator of the present invention to operate the actuator. In the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Ministry of Economics and Industry, cooperation and cooperation (please read the note on the back of Jing—1; write this page) i V. As mentioned above, the actuator 301 is designed using DRIE technology, allowing different The structure is taller and thus has a larger vertical surface area than similar structures in the known art. The clamps 420, 421 thus include fixed electrode assemblies 210, 230 and movable electrode assemblies 2 08, 2 0 9 having a large vertical surface area. Therefore, for any given distance between the clamps, the relative clamp 420 , 42 1 can form a greater attraction than the know-how. ^ Suppose that the comb-shaped driving finger members 211 and 212 are used to mesh with each other. The paper size is used in 8 Chinese companies (CNS) A4 * t grid (210X297 mm). 73. Central Ministry of Economic Affairs f Cooperative prints A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (71) To hold fixed electrode assemblies in their fully deflected positions, the clamps 420, 42 1 are required to hold the movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 in their fully deflected positions The voltage applied to the fixed electrode assembly 210, 230 is about four times less than the voltage required to be applied to the fixed electrode assembly. Alternatively, a full voltage is applied to a smaller number of comb drive finger members or teeth 2 1 1, 2 1 2 to provide the same clamping force. In the actuator 3 01, the electrodes or clamp electrodes 4 2 0 and 4 2 1 each include a plurality of small finger extensions 4 2 2, and the plurality of small finger extensions 4 2 2 extend vertically to the comb drive. The length of the bar and the length of the comb drive bar. The extension piece 4 2 2 has a length of 3 to 25 micrometers. It is preferably in the range of 5 to 15 micrometers and more preferably about 13 micrometers. When the electrodes 4 2 0, 4 2 1 are in close proximity to each other and When increasing the surface area where the attractive force between the finger electrodes 4 2 0 and 4 2 1 is applied, the extension member or tooth 218 is at least partially toothed. The pliers 420, 421 may not have the extensions 4 2 2 and are therefore flat or have other shapes and are within the scope of the present invention. If the movable electrode assembly 2 0 8 b is released by the individual comb drive members 2 10 a and 208 b from the retracted position, when the actuator 101 Q is 14, the movable electrode assembly 208 and 209 will Half cycle reduces amplitude by 10% and rotates back and forth around the static stop position. Therefore, when the initial retracting distance of the electrode assemblies 208 and 209 is 100 micrometers from the static position, unless the electrostatic angle of the movable electrode assembly 209 and the fixed electrode assembly 230 is on the system, Perform the added work, otherwise, the opposite clamp electrodes 4 2 1, 4 2 0 must be used in accordance with the Chinese paper size (CNS) A4 specification U10 >: 297 mm). 74 -------- --Install-- (Please read the precautions on the back-.. f to write this page)

.1T 19602 ^ A7 B7 五、發明説明(72 ) 經濟部中央標率局貝工消费合作社印装 在它們之間呈現充份的吸引力以在其朝向延伸位置移動 90微米之尖峰時捉住可移動的電極組件208、 209 g 在圖2 2所示的另一微型致動器實施例中,其中的致 動器5 0 1係由矽晶圓所形成,矽晶圓具有彈簧2 1 4、 2 1 7,彈簧2 1 4、2 1 7係設計成處於靜態未偏轉條 件下時爲非線性並因而爲“彎曲”條件。致動器5 Ο 1實 際上類似於致動器101、 180及301且使用類似的 參考數字說明致動器1〇1、 180、 301及501的 類似元件。當梭1 0 9處於其縮回與延伸位置之間的中途 之靜態條件時,致動器5 0 1中的每一彈簧2 1 4、 217的彈簧部份224、 225會彼此相向地彎曲。在 本實施例中,當梭1 0 9從其啓始位置移動至其縮回位置 且第二移動電極組件2 0 9與第二固定的電極組件2 3 0 的梳型指構件211、 212靜電地嚙合且接著重疊時, 彈簧2 1 7會從其預彎曲的啓始位置拉伸至線性位置。同 樣地,當梭從其啓始位置移動至其延伸位置且第一可移動 的電極組件2 0 8與第一固定電極組件2 1 0的梳型指構 件211, 212嚙合及接著重叠時•彈簧214會從其 預彎曲的啓始位置拉伸至線性位置。在每一情形中,當這 些彈簧位部份在垂直於個別的梳型驅動指構件211的方 向上變成線性時,個別彈簧的彈簧部份224、 225之 側向剛性會於此方向上增加。以此方式,別彈簧的側向 剛性與由此彈簧施加於此梳型驅動指構件211上的側向 請 先 閲 讀 背 面 之 注 |裝 訂 線 本紙張尺度通用中國國家橾準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐) -75- 經濟部中央標準局貝工消费合作社印装 9 60 2 -4 A7 _B7_ 五、發明説明(73 ) 恢復力均會以梳型驅動指構件211、 212之間的重叠 量之函數增加。因此,當這些梳型驅動指構件2 1 1、 212變成指狀組合時,彈簧214、 217會驅動操作 的梳型驅動組件之梳型驅動指構件2 1 1至相鄰的梳型驅 動指構件2 1 2之間中途的穩定位置。雖然彈簧2 1 4、 2 1 7在一方向上偏轉時會拉直,但是,當梭1 0 9在相 反方向上移動時彈簧部份224、 225會變得從它們的 靜止位置更加地彼此相向彎曲》 第二組可摺的懸臂樑或彈簧561、 562於尺寸及 成份上類似於彈簧2 1 4、2 1 7,它們係設於致動器 501中。每一彈簧561、562會於其第一端563 耦合至基底2 1 3並於其第二端5 6 4耦合至可移動的電 極組件208, 209。每一組彈簧561、 562包含 第一及第二間隔的、平行彈簧部份566、 567,彈簧 部份566、 567係由可摺疊的部份568接合。彈簧 561、 562會經由懸置的堅硬支撐件569而連接於 它們的可摺叠部份5 6 8,懸置的堅硬支撐件5 6 9係於 彈簧561、 562之間延伸並平行於堅硬的支撐件 131。支撐件131、 569會如圖22所示般剛性地 相連接。當在鬆弛位置中時,彈簧561、 562實際上 係垂直於電極組件208、 209的移動方向延伸。更特 別的是,如圖2 2所示,當梭1 0 9處於其縮回與延伸位 置之間的中途之靜態條件時,彈簧部份5έ6、 567會 彼此彎離。當第一可移動的電極組件2 0 8與第一固定的 J.--------^------1Τ------^ (請先閔讀背面之注意事項'-4寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中困國家榡準(CNS ) Α4祝格(210X297公釐) -76- 419602 Α7 Β7 經濟部中夬橾隼馬貝工消费合作社印装 五、發明说明(74 ) 電極組件2 1 0的梳型指構件2 1 1、2 1 2的重叠增加 且梭1 0 9移動至其延伸位置時,彈簧5 6 2係設計成拉 伸至線性位置β同樣地,當第二可移動的電極組件2 0 9 與第二固定的電極組件2 3 0的梳型指構件2 1 1、 2 1 2的重叠增加且梭1 0 9移動至其縮回位匱時,彈簧 5.6 1係設計成拉伸至線性位置。雖然,當在一方向上偏 轉時.,彈簧56 1、562會拉直,但是,當梭109於 相反方向上移動時,彈簧部份566、 567會變得從它 們的靜態位置彼此更加彎離。彈簧561、 562會以同 於關於彈簧214、 217之上述方式操作。 在此第四彈簧實旆例中,在致動器5 0 1的每一端之 —彎曲彈簧對2 1 4或5 6 1及2 1 7或5 6 2較佳地係 爲直的而另一彎曲的彈簧對將在可移動的電極組件2 0 8 、209的偏轉之每一極限處彎曲。爲了維持與二個彎曲 的彈簧2致動器1 0 1相同的順向剛性,致動器5 0 1中 的彈簧214、 217、 561、 562的長度會增加 2 6 % » 圖2 3係顯示諸如致動器5 0 1之四彈簧2 1 4、 217、 561、 562的設計等四種彈簧設計之集體側 向穩定度與彈簧偏轉的關係。圖2 3中所指稱之側向穩定 度係集體側向剛性對集體側向靜電力的微分之比例。在圖 2 3的圖形中•小於一的側向穩定度是不穩定的,而大於 一的側向穩定度値是穩定的。圖2 3中的’「直樑」線係指 諸如上述的致動器10 1中的彈簧2 14、2 17。圖 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4蛛格(210X297公釐) I裝 I 訂 線 (諳先聞讀背面之注意事項再真寫本頁) ____ _- -77- 經濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印製 41 9602 A7 B7 五、發明説明(75 ) 2 3中「預彎曲樑」線係指諸如致動器5 0 1中的彈簧 214、 217、 561、 562之樑。彈簧214、 217、 561、 562係設計成在使所有位置的側穩定 度爲最大之位置處爲直線。較佳的是,側向穩定度任何時 候均具有至少爲十的値。在致動器5 0 1中,每一個別的 彈簧214、 217、 561、 562具有43微米的初 始彎曲,亦即,每一彈簧部份224、 225、 566、 5 6 7的可移動端係與離彈簧部份處於垂直於移動方向的 線性位置中之位置相隔4 3微米,以如圖2 3的圖形中所 示般,將最小側向穩定度升高至1 0。致動器5 0 1會需 要1 5 4伏特以將鏡1 0 3偏離其縮回與延伸位置之間的 中途之啓始或鬆弛位置1 0 0微米的距離。如圖2 3所示 ,當鏡1 0 3從其啓始位置移動約9 0微米時,彈簧 214、 217、 561、 562可提供約100之側向 穩定度,彈簧部份243、 244、 566、 567在鏡 子的此位置處係直的。 以類似於上述致動器10 1、180及30 1之操作 方法,操作致動器5 0 1。相較於指狀組合的梳型驅動指 構件2 1 1、2 1 2之間所產生的靜電側向力,由彈簧 214、 217、 561、 562所提供的穩定側向力可 隨著梳型驅動構件208、 209的側向偏轉而更加快速 地增加在圖2 3所示的實施例中,穩定側向力隨著側向 偏轉增加之速度比靜電側向力至少快十倍。 提供致動器或馬達5 0 1的較佳操作方法,於其中, I-^-------^------ίτ------^ {請先閲讀背面之注意事項再 >本頁) : . ; - I /--. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐) -78- 經濟部中央標窣局貝工消费合作社印氧 !-: η ν ' w *— Α7 _Β7五、發明説明(76 ) ,舉例而言,如圖22所示,當梳型指構件211、 2 1 2係處於它們部份電嚙合之第二位置中時且更佳的是 正好赤裸地電嚙合時,則在任何特別的半行程期間,會將 脈沖電壓施加至操作的梳型驅動組件,亦即梳型驅動組件 ,在梳型驅動組件中,在此半行程期間,其梳型驅動指構 件2 11、2 12會進入指狀組合。由於給定電壓下之梳 型驅動指構件之間的側向不穩定力係與它們嚙合的數量成 比例,所以|在梳型驅動指構件2 1 1、2 1 2的第二與 第三部份之間的第一部份嚙合期間,較佳的是在梳型驅動 指構件完全地嚙合於第三部份中且更佳的是在梳型驅動指 構件2 11、2 12從0%移動至2 5%嚙合之時間週期 期間,施加電壓時,可使側向不穩定力最小。 前向或延伸運動限制機構或限制器5 7 1及後向或縮 回運動限制機構或限制器係設於可移動的電極組件2 0 8 、209的延伸件218之上,以便當電極組件208、 2 0 9處於它們的延伸與縮回位置中時可嚙合固定止動件 573。止動件573會電耦合至墊264且因而電耦合 至控制器1 1 1,以致於控制器能監視致動器5 0 1的位 置且因而監視開關1 0 4的條件。應瞭解’致動器5 0 1 可設有關於致動器3 0 1所揭示的型式之鉗4 2 0、 421及/或有關致動器101、180及301之上述 特徵且在本發明的範圍之內。 圖2 4係說明本發明的致動器之另一^施例。在此較 佳實施例中,提供致動器6 0 2,其具有單一的固定電極 l·--------^------1T------線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項一 1--^¾本頁) ._K _' 本紙張又度適用中困困家標準(CNS ) A4说格(210XM7公釐〉-79- 經濟部t央橾率局負工消费合作社印1t U 9 60 2 ·4 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(77 ) 組件2 1 0,單一的固定電極組件2 1 0係用以吸引單一 的可移動電極組件2 0 8。致動器6 0 2與上述的致動器 1 0 1及5 0 1具有類似性且使用類似的參考數字以說明 致動器101、 501及602的類似元件。可移動的電 極組件2 0 8僅由第一梳型驅動構件2 0 8 a構成且固定 的電極組件2 1 0僅由第一梳型驅動構件2 1 0 a構成。 提供相關於致動器5 0 1之圖2 2中所示的彈簧2 1 4、 562。彈簧214、 562係藉由實際上類似於上述的 支撐件1 3 1及5 6 9之懸置的堅硬支撐構件6 0 6而相 互連接。由於僅當電極組件2 0 8在此方向上移動且梳型 驅動指構件2 1 1、2 1 2變成指狀組合時,才會在固定 的2 1 0及可移動的2 0 8電極組件的梳型驅動指構件 211, 212之間產生屈曲側向力,所以,致動器 6 0 2的單一固定電極設計僅在鏡1 0 3的延伸位置中呈 現側向不穩定。結果,需要僅當可移動的電極組件2 0 8 處於延伸位置中時才拉直的預彎曲彈簧2 14、5 6 2。 鉗電極4 2 0會設於梳型驅動構件2 1 0 a的梳型驅動條 2 2 2之上且相對的鉗4 2 1會垂直於電極組件2 0 8的 移動方向延伸並藉由構架框部份216而剛性地連接至梳 型驅動構件208a♦致動器602的可移動構件或梭 607包含第一梳型驅動構件208a、鉗電極421、 構架216、延伸件218及托架219。 在圖2 4中所示的致動器6 0 2的舉例說明之實施例 中,彈簧214、 562會預彎曲46微米。梳齒之間的 !„--------裝------訂------線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項 嗔寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國理家標準(CNS ) A4说格(210X297公釐) -80-.1T 19602 ^ A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (72) The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed on them showed sufficient attractiveness to catch the 90% when it moved the peak of 90 microns towards the extended position. Moving electrode assembly 208, 209 g In another micro-actuator embodiment shown in FIG. 2, the actuator 5 0 1 is formed by a silicon wafer, and the silicon wafer has a spring 2 1 4, The 2 1 7 and 2 1 4 and 2 1 7 series are designed to be non-linear and therefore "bent" when in a static undeflected condition. Actuator 5 0 1 is actually similar to actuators 101, 180, and 301 and similar reference numerals are used to describe similar elements of actuators 101, 180, 301, and 501. When the shuttle 10 9 is in a static condition halfway between its retracted and extended positions, the spring portions 224, 225 of each of the springs 2 1 4, 217 in the actuator 50 1 will bend toward each other. In this embodiment, when the shuttle 1 10 moves from its starting position to its retracted position and the comb-shaped finger members 211, 212 of the second moving electrode assembly 2 0 9 and the second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 are electrostatically charged, When the ground engages and then overlaps, the spring 2 1 7 stretches from its pre-curved starting position to a linear position. Similarly, when the shuttle moves from its starting position to its extended position and the comb-shaped finger members 211, 212 of the first movable electrode assembly 2 0 8 and the first fixed electrode assembly 2 10 engage and then overlap • the spring 214 stretches from its pre-curved starting position to a linear position. In each case, when these spring position portions become linear in a direction perpendicular to the individual comb-shaped driving finger member 211, the lateral rigidity of the spring portions 224, 225 of the individual springs increases in this direction. In this way, the lateral rigidity of the spring and the lateral direction exerted by this spring on the comb-shaped driving finger member 211 should be read on the back side of the note | gutter. The paper size is common Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210X297 mm) -75- Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 9 60 2 -4 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (73) The restoring force will be driven by the overlap between the finger members 211 and 212 Function increases. Therefore, when these comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 1, 212 become finger-shaped combinations, the springs 214, 217 drive the comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 1 of the comb-shaped driving assembly to the adjacent comb-shaped driving finger members Stable position halfway between 2 1 2. Although the springs 2 1 4 and 2 1 7 straighten when deflected in one direction, the spring portions 224 and 225 become more bent toward each other from their rest positions when the shuttle 1 9 moves in the opposite direction 》 The second group of foldable cantilever beams or springs 561, 562 are similar in size and composition to the springs 2 1 4 and 2 1 7 and are located in the actuator 501. Each spring 561, 562 is coupled at its first end 563 to the substrate 2 1 3 and at its second end 5 6 4 to the movable electrode assembly 208, 209. Each set of springs 561, 562 includes first and second spaced parallel spring portions 566, 567, and the spring portions 566, 567 are joined by a foldable portion 568. The springs 561, 562 are connected to their foldable parts 5 6 8 via a suspended rigid support 569. The suspended rigid support 5 6 9 extends between the springs 561, 562 and is parallel to the rigid Support 131. The supporting members 131 and 569 are rigidly connected as shown in FIG. 22. When in the relaxed position, the springs 561, 562 actually extend perpendicular to the direction of movement of the electrode assemblies 208, 209. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, when the shuttle 109 is in a static condition halfway between its retracted and extended positions, the spring portions 5 and 6, 567 will bend away from each other. When the first movable electrode assembly 208 and the first fixed J .-------- ^ ------ 1T ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back first '-4 write this page) This paper size is applicable to the National Standards for Distressed Countries (CNS) Α4 Zhuge (210X297 mm) -76- 419602 Α7 Β7 Printed by the China Mabei Workers Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (74) When the overlapping of the comb-shaped finger members 2 1 1 and 2 1 2 of the electrode assembly 2 1 0 increases and the shuttle 1 9 moves to its extended position, the spring 5 6 2 is designed to stretch to the linear position β. When the overlap of the second movable electrode assembly 2 0 9 and the comb-shaped finger member 2 1 1, 2 1 2 of the second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 increases and the shuttle 1 9 moves to its retracted position The spring 5.6 1 is designed to stretch to a linear position. Although, when deflected in one direction, the springs 56 1, 562 will straighten, but when the shuttle 109 moves in the opposite direction, the spring portions 566, 567 will become more bent away from each other from their static positions. The springs 561, 562 operate in the same manner as described above with respect to the springs 214, 217. In this fourth example of the spring, the bending spring pair 2 1 4 or 5 6 1 and 2 1 7 or 5 6 2 at each end of the actuator 5 0 1 is preferably straight and the other The curved pair of springs will bend at each limit of the deflection of the movable electrode assemblies 2008, 209. In order to maintain the same forward rigidity as the two curved spring 2 actuators 1 0 1, the length of the springs 214, 217, 561, and 562 in the actuator 5 0 1 will increase by 26% » The relationship between collective lateral stability and spring deflection of four spring designs, such as the design of four springs 2 1 4, 217, 561, and 562 of the actuator 5 0 1. The lateral stability referred to in Figure 23 is the ratio of the differential of the collective lateral rigidity to the collective lateral electrostatic force. In the graph of Figure 23, the lateral stability of less than one is unstable, while the lateral stability of more than one is stable. The "" straight beam "line in Fig. 23 refers to springs 2 14, 2 17 in the actuator 101 such as described above. The paper scale is free to use Chinese National Standards (CNS) Α4 spider grid (210X297 mm) I installed I Thread (I read the precautions on the back first and then write this page) ____ _- -77- Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperatives 41 9602 A7 B7 5. The “pre-curved beam” line in the description of the invention (75) 2 3 refers to beams such as the springs 214, 217, 561, and 562 in the actuator 501. The springs 214, 217, 561, and 562 are designed to be straight at a position where the lateral stability is maximized at all positions. Preferably, the lateral stability has at least ten degrees at any time. In actuator 51, each individual spring 214, 217, 561, 562 has an initial bend of 43 microns, that is, a movable end system of each spring portion 224, 225, 566, 5 67 The distance from the spring part in a linear position perpendicular to the direction of movement is 4 3 micrometers, as shown in the graph of FIG. 23, to increase the minimum lateral stability to 10. The actuator 501 would require 154 volts to offset the mirror 103 from the midway between its retracted and extended position by a distance of 100 microns. As shown in FIG. 23, when the mirror 103 moves about 90 microns from its starting position, the springs 214, 217, 561, and 562 can provide a lateral stability of about 100, and the spring portions 243, 244, and 566 , 567 is straight at this position on the mirror. The actuator 50 1 is operated in a similar manner to the above-mentioned actuators 10 1, 180, and 30 1. Compared with the electrostatic lateral force generated between the comb-shaped finger-like finger members 2 1 1 and 2 1 2, the stable lateral force provided by the springs 214, 217, 561, and 562 can follow the comb shape. The lateral deflection of the driving members 208, 209 increases more rapidly. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 23, the speed of the stable lateral force increasing with the lateral deflection is at least ten times faster than the electrostatic lateral force. Provide a better operating method of actuator or motor 501, in which I-^ ------- ^ ------ ίτ ------ ^ {Please read the note on the back first Matters > this page):.;-I /-. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -78- Printed oxygen by the Shell Standard Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs!- : Η ν 'w * — Α7 _Β7 V. Description of the invention (76), for example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the comb-shaped finger members 211, 2 1 2 are in the second position where they are partly electrically engaged And more preferably when just nakedly engaging, then during any particular half-stroke, a pulse voltage will be applied to the operating comb drive assembly, that is, the comb drive assembly. In the comb drive assembly, here During the half stroke, the comb-shaped driving finger members 2 11, 2 12 will enter the finger combination. Since the lateral instability forces between the comb drive finger members at a given voltage are proportional to the number of their engagement, so in the second and third parts of the comb drive finger members 2 1 1, 2 1 2 During the engagement of the first part between the parts, it is preferred that the comb drive finger member is fully engaged in the third part and more preferably that the comb drive finger member 2 11, 2 12 is moved from 0% During a time period of up to 25% engagement, the lateral instability force is minimized when a voltage is applied. The forward or extended movement restricting mechanism or limiter 5 7 1 and the backward or retracting movement restricting mechanism or limiter are provided on the extension members 218 of the movable electrode assembly 208 and 209 so that the electrode assembly 208 209 can engage the fixed stop 573 when in their extended and retracted positions. The stopper 573 is electrically coupled to the pad 264 and thus to the controller 1 1 1 so that the controller can monitor the position of the actuator 5 0 1 and thus the condition of the switch 104. It should be understood that the 'actuator 5 0 1 may be provided with pliers 4 2 0, 421 and / or related to the above-mentioned features of the actuators 101, 180, and 301 as disclosed in relation to the actuator 3 0 1 and Within range. Fig. 24 illustrates another embodiment of the actuator of the present invention. In this preferred embodiment, an actuator 602 is provided, which has a single fixed electrode l · -------- ^ ------ 1T ------ line (please first Read the note on the back 1-^ ¾ this page) ._K _ 'This paper is again applicable to the standard for the homeless (CNS) A4 (210XM7 mm> -79- Ministry of Economic Affairs) Industrial and consumer cooperative printing 1t U 9 60 2 · 4 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (77) Component 2 1 0, single fixed electrode component 2 1 0 is used to attract a single movable electrode component 2 0 8. Actuator 6 0 2 is similar to the actuators 1 0 1 and 5 0 1 described above and uses similar reference numerals to describe similar elements of the actuators 101, 501, and 602. The movable electrode assembly 2 0 8 A comb-shaped drive member 2 0 8 a constitutes and fixes the electrode assembly 2 1 0 composed of only the first comb-shaped drive member 2 1 0 a. A spring shown in FIG. 2 2 corresponding to the actuator 5 0 1 is provided. 2 1 4, 562. The springs 214, 562 are connected to each other by a rigid supporting member 6 0 6 which is actually similar to the above-mentioned supporting members 1 3 1 and 5 6 9. Since only the electrode assembly 2 0 8 Move in this direction and comb When the driving finger members 2 1 1 and 2 1 2 become finger combinations, a buckling lateral force is generated between the fixed 2 10 and movable comb driving finger members 211 and 212 of the 208 electrode assembly. Therefore, the single fixed electrode design of the actuator 602 exhibits lateral instability only in the extended position of the mirror 103. As a result, it is necessary to straighten only when the movable electrode assembly 208 is in the extended position. Pre-bent spring 2 14, 5 6 2. The clamp electrode 4 2 0 will be placed on the comb drive member 2 1 0 a of the comb drive bar 2 2 2 and the opposing clamp 4 2 1 will be perpendicular to the electrode assembly 2 The moving direction of 0.8 extends and is rigidly connected to the comb drive member 208a by the frame frame portion 216. The movable member or shuttle 607 of the actuator 602 includes a first comb drive member 208a, a clamp electrode 421, and a frame 216, extension 218, and bracket 219. In the illustrated embodiment of the actuator 602 shown in Fig. 24, the springs 214, 562 are pre-bent by 46 microns. Between the comb teeth! ------- Installation ------ Order ------ line (please read the precautions on the reverse side and write this page) This paper size is applicable to the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 said grid (210X297 mm) -80-

經濟部中央橾準局負工消贤合作杜印製 五、發明说明(78 ) 間隔較佳地爲18微米。鉗420、 421的平面較佳地 爲800微米長及80微米高。當鉗電極421依靠前向 止動件2 9 2及後向止動件6 8 0與止動件6 8 2嚙合時 ,鉗420、 421係相隔5微米。雖然圖24中所示的 鉗4 2 0、4 2 1係平坦的,但應瞭解它們也可能包含如 圖2 0所示之延伸件4 2 2。 與圖2 0中的致動器3 0 1相反地,圖2 4的致動器 6 0 2使用非對稱設計,於其中*延伸位移有點大於縮回 位移。舉例而言,圖2 4中所示的致動器6 0 2會延伸 1 1 2微米的距離及縮回1 0 0微米的距離。起初,將電 壓施加至固定的電極2 1 0以在梳型驅動指構件2 1 2、 2 1 1的靜電吸引力之下將可移動的電極部份2 0 8偏轉 及固持至延伸位置。在切換操作期間,需要將鏡1 0 3退 出雷射光1 9 1的路徑,固定的電極組件2 1 0上的靜電 電壓會被釋放且可移動的電極組件2 0 8與梭6 0 7會旋 轉朝向其由鉗4 2 0、4 2 1之間的靜電力所固持之縮回 位置。彈簧214、 562會於梭607從其延伸位置向 後旋轉期間於其上提供初始的機械縮回力。在圖2 4中所 示的致動器6 0 2之舉例說明的實施例中,可移動的電極 組件2 0 9會被固持於離靜止位置1 1 2微米之延伸位置 1 1 2處,然後被釋放,組件2 0 9會旋轉1 0 〇微米通 過其啓始位置朝向縮回位置且由鉗420捉住。 圖2 5中所示的圖形係說明致動器6 b 2之厠向穩定 度’側向穩定度係爲偏轉的函數,而圖2 6中所示的圖形 ]-------:-I^------.訂------.^ (请先閱讀背面之注意事項,寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家棣準(CNS ) A4蛛格(2ΪΟΧ297公釐) • 81 · I 960 2 4 Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(79 ) 係說明致動器602中的鉗電極420、42 1之鉗制力 ,此鉗制力係爲鉗電極之間的分離距離之函數。如同這些 圖形中所示般,致動器6 0 2在1 9 6伏特及最小的安全 邊限下向後偏轉1 1 2微米。在合理的Q之下,舉例而言 爲14,則即使在無鉗420、421的拉動之下,移動 電極部份2 0 8仍可一路旋轉至後向止動件6 8 0。因此 ,在無須輸入額外的功至致動器之情形下,致動器6 0 2 之較大順向延伸距離可允許梭6 0 7及鏡1 3 0向後旋轉 至完全縮回的位匱。如同圖2 6中標示「所需的鉗制力」 的水平實線所示般,在縮回位置中,懸置件或彈簧2 1 4 、5 6 2會施加9 7 u N的拉力於可移動的電極部份 2 0 8。當如同圖2 6中標示「平行板鉗」之虛線所示般 ,鉗與鉗相間隔1 5微米時,此力量可由鉗4 2 0、 4 2 1克服。如同圖2 6中所示,當鉗與鉗之間的距離由 止動件680及292保持在五微米時,鉗420、 經濟部中央橾準而系工消资合作社印裝 (讀先聞讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 4 2 1的真正固持力係9 00 uN。止動件6 8 0及 2 9 2係用以防止鉗電極4 2 0、4 2 1之間不需要的接 觸。 上述的較佳實施例使用單側固定電極設計,但可允許 從可移動電極組件2 0 8的啓始或中途位置完全移動+ / _ 1 0 0微米之範圍。此外,較佳實施例之縮減的面積及 質量可降低成本及切換速度》致動器6 0 2的縮短.長度可 如下述般地允許複數個致動器中的二個以_恤接側之方式配 置β 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家揉率(CNS) Α4規格< 2Ι0Χ297公釐) -82- 9 60 2 4 A7 B7_ 五、發明説明(80 ) 在切換應用中,獨立地確認鏡1 0 3的位置是重要的 。在微致動器6 0 2中,增加的電極可併入於機械止動件 中。當致動器6 0 2中的鏡1 0 3處於延伸位置時,可移 動電極部份2 0 8的順向限制器6 8 1會與止動件6 8 2 嚙合及電接觸。止動件6 8 2係經由導線6 8 6電耦合至 .電氣墊6 8 7,電氣墊6 8 7可電耦合至控制器1 1 1。 同樣地,當鏡1 0 3被固持於縮回位.置中時,後向限制器 6 8 0會與止動件嚙合及電接觸。因此,可移動電極組件 2 0 8及鏡1 0 3的位置可由控制器1 1 1以電方式感測 以確認致動器6 0 2的狀態及任何併入於複數個致動器 6 0 2中的一個或更多個中之任何開關或其它裝置。限制 器680、681及止動件682係包含於致動器602 之止動機構中" 經濟部中央橾窣局貝工消费合作社印装 , {諳先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 圖2 4中所示的致動器6 0 2可擴展成包含多於一組 協力的相互嚙合梳型驅動構件208a、210a。舉例 而言,圖2 7係顯示實際上類似於致動器6 0 2之非對稱 致動器6 0 3。類似的參考數字係用以說明致動器6 0 2 及6 0 3之類似元件。致動器6 0 3的可移動電極組件 2 〇 8具有四個縱向間隔的梳型驅動構件2 0 8 a。致動 器6 0 3的固定電極組件2 1 0具有四個縱向間隔的梳型 驅動構件2 1 0 a。致動器6 0 3具有四組協力的鉗電極 420、421。當電極組件208、210的數目增加 時,可縮減每一組電極組件2 0 8、2 Ί 0的寬度並因而 縮減延伸或縮回鏡1 0 3時所需的任何給定力量下之致動 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4规格(210X29?公釐).83- 419602 4 A7 B7 五、發明説明(81 ) 器603的寬度。因此’當雷射光191、192向下移 動至此處所述的光學微型開關的中心時’其所必須保持的 光學對準距離,可以減少s 圖28—29係顯示致動器或微型致動器701’其 具有圖2 2所示的致動器5 0 1的一些元件’但僅具有單 一固定的電極組件及單一的可移動電極組件*如圖2 4中 所示的致動器6 0 2般。使用類似的參考數字以說明致動 器701、501及602中類似的元件。致動器701 的可移動電極組件2 0 9僅由梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a構成 且固定的電極組件2 3 0僅由梳型驅動構件2 3 0 a構成 。致動器501的懸臂樑彈簧561、217係設於致動 器70 1中,而彈簧56 1、2 1 7係藉由實際上類似於 上述的支撐件6 0 6之懸置的堅硬支撐件7 1 1而相互連 接。如同致動器602般,致動器701僅在可移動電極 組件2 0 9的一極限位置中呈現側向不穩定。特別是,僅 當可移動的組件2 0 9被移動至梳型驅動指構件2 1 1、 經濟部中央棣率局負工消f合作社印裝 ί请先閲讀背面之注意事項再本頁) 2 1 2會變成指狀組合之縮回位置中時,才會在可移動的 電極組件2 0 9的梳型驅動指構件2 1 1與固定的電極組 件2 3 0的梳型驅動指構件2 1 2之間產生側向力。當可 移動的電極組件2 0 9係處於其縮回位置中時,彈簧 5 6 1、2 1 7的個別彈簧部份566、567及224 、2 2 5會拉伸至致動器7 0 1於橫向上具有最大剛性之 線性位置。鉗電極4 2 0係設於固定的驅梳型驅動構件 2 3 0 a之梳型驅動條2 2 2上。相對的鉗4 2 1會垂直 本紙張尺度適用中國困家橾率(CNS )八4*1格(210X297公釐) -84- 4 〇Du printed by the Central Bureau of Standards and Technology, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Du Duxian, and V. Inventive Note (78) The interval is preferably 18 microns. The planes of the jaws 420, 421 are preferably 800 micrometers long and 80 micrometers high. When the jaw electrode 421 relies on the forward stopper 2 92 and the rearward stopper 6 80 and the stopper 6 8 2 are engaged, the jaws 420 and 421 are separated by 5 micrometers. Although the pliers 4 2 0, 4 2 1 shown in FIG. 24 are flat, it should be understood that they may also include an extension 4 2 2 as shown in FIG. 20. In contrast to the actuator 3 0 1 in FIG. 20, the actuator 6 0 2 in FIG. 2 uses an asymmetrical design, in which the * extended displacement is a little larger than the retracted displacement. For example, the actuator 602 shown in FIG. 24 will extend a distance of 112 micrometers and retract a distance of 100 micrometers. Initially, a voltage was applied to the fixed electrode 2 10 to deflect and hold the movable electrode portion 2 08 to the extended position under the electrostatic attraction of the comb-shaped driving finger member 2 1 2, 2 1 1. During the switching operation, the mirror 1 0 3 needs to be exited from the path of the laser light 1 9 1. The electrostatic voltage on the fixed electrode assembly 2 1 0 will be released and the movable electrode assembly 2 0 8 and shuttle 6 0 7 will rotate. Towards its retracted position held by the electrostatic force between the pliers 4 2 0, 4 2 1. The springs 214, 562 provide an initial mechanical retraction force on the shuttle 607 during its backward rotation from its extended position. In the illustrated embodiment of the actuator 6 0 2 shown in FIG. 24, the movable electrode assembly 2 0 9 is held at the extended position 1 1 2 1 μm from the rest position, and then When released, the module 209 will rotate 100 micrometers through its starting position toward the retracted position and be captured by the forceps 420. The graph shown in Figure 25 illustrates the toilet's lateral stability of the actuator 6 b 2 'The lateral stability is a function of deflection, while the graph shown in Figure 2 6] -------: -I ^ ------. Order ------. ^ (Please read the notes on the back first, write this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 spider grid (2Ϊ〇 × 297 mm) ) • 81 · I 960 2 4 Α7 Β7 5. The invention description (79) refers to the clamping force of the clamp electrodes 420, 42 1 in the actuator 602, and this clamping force is a function of the separation distance between the clamp electrodes. As shown in these figures, the actuator 602 is deflected backwards 1 12 microns at 196 volts and a minimum safety margin. Under a reasonable Q, for example, 14, even under the pull of the pliers 420, 421, the moving electrode part 208 can still be rotated all the way to the backward stopper 680. Therefore, without the need to input additional work to the actuator, the larger forward extension distance of the actuator 602 allows the shuttle 607 and the mirror 130 to rotate backward to a fully retracted position. As shown by the horizontal solid line labeled "Required Clamping Force" in Figure 26, in the retracted position, the suspension or spring 2 1 4, 5 6 2 will apply a tensile force of 9 7 u N to the movable The electrode part 2 0 8. This force can be overcome by the pliers 4 2 0, 4 2 1 when the pliers and the pliers are spaced 15 μm apart, as shown by the dashed line labeled “parallel wrench” in FIG. 26. As shown in Figure 2-6, when the distance between the pliers and the pliers is maintained at five micrometers by the stoppers 680 and 292, the pliers 420 and the central ministry of the Ministry of Economic Affairs are approved and printed by the Industrial and Commercial Cooperatives. (Notes on the reverse side of this page) 4 2 1 The true holding force is 9 00 uN. The stoppers 6 8 0 and 2 9 2 are used to prevent unnecessary contact between the clamp electrodes 4 2 0 and 4 2 1. The above-mentioned preferred embodiment uses a single-sided fixed electrode design, but may allow full movement from the starting or midway position of the movable electrode assembly 208 to a range of +/− 100 μm. In addition, the reduced area and mass of the preferred embodiment can reduce cost and switching speed. The shortening of the actuator 602. The length can allow two of the multiple actuators to Method configuration β This paper size uses China National Kneading Ratio (CNS) Α4 size < 2Ι0 × 297 mm) -82- 9 60 2 4 A7 B7_ V. Description of the invention (80) In the switching application, independently confirm the mirror 1 0 The position of 3 is important. In the micro-actuator 602, an additional electrode may be incorporated into the mechanical stop. When the mirror 103 in the actuator 6 02 is in the extended position, the forward limiter 6 8 1 of the movable electrode part 2 0 8 will be engaged with and electrically contact the stopper 6 8 2. The stopper 6 8 2 is electrically coupled to the .6 electric pad 6 8 7 through the wire 6 8 6, and the electric pad 6 8 7 can be electrically coupled to the controller 1 1 1. Similarly, when the mirror 103 is held in the retracted position and centered, the backward limiter 680 will engage and make electrical contact with the stopper. Therefore, the positions of the movable electrode assembly 208 and the mirror 10 3 can be electrically sensed by the controller 1 1 1 to confirm the state of the actuator 6 0 2 and any incorporated in the plurality of actuators 6 0 2 Any one or more of the switches or other devices. The limiters 680, 681 and the stopper 682 are included in the stopper mechanism of the actuator 602 " Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, (谙 Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The actuator 602 shown in FIG. 24 is expandable to include more than one set of interengaging comb drive members 208a, 210a. For example, Fig. 27 shows an asymmetric actuator 603 which is actually similar to actuator 602. Similar reference numerals are used to describe similar elements of the actuators 602 and 603. The movable electrode assembly 208 of the actuator 603 has four longitudinally-spaced comb-shaped drive members 208a. The fixed electrode assembly 2 1 0 of the actuator 6 0 3 has four longitudinally-spaced comb-shaped driving members 2 1 0 a. The actuator 603 has four sets of cooperating clamp electrodes 420, 421. As the number of electrode assemblies 208, 210 increases, the width of each group of electrode assemblies 208, 2 Ί 0 can be reduced and thus actuation under any given force required to extend or retract the mirror 103 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X29? Mm). 83- 419602 4 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (81) The width of the device 603. Therefore, when the laser light 191, 192 moves down to the center of the optical microswitch described here, the optical alignment distance that it must maintain can reduce s. Figure 28-29 series display actuators or microactuators 701 'It has some elements of the actuator 5 0 1 shown in Fig. 2' but only has a single fixed electrode assembly and a single movable electrode assembly * Actuator 6 0 2 as shown in Fig. 2 4 Like. Similar reference numbers are used to describe similar elements in actuators 701, 501, and 602. The movable electrode assembly 2 0 9 of the actuator 701 is composed only of the comb-shaped driving member 2 9 a and the fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 is composed of only the comb-shaped driving member 2 3 0 a. The cantilever beam springs 561, 217 of the actuator 501 are provided in the actuator 70 1, and the springs 56 1, 2 1 7 are provided by a rigid support member suspended similarly to the support member 6 0 6 described above. 7 1 1 and each other. Like the actuator 602, the actuator 701 exhibits lateral instability only in one extreme position of the movable electrode assembly 209. In particular, only when the movable component 2 0 9 is moved to the comb-shaped driving finger member 2 1 1. Printed by the cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs f Cooperatives (please read the precautions on the back before this page) 1 2 will be in the retracted position of the finger combination, then it will be in the movable electrode assembly 2 0 9 comb drive finger member 2 1 1 and the fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 comb drive finger member 2 1 A lateral force is generated between two. When the movable electrode assembly 209 is in its retracted position, the individual spring portions 566, 567, and 224, 2 2 5 of the spring 5 6 1, 2 1 7 will stretch to the actuator 7 0 1 Linear position with maximum rigidity in the transverse direction. The tong electrode 4 2 0 is provided on a comb-shaped driving strip 2 2 2 of a fixed comb-shaped driving member 2 3 0 a. The relative pliers 4 2 1 will be vertical. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese households' poverty rate (CNS) 8 4 * 1 grid (210X297 mm) -84- 4 〇

D 經濟部中夫榡準局員工消費合作社印装 A7 B7 五、發明説明(82) 於移動方向延伸及藉由構架框2 1 6而在一端剛性地連接 至梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a。彈簧部份5 6 4的第二或自由 端567會固定至鉗42 1的另一端。致動器70 1的可 移動構件或梭7 1 2包含第一梳型驅構件2 0 9 a、鉗電 極421,構架216、延伸件218及托架219。 除了使用相互嚙合的梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a、 230a以將鏡103移動至縮回位置及使用相對的鉗 420、42 1以便在鏡子於彈簧56 1、2 17的順向 彈力下移動至延伸位置時,將可移動的電極組件2 0 9及 鏡1 0 3固持於延伸位置中,致動器7 0 1實際上以類似 於致動器6 0 2之方式操作。致動器70 1的不對稱設計 提供之縮回距離係大於順向延伸距離。因此,梭7 1 2可 以從其縮回位置旋轉至延伸位置’此延伸位置足以使鉗 4 2 0、4 2 1嚙合但不需輸入新的功至系統。 如圖2 8 — 2 9所示,托架2 1 9上的鏡1 0 3之精 確置放可藉由DR I E及藉由加入椿部份7 7 8至鏡 1 0 3而達成,DR I E會於托架2 1 9中蝕刻出容器 7 7 6及長方形凹壁或插座7 7 7。一旦鏡椿部份7 7 8 插入插座7 7 7中時,以任何適當的黏著機構’諸如黏著 劑6 8 8,將鏡1 0 3黏合於適當地方。托架可選加地包 含蝕刻彈簧部份7 7 9以在黏合之前使鏡1 〇 3保持對齊 。圖2 2顯示未具彈簧部份7 7 9之鏡組件’而圓2 9係 顯示設有彈簧部份779之鏡組件》 可提供其它機構以將鏡1 〇 3固定至托架2 1 Θ °舉 本紙張尺度暹用中國國家樣準(CNS > A4规格(210X 297公釐).g5 _ - ----------^------、1T------·φ (请先Μ讀背面之注意事項'/寫本頁) '______'X. 419602 ^ Α7 £7_ 五、發明説明(83 ) 例而言,圖3 0顯示致動器8 0 1 ’其由類似於致動器 7 0 1之矽晶圓形成且具有類似於致動器6 3 0的電極組 件配置。使用類似的參考數字以說明致動器7 0 1及 801的類似元件。致動器801的可移動電極組件 2 〇 9具有四個縱向間隔的梳型驅動構件2 9 a。致動器 8 0 1的固定電極組件2 3 0具有四個縱向間隔的梳型驅 動構件2 3 0 a。致動器8 0 1設有四組協力的鉗電極 420、421。致動器801的托架2 19係由 DRIE蝕刻形成且提供容器802,容器802於其每 一端上具有直立的肩部8 0 3。鏡1 〇 3會由諸如黏著劑 6 8 8等任何適當的黏著機構固持於容器8 0 2中。由蝕 刻致動器8 0 1的晶圓之DR I E所形成的懸置釘狀柱 8 0 4形式之固持機構或構件,會於黏合期間用於對齊及 固持鏡1 0 3於容器8 0 2之內•柱8 0 4係藉由頸構件 8 0 6而剛性地固定至晶圓的部份8 0 5 ’並因而固定至 基底2 1 3。非對稱的致動器8 0 1具有之縮回距離大於 致動器的順向延伸距離- 經濟部中央樣隼局貝工消费合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項、哄寫本頁) 在操作及使用致動器8 0 1時,梭7 1 2會抵抗彈簧 5 6 1、2 1 7的恢復力而向後退縮以將鏡1 〇 3置於托 架2 1 9上。當梭7 1 2接著釋放時,鏡1 〇 3會向前延 伸直到鏡的反射表面嚙合柱8 0 4的自由端爲止。彈簧 561、217的恢復力會施加約50βΝ的力至鏡 1 0 3,此力足以將鏡對齊至垂直於基底2 1 3的表面並 在塗著及固化黏著劑期間將鏡固持於適當位置β在鏡 本紙張尺度通用中國國家揉準(CNS > Α4规格U10XM7公釐)_ 86 _ 經濟部中央橾準局貝工消費合作社印袈 4 1 9 6 0 2 .: Α7 Β7 五、發明説明(84 ) 1 0 3如此附著至托架2 1 9之後,藉由折斷設置於柱 804上寬度縮減之頸構件806,可移除柱804。 在本發明的致動器或微型致動器之另一實施例中,致 動器9 5 1係設有致動機構或致動器9 5 2以便以機械方 式將鏡鎖在其完全延伸的位置及其完全縮回的位置(參見 圖31) »致動器951實際上類似於致動器60並使用 類似的參考數字以說明致動器9 5 1.及6 0 2類似的元件 。鎖定機構或次級馬達9 5 2實際上類似於致動器9 5 1 的主馬達,包含第一梳型驅動構件2 0 8 a及第一梳型驅 動構件210a。藉由諸如DRIE等任何適當機構,將 次級或佇鎖馬達9 5 2形成於矽晶圓或基底2 1 3之上, 次級或佇鎖馬達9 5 2包含梭9 5 6,梭9 5 6可在垂直 於梭6 0 7的移動方向之方向上於第一或縮回位置與第二 或延伸位置之間移動。梭9 5 6包含可移動的電極組件 9 5 7,可移動的電極組件9 5 7係由眾多延著加長的框 部份9 6 1之長度縱向地間隔之梳型驅動構件9 5 8所構 成。框部份9 6 1會平行於佇鎖馬達9 5 2的移動方向延 伸》每一梳型驅動構件9 5 8具有梳型驅動條9 6 2,梳 型驅動條9 6 2會固定於框部份9 6 1的一端及垂直於框 部份延伸。眾多梳型驅動指構件9 6 3會從梳型驅動條 9 6 2的一側延伸及於條9 6 2上縱向地間隔。 致動器9 5 1的梳型驅動組件進〜步包含固定的電極 組件9 6 6,固定的電極組件9 6 6會與^移動的電極組 件9 5 7相互協力地嚙合》固定的電極組件9 6 6包含眾 本紙》尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4规格(2Ϊ0Κ297公釐)~~_ 87: (請先閲讀背面之注意事項'〉寫本頁) .裝- ,1Τ- 419602 ^ A7 B7 經濟部中央樣準扃貝工消費合作社印袈 五、發明説明(85 ) 多安裝於基底2 1 3上的梳型驅動構件'9 6 7 »每一梳型 驅動構件9 6 7係置於相鄰的梳型驅動構件對9 6 2之間 的空隙並由配置成平行於梳型驅動條9 6 2之梳型驅動條 9 6 8所形成。眾多梳型驅動指構件9 6 9係與梳型驅動 條9 6 8整體地形成並朝向梳型驅動指構件9 6 3延伸以 與其協力地內部嚙合。可移動的及固定的電極組件9 5 7 、966係電連接至類似於上述的墊240 - 242之墊 (未顯示),其可允許佇鎖馬達952電連接至控制器 111。 梭9 5 6係藉由配置於梭9 5 6的一端處之彈簧 9 7 6及配置於梭的相對端之彈簧構件或彈簧9 7 7而懸 置於基底2 1 3之上》彈簧9 7 6及9 7 7實際上分別同 於彈簧2 1 4及5 6 2。使用類似的參考數字以說明彈簧 976、977及214、562之類似元件。堅硬的支 撐件9 7 8實際上類似於堅硬的支撐件6 0 6,其會懸置 於基底2 1 3之上以在彈簧9 7 6及9 7 7的折疊端之間 延伸。 除了梳型型驅動構件9 5 8、9 6 7可在第一或靜止 位置與第二位置之間移動之外,協力地相互嚙合之梳型驅 動構件9 5 8及9 6 7之梳型驅動組件會以同於上述的梳 型驅動組件之方式操作,其中,在該第一或靜止位置中, 梳型驅動指構件9 6 3、9 6 9係在複數個位置上間隔, 在這些位置處,梳型驅動指構件9 6 3、^ 6 9的尾端係 處於垂直於梭9 5 6的移動方向延伸之線上,在第二位置 L*-------^^-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項、t寫本頁) 、vs 線 本紙張尺度適用中困國家揉準(CNS > A4规格(210X297公釐) -88- A7 B7 經濟部中央棣準局工消费合作杜印装 五、發明説明(86 ) 中,梳型驅動指構件963、969會指狀組合。梭 9 5 6係由梳型驅動構件9 5 8、9 6 7之間的靜電力向 後拉並由彈簧967、977的機械力向前推。佇鎖馬達 在圖31中所示之其第一位置中通常是關閉的。 梭9 5 6具有延伸件9 8 1,延伸件9 8 1具有可在 延伸與縮回位置之間移動的梢9 8 2。梢9 8 2通常是在 其延伸位置。致動器9 5 1的托架2.1 9具有第一與第二 間隔的止動件983及984,止動件983及984會 於它們之間形成凹壁以便當梭6 0 7處於其鬆弛位置時用 以容納梢9 8 2 * 在操作及使用上,當需要將鏡1 0 3移動至其縮回位 置時,佇鎖馬達9 5 2會被致動以致於梳型驅動構件 9 5 8、9 6 7之間的靜電力會造成梭9 5 6退縮及將梢 9 8 2向後拉。當鏡1 0 3退縮時,第二止動件9 8 4現 在可通過梢982。然後,使佇鎖馬達952不致動,以 致於彈簧976、977會將梭956驅動至其正常的關 閉位置,在此關閉位置時,梢9 8 2會與第二止動件 9 8 4的底端嚙合以阻止托架延伸並因而阻止鏡1 0 3延 伸。以類似方式,梢9 8 2可以被佇鎖馬達9 5 2縮回以 允許鏡1 0 3延伸。在不使佇鎖馬達9 5 2致動時,梢 9 8 2會延伸以與第一止動件9 8 3的上端嚙合並將鏡 1 0 3鎖在其延伸位置中》在梭9 5 6退縮時每一彈簧 9 7 6及9 7 7會從其靜態彎曲位置移動k直的或直線位 置並因而於可移動的梳型驅動指構件9 6 3與固定的梳型 LW--------裝-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項f f寫本頁)D Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the China ’s Husband and Quarantine Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (82) Extends in the moving direction and is rigidly connected to the comb drive member 2 0 a at one end by the frame 2 16. The second or free end 567 of the spring portion 5 6 4 is fixed to the other end of the forceps 42 1. The movable member or shuttle 7 1 2 of the actuator 70 1 includes a first comb drive member 209 a, a clamp electrode 421, a frame 216, an extension 218, and a bracket 219. In addition to using intermeshing comb-shaped drive members 2 0 a and 230 a to move the mirror 103 to the retracted position and using the opposite pliers 420 and 42 1 to move the mirror to the forward elastic force of the springs 56 1 and 2 17 to In the extended position, the movable electrode assembly 209 and the mirror 103 are held in the extended position, and the actuator 7 0 1 actually operates in a manner similar to the actuator 6 0 2. The asymmetrical design of the actuator 70 1 provides a retraction distance greater than the forward extension distance. Therefore, the shuttle 7 1 2 can be rotated from its retracted position to the extended position. This extended position is sufficient to engage the pliers 4 2 0, 4 2 1 without inputting new work to the system. As shown in Figure 2-8—2, the precise placement of the mirror 1 0 3 on the bracket 2 1 9 can be achieved by DR IE and by adding the part 7 7 8 to the mirror 103. DR IE The container 7 7 6 and the rectangular recessed wall or socket 7 7 7 will be etched in the bracket 2 1 9. Once the mirror part 7 7 8 is inserted into the socket 7 7 7, the mirror 1 0 3 is adhered to the appropriate place by any appropriate adhesive mechanism, such as an adhesive 6 8 8. The bracket optionally includes an etched spring portion 7 7 9 to keep the mirror 103 aligned before bonding. Figure 2 2 shows a mirror assembly without a spring part 7 7 9 and circle 2 9 shows a mirror assembly with a spring part 779. Other mechanisms can be provided to fix the mirror 1 03 to the bracket 2 1 Θ ° For example, this paper is based on the national standards of China (CNS > A4 size (210X 297 mm). G5 _----------- ^ ------, 1T ----- -· Φ (please read the precautions on the back '/ write this page)' ______ 'X. 419602 ^ Α7 £ 7_ 5. Description of the invention (83) For example, Figure 3 0 shows the actuator 8 0 1' It is formed from a silicon wafer similar to actuator 7 0 1 and has an electrode assembly configuration similar to actuator 6 3 0. Similar reference numbers are used to describe similar elements of actuators 7 0 1 and 801. The movable electrode assembly 2 of the actuator 801 has four longitudinally-spaced comb-shaped drive members 2 9 a. The fixed electrode assembly of the actuator 8 0 1 2 3 0 has four longitudinally-spaced comb-shaped drive members 2 3 0 a. Actuator 8 0 1 is provided with four sets of cooperating clamp electrodes 420, 421. Brackets 2 and 19 of actuator 801 are formed by DRIE etching and provided with a container 802, each of which has an upright Shoulder 8 0 3. Mirror 1 〇 3 will be held in the container 8 0 2 by any suitable adhesive mechanism such as an adhesive 6 8 8. The hanging nail-shaped post 8 0 4 formed by the DR IE of the wafer etching the actuator 8 0 1 The holding mechanism or component will be used to align and hold the lens during the bonding 1 0 3 within the container 8 2 • The post 8 0 4 is rigidly fixed to the part of the wafer 8 8 by the neck member 8 0 5 'and thus fixed to the base 2 1 3. The asymmetric actuator 8 0 1 has a retracted distance greater than the forward extension of the actuator-printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Samples Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please first (Read the precautions on the back and write this page.) When operating and using the actuator 801, the shuttle 7 1 2 will retract against the restoring force of the spring 5 6 1, 2 1 7 to set the mirror 1 〇3. On the bracket 2 1 9. When the shuttle 7 1 2 is then released, the mirror 103 extends forward until the reflecting surface of the mirror engages the free end of the post 804. The restoring force of the springs 561 and 217 will apply approximately A force of 50βN to the mirror 103, this force is sufficient to align the mirror perpendicular to the surface of the substrate 2 1 3 and hold the mirror in place during the application and curing of the adhesive Set β in the mirror paper standard universal Chinese national standard (CNS > Α4 size U10XM7 mm) _ 86 _ Printed by the Central Consumers' Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives 4 1 9 6 0 2. Α7 Β7 V. Invention Explanation (84) After attaching to the bracket 2 1 9 in this way, the column 804 can be removed by breaking the neck member 806 provided on the column 804 with a reduced width. In another embodiment of the actuator or microactuator of the present invention, the actuator 9 5 1 is provided with an actuating mechanism or an actuator 9 5 2 to mechanically lock the mirror in its fully extended position And its fully retracted position (see Figure 31) »Actuator 951 is actually similar to actuator 60 and uses similar reference numerals to illustrate similar elements of actuators 9 5 1. and 6 0 2. The locking mechanism or secondary motor 9 5 2 is actually similar to the main motor of the actuator 9 5 1 and includes a first comb-type drive member 208a and a first comb-type drive member 210a. The secondary or yoke motor 9 5 2 is formed on a silicon wafer or substrate 2 1 3 by any suitable mechanism such as DRIE. The secondary or yoke motor 9 5 2 includes a shuttle 9 5 6 and a shuttle 9 5 6 can be moved between the first or retracted position and the second or extended position in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of shuttle 6 0 7. The shuttle 9 5 6 includes a movable electrode assembly 9 5 7. The movable electrode assembly 9 5 7 is composed of a plurality of comb-shaped driving members 9 5 8 extending longitudinally and extending apart from the extended frame portion 9 6 1. . The frame part 9 6 1 will extend parallel to the moving direction of the shackle motor 9 5 2. Each comb drive member 9 5 8 has a comb drive bar 9 6 2 and the comb drive bar 9 6 2 will be fixed to the frame part. One end of portion 9 6 1 extends perpendicular to the frame portion. A plurality of comb-shaped driving finger members 9 6 3 extend from one side of the comb-shaped driving strip 9 6 2 and are longitudinally spaced on the strip 9 6 2. The comb-shaped drive assembly of the actuator 9 5 1 further includes a fixed electrode assembly 9 6 6. The fixed electrode assembly 9 6 6 and the moving electrode assembly 9 5 7 cooperate with each other. The fixed electrode assembly 9 6 6 Includes many papers "The standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2Ϊ0Κ297 mm) ~~ _ 87: (Please read the precautions on the back first >> Write this page). Packing-, 1T- 419602 ^ A7 B7 Printed by the Central Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China, Coopers, Coopers, and Fifth, the description of the invention (85), more comb drive members' 9 6 7 mounted on the base 2 1 3 »each comb drive member 9 6 7 The gap between the adjacent comb-shaped driving member pair 9 6 2 is formed by a comb-shaped driving strip 9 6 8 arranged parallel to the comb-shaped driving strip 9 6 2. A plurality of comb-shaped driving finger members 9 6 9 are integrally formed with the comb-shaped driving finger members 9 6 8 and extend toward the comb-shaped driving finger members 9 6 3 so as to internally engage with the comb-shaped driving finger members 9 6 3. The movable and fixed electrode assemblies 9 5 7 and 966 are electrically connected to pads (not shown) similar to the pads 240-242 described above, which allow the shackle motor 952 to be electrically connected to the controller 111. The shuttle 9 5 6 is suspended on the base 2 1 3 by a spring 9 7 6 disposed at one end of the shuttle 9 5 6 and a spring member or spring 9 7 7 disposed at the opposite end of the shuttle. 6 and 9 7 7 are actually the same as the springs 2 1 4 and 5 6 2 respectively. Similar reference numbers are used to describe similar elements of springs 976, 977 and 214, 562. The rigid support member 9 7 8 is actually similar to the rigid support member 6 0 6, which will be suspended above the base 2 1 3 to extend between the folded ends of the springs 9 6 6 and 9 7 7. In addition to comb drive members 9 5 8, 9 6 7 which can be moved between the first or rest position and the second position, comb drive members 9 5 8 and 9 6 7 which work in concert with each other The assembly will operate in the same manner as the comb drive assembly described above, wherein, in the first or rest position, the comb drive finger members 9 6 3, 9 6 9 are spaced at a plurality of positions at these positions. , The end of the comb drive finger 9 6 3, ^ 6 9 is located on a line extending perpendicular to the moving direction of the shuttle 9 5 6 at the second position L * ------- ^^-(Please Please read the notes on the back, write this page), vs. the size of the paper. Applicable to the middle and poor countries (CNS > A4 size (210X297 mm) -88- A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Standards Bureau, Industrial and Consumer Cooperation Printed 5. In the description of the invention (86), the comb-shaped driving finger members 963 and 969 are combined in a finger shape. The shuttle 9 5 6 is pulled backward by the electrostatic force between the comb-shaped driving members 9 5 8 and 9 6 7 The mechanical force of the springs 967, 977 pushes forward. The shackle motor is normally closed in its first position shown in Figure 31. The shuttle 9 5 6 has an extension 9 8 1. The extension 9 8 1 has a tip 9 8 2 that can be moved between an extended and retracted position. The tip 9 8 2 is usually in its extended position. The bracket 2.1 9 of the actuator 9 5 1 has a first and The stoppers 983 and 984 at the second interval, and the stoppers 983 and 984 will form a concave wall between them so as to accommodate the tip 9 8 2 when the shuttle 6 7 is in its relaxed position. * In operation and use, When it is necessary to move the mirror 103 to its retracted position, the yoke motor 9 5 2 will be activated so that the electrostatic force between the comb-shaped driving members 9 5 8 and 9 6 7 will cause the shuttle 9 5 6 to retract. And pull the tip 9 8 2 back. When the mirror 103 is retracted, the second stopper 9 8 4 can now pass through the tip 982. Then, the yoke motor 952 is not activated, so that the springs 976, 977 will shuttle the shuttle The 956 is driven to its normal closed position, in which the tip 9 8 2 engages the bottom end of the second stopper 9 8 4 to prevent the bracket from extending and thus the mirror 103 from extending. In a similar manner The tip 9 8 2 can be retracted by the yoke motor 9 5 2 to allow the mirror 1 0 3 to extend. When the yoke motor 9 5 2 is not actuated, the tip 9 8 2 will extend to engage the first stopper 9 8 The upper end of 3 engages and locks the mirror 103 in its extended position. When the shuttle 9 5 6 retracts, each of the springs 9 7 6 and 9 7 7 will move from its static bending position to a straight or straight position and thus Removable comb drive finger 9 9 3 and fixed comb LW -------- install-(Please read the precautions on the back first to write this page)

.•IT 線 本纸張尺度適用t國國家揉準(CNS > A4规格(210>: 297公釐)_ 〇〇 A7 B7 五、發明説明(87 ) 驅動指構件9 6 9指狀組合時提供側向穩定力給可移動的 梳型驅動指構件9 6 3 » 在不需施加電壓至致動器9 5 1之下|佇鎖馬達 9 5 2可允許鏡1 0 3被鎖在其完全延伸或完全縮回的位 置中,此點在致動器9 5 1萬一用於電信或網路系統中時 ,是有利的。在所示的實施例中,當具有2 0 0伏特的輸 入訊號及具有八kH z共振頻率時,、佇鎖馬達9 5 2具有 四個微偏轉。雖然致動器9 5 1未具有任何上述型式之靜 電鉗制電極,但是|應瞭解這些鉗制電極可具有致動器 951且在本發明的範圍之內》 經濟部中夬標窣扃S工消费合作社印裝 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 在另一實施例中,致動器可具有第一組靜電鉗制電極 及第二組靜電鉗制電極,第一組靜電鉗制電極用以將鏡固 持於其縮回位置中,第二組靜電鉗制電極用以將鏡固持於 其完全延伸位置中。圖3 2中所示的致動器實際上類似於 上述的致動器7 0 1且使用類似的參考數字說明致動器 70 1及1 0 0 1之類似元件。致動器1 00 1具有梳型 驅動組件,梳型驅動組件包含可移動的梳型驅動構件 2 0 9 a及固定的梳型驅動構件2 3 0 a。可移動的梳型 驅動構件2 0 9 a包含梳型驅動條2 2 1及眾多延著條 2 2 1的長度縱向地間隔之加長的梳型驅動指構件 1 0 0 2。梳型驅動指構件1 0 0 2均具有固定於梳型驅 動條2 2 1之近端部份1 0 0 2 a及遠離條2 2 1.之遠端 或自由端部份。 ’ 每一梳型驅動指構件1 0 0 2的近端部份1 〇 〇 2 a 本紙張又度適用中國國家搮準(CNS > 格<210X297公釐)_ 9〇 經濟部中央橾瘅局貝工消费合作社印製 4 1960 2 c A7 _B7__五、發明説明(88) 比梳型驅動指構件的其它部份還寬,以致於梳型驅動指構 件會在離開近端部份1 0 0 2 a的遠端向下變窄。更特別 的是,每一梳型驅動指構件1 0 0 2的近端部份 1 0 0 2 a具有之寬度範圍係從梳型驅動指構件的平衡寬 度的100%至300%,較佳的是從1 30%至1 90 %且更佳的是約1 6 5%。加寬的近端部份1 0 0 2 a具 有從梳型驅動指構件的長度之1 %至3 0 %的長度範圍, 較佳的是從5 %至1 5%且更佳的是約8% > 固定的梳型驅動構件2 3 0 a具有的尺寸及形狀實際 上類似於梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a且由眾多實際上類似於梳 型驅動指構件1 0 0 2之梳型驅動指構件1 0 0 4所形成 。特別的是,每一梳型驅動指構件1 0 0 4具有與近端部 份1 0 0 2 a相同之加寬的近端部份1 0 0 4 a及與自由 端部份1 0 0 2 b相同的窄化遠端或自由端部份 1 0 0 4 b。 第一鉗制電極4 2 0係設置於與梳型驅動指構件相對 的梳型驅動條2 2 2的背側上。第二鉗制電極4 2 1係垂 直地附著至構架框部份2 1 6及平行於梳型驅動條2 2 2 延伸β每一電極4 2 0及4 2 1均具有延著它們而縱向地 間隔之指狀延伸件4 2 2 » 梳型驅動構件209a、230a可在第一位置、圖 3 2中所的第二位置與第三位置之間移動,在第一位置中 ,梳型驅動指構件1 0 0 2、1 0 0 4係^隔的且鉗制電 極420、421係彼此緊密接近,在第二位置中,梳型 — r--------裝------訂------線 {請先閲讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) -I --- j Λ _____ 本紙張尺度適用中國B家搞準(cm M4说格(210X297公釐) -91 - 經濟部中央揉準扃I工消费合作社印製 419602 , A7 B7 五、發明説明(89 ) 驅動指構件1 0 0 2、1 0 0 4開始靜電交互作用且其自 由端會延著垂直於梳型驅動指構件延伸之直線配置,在第 三位置中,梳型驅動指構件1002、1004係指狀組 合以致於一組梳型驅動指構件的遠側端部份會緊密地接近 另一組梳型驅動指構件的加寬或加長的近端部份。更特SII 的是,當梳型驅動指構件209a、230a在第三位置 時,梳型驅動指構件的自由端部份會於相對的梳型驅動指 構件組之加大的近端部份之間延伸。 在操作及使用上,致動器1 0 0 2的啓動程序係如上 所述。一般而言,會由控制器1 1 1施加脈沖電壓橫跨梳 型驅動構件209 a、230a以造成梭712以其共振 頻率振盪。當梳型驅動構件處於它們的第二位置時,較佳 地施加脈沖訊號以使梳型驅動指構件1 0 0 2、1 0 0 4 之間的側向不穩定力最小。靜電梳型驅動構件2 0 9 a、 2 3 0 a會造成梭7 1 2於向後半行程期間從圖3 2中所 示之其鬆弛或中間位置退縮。彈簧2 1 7,5 6 1的恢復 力會造成梭712在順向半行程期間從其縮回位置延伸。 —旦梭移動至圖3 2中所示之其鬆弛位置之外的延伸位置 時,彈簧2 1 7、5 6 1也有助於使梭退縮。 —旦梭7 1 2振盪至其最大的振幅時,致動器 1 0 0 1的第一及第二組靜電鉗制電極可用以將梭固持於 其完全縮回的位置中或其完全延伸的位置中。當梭在其完 全縮回的位置中時,可施加電壓橫跨完全地指狀組合之梳 型驅動指構件1 0 0 2、1 0 0 4以使得梳型驅動指構件 本紙張尺度適用中國國家梂準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐).g2 I---------装------ΐτ------St (請先閲讀背面之注意事項t寫本頁) 經濟部t央揉隼局貝工消费合作杜印«. 4 1 9 6 0 2 1 A7 B7 五、發明説明(90 ) 加大之近端部份1002a ' 1004a作爲相關於相對 的梳型驅動指構件的自由端部份l〇〇4b、1002b 之鉗制電極。當梭7 1 2處於其完全延伸的位置中時’可 施加電壓橫跨梳型驅動指構件2 0 9 a、2 3 0 a以在鉗 420、421之間提供靜電吸引力而將梭712及鏡 1 0 3固持在它們完全延伸的位置中。較佳的是,當梭 7 1 2接近其極限位置之一及較佳地在其極限位置的5個 百分比之內時,將電壓施加至致動器1 〇 〇 1的鉗制電極 。因此,對於朝向其完全縮回及完全延伸的位置偏轉 1 0 0微米以具有整個2 0 0微米的行程長度之梭7 1 2 而言,在行程的最後五微米期間,將電壓施加於相對的鉗 電極之間。 提供本發明的致動器之其它實施例,其中至少一梳型 驅動構件具有長度不同的梳型驅動指構件。圖3 3中的致 動器1 0 2 1係以上述爲例。致動器1 〇 2 1實際上類似 於致動器6 0 2及1 0 0 1且使用類似的參考數字以說明 致動器602、1001及1021之類似元件。致動器 1 0 2 1中的可移動電極組件2 0 9之梳型驅動指構件 2 0 9 a具有眾多延著梳型驅動條2 2 1的長度縱向地間 隔之加長的梳型驅動指構件1 0 2 1。除了指構件具有不 同的長度之外,指構件1 0 2 2實際上類似於上述的指構 件212。特別的是,指構件1022係橫跨梳型驅動條 2 2 1而於長度上線性地增加。最長的梳运驅動指構件 1 0 2 2於長度上實際上與相對的固定梳型驅動指構件 本紙張尺度適用中國國家梯準(CNS ) A4洗格(210X297公釐)_ 93 - ί.--------裝— (請先閲讀背面之注意事項4寫本頁) 訂 線 4!9602 經濟部中央橾準局工消费合作社印装 A7 B7 五、發明説明(91 ) 2 3 8中的每一梳型驅動指構件2 1 1相同。最短的梳型 驅動指構件1 0 2 2之長度係爲最長的梳型驅動指構件 1 0 2 2的長度之0%至稍微小於1 〇 0%之範圍,較佳 的是從5%至5 0%之範圍*更佳的是約1 0%。 梭7 1 2可從第一位置移動至圖3 3中所示的第二位 置及移動至第三位置,在第一位置中,梳型驅動構件 209 a及230a係間隔的以致於鉗4 2 0及4 2 1不 會處於協力的靜電嚙合,在第二位置中,梳型驅動指構件 2 1 1及最長的梳型驅動指構件1 0 2 2係延著垂直於梳 型驅動指構件延伸的直線配置,在第三位置中,梳型驅動 指構件2 1 1及1 0 2 2係處於完全協力的指狀組合。 在操作及使用上,梳型驅動指構件1 0 2 2的不同長 度可提供靜電吸引力,從最長的梳型驅動指構件1 0 2 2 開始與梳型驅動指構件211協力靜電嚙合之點至最短的 梳型驅動指構件1 0 2 2開始與梳型驅動指構件2 1 1協 力靜電嚙合之點,此靜電吸引力幾乎線性地增加。結果, 在相對的梳型驅動指構件之間的靜電吸引力增加至大於彈 簧2 17、56 1的相對順向彈力之後,梭712的進一 步偏轉會造成靜電吸引力進一步增加而快速地將鏡1 0 3 移動至其完全縮回的位置。梳型驅動指構件1 0 2 2所允 許的較大靜電吸引力可提供具有較大順向彈力之彈簧 2 1 7、5 6 1並因而增加致動器1 0 2 1的退縮頻率" 雖然所顯示之梳型驅動指構件1 0 2 '2的長度係從梳 型驅動構件2 0 9 a的一端至另一端成線性地增加’但是 本纸張尺度遑用中a a家標準(CNS ) A4规格(210 X 297公釐).^ _ I-----------裝-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) ,1T. ίί Α7 Β7 經濟部中央棣準局員工消费合作杜印装 五、發明説明(92 ) ,應瞭解,也可提供具有不同尺寸的梳型驅動指構件等其 它配置之梳型驅動構件。此外,應瞭解相對的梳型驅動構 件2 3 0 a之梳型驅動指構件2 1 1也可具有不同長度且 在本發明的範圍之內。 本發明的致動器可設有較大的配置以提供較大的力量 «關於此點,提供實際上類似於致動器5 0 1且具有實際 上類似於連接器構架216之中央、堅固的驅動條 1202之微型致動器1201(參見圖34)。驅動條 1202會延著致動器1201的縱軸1203而於基底 2 1 3之上移動。使用類似的參考數字以說明致動器 5 0 1及1 2 0 1之類似元件。四個梳型驅動組件208 ,2 1 0會包含於致動器1 2 0 1之內,用以將驅動條 1 2 0 2從圖3 4中所示之其啓始或靜止位置退縮至縮回 位置,且四個不同的梳型驅動組件2 0 9、2 3 0係包含 於致動器1201之內,用以將驅動條1202從其靜止 位置延伸至延伸位置。致動器1 2 0 1於圖3 4中向下移 動至其縮回位置及向上移動至其延伸位置。 梳型驅動組件2 0 8 .、2 1 0係配置於驅動條 1202的側上,與梳型驅動組件209'230上相對 。第一可移動的電極組件2 0 8具有四個梳型驅動構件 208a、208b、208c、208d,四個梳型驅 動構件 208a、208b、208c、208d 與可移 動的驅動條1 2 0 2 —體形成且以與其垂it之方式延伸’ 第二可移動的電極組件2 0 9具有四個梳型驅動構件 I.--------t.-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項t寫本頁) 、π 線 本紙張尺度速用中國國家揉準(CNS > Α4说格(210X297公釐)· 95 - A7 B7 _ 五、發明説明(93 ) 209a ,209b、209c、209d,四個梳型驅 動構件 209a、209b、209c、209(1 與驅動 條一體形成且以垂直於驅動條之方式於相對於梳型驅動構 件 208a、208b、208c、208d 之方向上延 伸*第一固定的電極組件210具有四個梳型驅動構件 210a、210b、210c、21〇d,四個梳型驅 動構件 210a、210b、210c、210d 係安裝 於基底2 13上,與個別的驅動構件208a、208b 、208 c、208d協力嚙合,第二固定的電極組件 230具有四個梳型驅動構件230a、230b、 230c、230d,四個梳型驅動構件230a、 230b、230c、230d係安裝於基底213上, 與個別的驅動構件2〇9a、209b、209c、 209d協力嚙合。 經濟部中央棣準局負工消费合作社印製 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 致動器1 2 0 1係由矽晶圓形成且具有第一及第二彈 簧214、217,第一彈簧214、217係設計成非 線性且因而在靜態未偏轉條件下爲“彎曲”條件。彈簧 2 1 4、2 1 7均於其第一端2 43耦合至基底2 1 3且 於其第二端2 4 4耦合至梭1 0 9。當梭1 0 9係處於其 縮回與延伸位置之間的中途之靜止條件時,致動器 1 20 1中的每一彈簧2 1 4、2 1 7的彈簧部份224 、2 2 5會彼此相向彎曲。在本實施例中,當梭10 9從 其啓始位置移動至其延伸位置且第二可移Ϊ&的電極組件 2 0 9的梳型指構件2 1 1、2 1 2與第二固定的電極組 本紙張尺度適用中H®家揉準(CNS M4规格(210XW7公釐} -96- 419602 , A7 B7 經濟部t央樣準局真工消费合作社印袋 五、發明説明(94 ) 件2 3 0靜電地嚙合且接著重疊時’彈簧2 1 7會從其預 彎曲啓始位置拉伸至線性位置。同樣地,當梭1 〇 9從其 啓始位置移動至其縮回位置且第一可移動的電極組件 2 0 8的梳型指構件2 1 1,2 1 2與第一固定的電極組 件2 1 0嚙合且接著重疊時,彈簧2 1 4會從其預彎曲的 啓始位置拉伸至線性位置°在每一情形中,當個別彈簧的 彈簧部份2 2 4、2 2 5在垂直於個別的梳型驅動指構件 2 1 1之方向上變成性線時,個別彈簧的彈簧部份2 2 4 、2 2 5之側向剛性會於垂直於個別的梳型驅動指構件 2 1 1之方向上增加。以此方式,個別彈簧的側向剛性及 由此彈簧施加至這些梳型驅動指構件2 1 1上的側向恢復 力均會以梳型驅動指構件211'212之間重叠量之函 數增加。當這些梳型驅動指構件2 1 1、2 1 2變成指狀 組合時,彈簧2 1 4、2 1 7因而用以驅動協力的梳型驅 動組件之梳型驅動指構件2 1 1至相鄰的梳型驅動指構件 212之間中途之穩定位置。雖然,當彈簧214、 2 1 7於一方向上偏轉時會拉直,但是,當梭1 0 9於相 反方向上移動時,彈簧部份2 2 4、2 2 5會從它們的靜 止位置更加地彼此相向彎曲。 於致動器1 2 0 1中設置第二組折疊的懸臂樑或彈簧 5 6 1、5 6 2,耆們於尺寸及成份上實際上類似於彈簧 214、217。每一彈簧561、562均於其第一端 5 6 3耦合至基底2 1 3及其於第二端5> 4耦合至梭 1 09。每一組彈簧56 1、562均包含由摺曼的彎曲 —·---------裝-- {請先閲讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) -4¾ 線 束紙張尺度逋用中國a家標準(CMS ) A4规格(210X297公釐} . 97 ^濟部中夹樣準局負工消费合作杜印製 五、發明説明(95 ) 部份5 6 8接合之第一及第二組間隔的、平行彈簧部份 566、567 »當在鬆弛位置中時,彈簧56 1、 5 6 2實際上係垂直於電極組件2 0 8、2 0 9的移動方 向延伸。更特別的是,如圖3 4所示,當梭1 0 9處於其 縮回與延伸位置之間的中途之靜止條件時,彈簧部份 5 6 6、5 6 7會彼此相離地彎曲。當第一可移動的電極 組件2 0 8與第一固定的電極組件21 0之梳型指構件 2 1 1、2 1 2的重疊增加且梭1 0 9移動至其縮回位置 時,彈簧5 6 2係設計成拉伸至線性位置。同樣地,當第 二可移動的電極組件2 0 9與第二固定的電極組件2 3 0 之梳型指構件2 1 1、2 1 2的重叠移動至其延伸位置時 ,彈簧5 6 1係設計成拉伸至線性位置。雖然,當彈簧 56 1、562於一方向上偏轉時會拉直,但是,當梭 109於相反方向上移動時,彈簧部份566、567會 從它們的靜止位置變得更加彼此遠離地彎曲。彈簧5 6 1 、5 6 2係以關於彈簧2 1 4、2 1 7之上述中所述之相 同方式操作。 彈簧2 1 7、56 1係配置於驅動條1 202的一側 上之梳型驅動組件2 0 9、2 3 0的相對的端上,而彈簧 214、562係配置於驅動條1202的另一側上之梳 型驅動組件208、2 1 0之相對的端上。彈簧2 14、 217、561、562 的第一端部份243、563 係 以緊密地接近中心縱軸1 2 0 3之方式固走於基底2 1 3 。彈簧2 1 7、5 6 1係藉由懸置的堅硬支撐件1 2 1 0 (讀先聞讀背面之注意事項'^寫本頁) !, I i·-l·_ 本紙張尺度通用中國8家標隼(〇阳>八4祝格(2丨0><297公釐} -98- 4 1.9602 、: A7 B7 五、發明説明(96 ) 連接於它們個別的折疊部份2 4 5、5 6 8處,支撐件 1 2 1 0實際上類似於堅硬的支撐件1 3 1,於折疊部份 245、568之間延伸且平行於驅勖條1202。彈簧 2 1 4、5 6 2係藉由懸置的堅硬支撐件1 2 1 2連接於 它們個別的折曼部份245、568處,支撐件1210 實際上類似於堅硬的支撐件1 3 1,於折疊部份2 4 5、 5 6 8之間延伸且平行於驅動條1 2 0 2。在致動器 1 2 0 1的四個彈簧之實施例中,在致動器5 0 1的每一 端處之一彎曲的彈簧對2 1 4或5 6 1及2 1 7或5 6 2 會較佳地拉直而另一彎曲的彈簧對會於可移動的電極組件 208、209及梭109的每一偏轉極限處彎曲。彈簧 214' 217、561、562及梭109具有如上所 述之高的離平面剛性。 經濟部中央樣準局貝工消费合作社印装 (請先聞請背面之注$項' 寫本頁) 致動器1 2 Ο 1可以以類似於上述的致動器5 0 1之 操作方法操作。使用或驅動條1 2 0 2的順向或上端以施 加力量或提供移動給適當的物體》隨著梳型驅動構件 208、209的側向偏轉增加,由彈簧214、217 ,5 6 1、5 6 2所提供的穩定側向力比指狀組合的梳型 驅動指構件2 1 1、2 1 2之間所產生的靜電側向力更快 速地增加。在圖3 4中所示的實施例中,隨著側向偏轉增 加,穩定的側向力至少比靜電側向力快十倍地增加。驅動 條1 2 0 2的二側上之梳型驅動組件的配置會使致動器 1 2 0 1的力量增加,但不會增加致動器的長度及驅動條 1 2 0 2的長度· 本紙張尺度遑用中固國家標準(CNS > A4规格(210X297公釐} -99- 41 9 A7 B7 超濟部中央樣率局w工消费合作社印袈 五、發明説明(97 ) 後向或退縮動作限制機構或限制器1 2 1 6會設置於 驅動條1 2 0 2的後端上,當梭1 0 9處於其縮回位置時 ,以嚼合安裝於基底2 1 3上的固定止動件1 2 1 6。應 瞭解,致動器1 2 0 1可設有或不設有有關上述致動器中 所述的鉗4 2 0、4 2 1及/或其它特徵且在本發明的範 圍之內。 圖3 5係顯示使用本發明的致動器之光學微型開關的 另一實施例。其中•光學微型開關1 3 0 1係由微晶片 1 302所形成,具有單一的輸入埠1 303,單一輸入 埠1 3 0 3會耦合至微晶片1 3 0 2上的至少一輸入光載 送元件或光纖98。延著微晶片1 302的一側,提供諸 如單模式偏振維持(PM)光纖9 7等個別的適當光學元 件。圖35中僅顯示光纖97、98的部份*微晶片 1 3 0 2具有於輸入埠1 3 0 3處開口之通道或溝槽 1 3 0 7以接收輸入光纖9 8及具有於出口埠1 3 0 4處 的微型開關1 3 0 1之側邊上開口之通道或溝槽1 3 0 8 以接收每一輸出光纖9 7。縱軸1 3 1 1會延著光學開關 1301的通道1312,以平行於入口埠1303及垂 直於出口埠1304之方式延伸* 眾多二致動器1 0 0 1會延著虛線配置於縱向間隔位 置中·虛線以與縱軸1311相平行及相間隔之方式延伸 。第一及第二致動器1001均具有鏡103,鏡103 係以4 5 β角相對於縱軸1 3 1 1傾斜以^引導諸如入口 光纖9 8所提供的線性偏振之雷射光1 9 1等適當的輸入 --H-------裝-- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項、-Λ·寫本頁). • IT paper size Applicable to the national standard (CNS > A4 specification (210 >: 297mm) _ 〇〇A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (87) Drive finger 9 6 9 finger combination Provides lateral stabilizing force to the movable comb drive finger member 9 6 3 »Without the need to apply voltage to the actuator 9 5 1 | the yoke motor 9 5 2 allows the mirror 1 0 3 to be locked in its full In the extended or fully retracted position, this is advantageous when the actuator 95 1 1 1 is used in telecommunications or network systems. In the embodiment shown, when having an input of 200 volts When the signal and the resonance frequency of eight kH z, the yoke motor 9 5 2 has four micro deflections. Although the actuator 9 5 1 does not have any of the above types of electrostatic clamping electrodes, it should be understood that these clamping electrodes may have Actuator 951 is within the scope of the present invention. "Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Standards and Consumer Cooperatives (please read the notes on the back to write this page). In another embodiment, the actuator may have The first group of electrostatic clamping electrodes and the second group of electrostatic clamping electrodes. The first group of electrostatic clamping electrodes is used to fix the mirror. In its retracted position, a second set of electrostatically clamped electrodes is used to hold the mirror in its fully extended position. The actuator shown in Figure 32 is actually similar to the actuator 701 described above and uses a similar The reference numerals indicate similar elements of the actuators 70 1 and 1 0 0 1. The actuator 1 00 1 has a comb-shaped driving assembly including a movable comb-shaped driving member 2 0 9 a and a fixed comb. Type driving member 2 3 0 a. The movable comb-shaped driving member 2 0 9 a includes a comb-shaped driving bar 2 2 1 and a plurality of elongated comb-shaped driving finger members 10 extending along the length of the strip 2 2 1. 0 2. The comb drive means 1 0 0 2 has a proximal end portion 1 0 0 2 a fixed to the comb drive strip 2 2 1 and a distal or free end portion away from the strip 2 2 1. Proximity part of each comb drive finger 1 002 002 a This paper is again applicable to China National Standards (CNS > Grid < 210X297 mm) _ 90 Central Bureau of Economic Affairs Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative 4 1960 2 c A7 _B7__ V. Description of the invention (88) It is wider than the other parts of the comb drive finger member, so that the comb drive The moving finger member narrows downward at the distal end away from the proximal portion 1 0 2 a. More specifically, the proximal portion 1 0 0 2 a of each comb-shaped driving finger member 1 0 2 2 has The width ranges from 100% to 300% of the equilibrium width of the comb drive finger member, preferably from 130% to 90% and more preferably about 165%. The widened proximal portion 1 0 0 2 a has a length ranging from 1% to 30% of the length of the comb-type driving finger member, preferably from 5% to 15% and more preferably about 8% > fixed comb type The driving member 2 3 0 a has a size and shape similar to the comb-shaped driving member 2 0 9 a and is composed of many comb-shaped driving finger members 1 0 0 2 that are actually similar to the comb-shaped driving finger member 1 0 0 2 form. In particular, each comb-shaped driving finger member 1 0 0 4 has a widened proximal portion 1 0 0 4 a and a free end portion 1 0 0 2 that are the same as the proximal portion 1 0 0 2 a. b Same narrowed distal or free end portion 1 0 0 4 b. The first clamp electrode 4 2 0 is provided on the back side of the comb drive strip 2 2 2 opposite to the comb drive finger member. The second clamp electrodes 4 2 1 are vertically attached to the frame frame portion 2 1 6 and extend parallel to the comb-shaped driving strip 2 2 2. Each of the electrodes 4 2 0 and 4 2 1 has a longitudinal interval extending along them. Finger extension 4 2 2 »Comb drive members 209a, 230a are movable between a first position, a second position and a third position as shown in FIG. 32, and in the first position, the comb drive finger members 1 0 0 2, 1 0 0 4 series are separated and the clamping electrodes 420, 421 are close to each other. In the second position, the comb type—r -------- 装 ------ order ------ Line {Please read the notes on the back to write this page) -I --- j Λ _____ This paper size is suitable for Chinese B homes (cm M4 grid (210X297 mm) -91-Economy Printed by the Ministry of Industry and Commerce I Cooperative Co., Ltd. 419602, A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (89) The driving finger member 1 0 2, 1 0 0 4 starts electrostatic interaction and its free end will extend perpendicular to the comb drive. The finger members extend in a straight line configuration. In the third position, the comb drive finger members 1002 and 1004 are finger-shaped combinations such that the distal end portions of a set of comb drive finger members are closely approached. A set of widened or lengthened proximal end portions of the comb drive finger member. More specifically, when the comb drive finger members 209a and 230a are in the third position, the free end portion of the comb drive finger member will Extending between the enlarged proximal end parts of the opposite comb-shaped driving fingers. In operation and use, the activation procedure of the actuator 102 is as described above. Generally, it will be controlled by the controller. 1 1 1 A pulsed voltage is applied across the comb drive members 209a, 230a to cause the shuttle 712 to oscillate at its resonant frequency. When the comb drive members are in their second position, a pulse signal is preferably applied to cause the comb drive The finger has the smallest lateral instability between 1 0 2 and 1 0 0. The electrostatic comb drive member 2 0 9 a, 2 3 0 a will cause shuttle 7 1 2 during the half-stroke backward from Figure 3 2 Shown in its loose or intermediate position. The restoring force of the spring 2 1 7, 5 6 1 causes the shuttle 712 to extend from its retracted position during the forward half-stroke.-Once the shuttle moves to the position shown in Figure 3 2 In its extended position other than its relaxed position, the springs 2 1 7 and 5 6 1 also help to retract the shuttle.-Once When 7 1 2 oscillates to its maximum amplitude, the first and second sets of electrostatic clamping electrodes of actuator 1 0 1 can be used to hold the shuttle in its fully retracted position or in its fully extended position. When When the shuttle is in its fully retracted position, a voltage can be applied across the comb-shaped drive finger members 1 0 2 and 1 0 4 which are completely combined with fingers to make the comb-shaped drive finger members suitable for the Chinese country. Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm). G2 I --------- installation ------ ΐτ ------ St (Please read the precautions on the back first to write this page ) Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Government Bureau, Shellfish Consumer Cooperation, Du Yin «. 4 1 9 6 0 2 1 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (90) Enlarged proximal part 1002a '1004a as a relative comb drive Refers to the clamped electrodes of the free end portions 100b and 1002b of the component. When shuttle 7 1 2 is in its fully extended position, 'appliable voltage can be applied across comb-shaped drive finger members 2 0 9 a, 2 3 0 a to provide electrostatic attraction between pliers 420, 421 and shuttle 712 and The mirrors 103 are held in their fully extended position. Preferably, the voltage is applied to the clamp electrode of the actuator 1001 when the shuttle 7 1 2 is close to one of its extreme positions and preferably within 5 percent of its extreme position. Therefore, for a shuttle 7 1 2 that is deflected by 100 micrometers towards its fully retracted and fully extended position to have a full stroke length of 200 micrometers, during the last five micrometers of the stroke, a voltage is applied to the opposite Clamp between electrodes. Other embodiments of the actuator of the present invention are provided, in which at least one comb-shaped driving member has comb-shaped driving finger members having different lengths. The actuator 10 2 1 in FIG. 3 is based on the above example. Actuator 1 02 1 is actually similar to actuators 602 and 10 01 and uses similar reference numerals to describe similar elements of actuators 602, 1001, and 1021. Comb-shaped driving finger member 2 0 9 of the movable electrode assembly 2 0 9 in the actuator 1 0 2 1 has a plurality of elongated comb-shaped driving finger members extending longitudinally along the length of the comb-shaped driving strip 2 2 1 1 0 2 1. The finger members 1 0 2 2 are actually similar to the finger members 212 described above except that the finger members have different lengths. In particular, the finger member 1022 linearly increases in length across the comb drive strip 2 2 1. The longest comb drive finger member 1 0 2 2 is actually opposite to the fixed comb drive finger member in length. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 washing grid (210X297 mm) _ 93-ί.- ------- Installation— (Please read the note on the back 4 to write this page first) Thread 4! 9602 Printed by A7 B7, Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives, Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention (91) 2 3 8 Each of the comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 1 is the same. The length of the shortest comb-shaped driving finger member 1 0 2 2 is in the range of 0% to slightly less than 100% of the length of the longest comb-shaped driving finger member 1 0 2 2, preferably from 5% to 5 A range of 0% * is more preferably about 10%. The shuttle 7 1 2 can be moved from the first position to the second position shown in FIG. 3 and to the third position. In the first position, the comb drive members 209 a and 230 a are spaced apart so that the forceps 4 2 0 and 4 2 1 are not in concerted electrostatic engagement. In the second position, the comb drive finger member 2 1 1 and the longest comb drive finger member 1 0 2 2 extend perpendicular to the comb drive finger member. In the third position, the comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 1 and 10 2 2 are in a finger combination that is fully cooperative. In operation and use, different lengths of the comb drive finger member 1 0 2 2 can provide electrostatic attraction. From the point where the longest comb drive finger member 1 0 2 2 and the comb drive finger member 211 cooperate to electrostatically engage to The point at which the shortest comb-shaped driving finger member 1 0 2 2 began to electrostatically engage with the comb-shaped driving finger member 2 1 1, and this electrostatic attractive force increased almost linearly. As a result, after the electrostatic attractive force between the opposing comb-type driving finger members is increased to be greater than the relative forward elastic force of the springs 2 17, 56 1, further deflection of the shuttle 712 will cause the electrostatic attractive force to further increase and quickly move the mirror 1 0 3 Move to its fully retracted position. The larger electrostatic attractive force allowed by the comb drive finger member 1 0 2 2 can provide a spring 2 1 7, 5 6 1 with a larger forward elasticity and thus increase the retraction frequency of the actuator 1 0 2 1 " The length of the comb drive finger member 1 0 2 '2 shown increases linearly from one end to the other end of the comb drive member 2 0 9 a'. However, this paper standard uses the aa home standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm). ^ _ I ----------- install-(please read the precautions on the back to write this page), 1T. Ίί Α7 Β7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumption cooperation of employees Du Yinzhuang 5. Description of the invention (92) It should be understood that comb-shaped drive members with other configurations such as comb-shaped drive finger members with different sizes can also be provided. In addition, it should be understood that the comb-shaped driving finger member 2 1 1 of the opposite comb-shaped driving member 2 3 0 a may also have different lengths and be within the scope of the present invention. The actuator of the present invention may be provided with a larger configuration to provide a larger force «In this regard, a central, sturdy, substantially similar actuator 501 and having a substantially similar connector frame 216 is provided. The microactuator 1201 of the drive bar 1202 (see FIG. 34). The driving bar 1202 moves along the longitudinal axis 1203 of the actuator 1201 above the substrate 2 1 3. Similar reference numerals are used to describe similar elements of the actuators 5 0 1 and 1 2 0 1. Four comb drive assemblies 208, 2 10 will be included in the actuator 1 2 0 1 to retract the drive bar 1 2 0 2 from its starting or rest position as shown in FIG. 3 4 In the return position, four different comb-shaped drive assemblies 209 and 2 30 are included in the actuator 1201 to extend the drive bar 1202 from its rest position to the extended position. Actuator 1 2 0 1 moves downwards to its retracted position and upwards to its extended position in FIG. 3 4. The comb drive assemblies 2 0 8 and 2 10 are arranged on the side of the drive bar 1202, opposite to the comb drive assemblies 209'230. The first movable electrode assembly 208 has four comb-shaped driving members 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, four comb-shaped driving members 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d and a movable driving bar 1 2 0 2 Formed and extending in a manner that is perpendicular to it 'The second movable electrode assembly 209 has four comb-shaped drive members I .-------- t .-- (Please read the precautions on the back first t (Write this page), π-line paper scales are used in China (CNS > Α4 grid (210X297 mm) · 95-A7 B7 _ V. Description of the invention (93) 209a, 209b, 209c, 209d, four Comb drive members 209a, 209b, 209c, 209 (1 are integrally formed with the drive bar and extend perpendicular to the drive bar in a direction relative to the comb drive members 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d. * First fixed The electrode assembly 210 has four comb-shaped driving members 210a, 210b, 210c, and 210d. The four comb-shaped driving members 210a, 210b, 210c, and 210d are mounted on the substrate 21, and the individual driving members 208a, 208b, 208 c, 208d mesh together, the second fixed electrode assembly 230 has four comb drive mechanisms 230a, 230b, 230c, 230d, four comb drive members 230a, 230b, 230c, and 230d are mounted on the base 213 and mesh with individual drive members 209a, 209b, 209c, and 209d. Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Office of the Consumer Cooperative (please read the notes on the back to write this page) Actuator 1 2 0 1 is formed from a silicon wafer and has first and second springs 214 and 217, and first springs 214 and 217 The system is designed to be non-linear and thus a "bent" condition under static undeflected conditions. The springs 2 1 4 and 2 1 7 are both coupled to the base 2 1 3 at their first end 2 4 and at their second end 2 4 4 Coupling to shuttle 1 0. When shuttle 10 9 is in a rest condition halfway between its retracted and extended positions, each spring 2 1 4, 2 1 7 of the actuator 1 20 1 Parts 224, 2 2 5 will bend towards each other. In this embodiment, when the shuttle 10 9 is moved from its starting position to its extended position and the second movable electrode assembly 2 0 9 is a comb-shaped finger member 2 1 1, 2 1 2 and the second fixed electrode group This paper size is suitable for H® home (CNS M4 specification (210XW7 mm) -96- 419602 A7 B7 Printed bags of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Central Bureau of Standards and Consumer Goods Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the Invention (94) Piece 2 3 0 When electrostatically meshed and then overlapped, the 'spring 2 1 7 will stretch from its pre-curved start position to linear position. Similarly, when shuttle 10 moves from its starting position to its retracted position and the first movable electrode assembly 2 0 8 is a comb-shaped finger member 2 1 1, 2 1 2 and the first fixed electrode assembly 2 When 10 engages and then overlaps, the spring 2 1 4 will stretch from its pre-curved starting position to a linear position. In each case, when the spring portions 2 2 4 and 2 2 5 of the individual springs are perpendicular to When the individual comb drive finger members 2 1 1 become linear in the direction, the lateral rigidity of the spring portions 2 2 4 and 2 2 5 of the individual springs will be perpendicular to the individual comb drive finger members 2 1 1 Increase in direction. In this way, the lateral rigidity of the individual springs and the lateral restoring force exerted by these springs on these comb drive finger members 2 1 1 will increase as a function of the amount of overlap between the comb drive finger members 211'212. When these comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 1, 2 1 2 become finger combinations, the springs 2 1 4, 2 1 7 are thus used to drive the comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 1 to the adjacent The comb-shaped drive means a stable position midway between the members 212. Although, when the springs 214, 2 1 7 are deflected in one direction, they will be straightened, but when the shuttle 1 9 is moved in the opposite direction, the spring portions 2 2 4 and 2 2 5 will be further from their rest positions. Bend towards each other. A second set of folded cantilever beams or springs 5 6 1 and 5 6 2 are set in the actuators 1 2 0 1. They are actually similar to the springs 214 and 217 in size and composition. Each spring 561, 562 is coupled at its first end 5 6 3 to the base 2 1 3 and at its second end 5 > 4 is coupled to the shuttle 1 09. Each group of springs 56 1, 562 includes bends made by fold-man ------------ install-{Please read the precautions on the back first to write this page) -4¾ Harness paper dimensions use China a Home Standard (CMS) A4 specification (210X297 mm). 97 ^ Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Bureau of Work and Consumer Cooperation, Du Du, V. Description of the Invention (95) Part 5 6 8 The first and second sets of joints The parallel spring portions 566, 567 »When in the relaxed position, the springs 56 1, 5 6 2 actually extend perpendicular to the direction of movement of the electrode assemblies 2 0, 2 0 9. More specifically, as shown in the figure As shown in Figure 3, when the shuttle 10 is in a rest condition halfway between its retracted and extended positions, the spring portions 5 6 6 and 5 6 7 will bend apart from each other. When the first movable electrode When the overlap of the component 2 0 8 and the comb-shaped finger member 2 1 of the first fixed electrode component 2 0 increases and the shuttle 1 9 moves to its retracted position, the spring 5 6 2 is designed to stretch To the linear position. Similarly, when the comb-shaped finger members 2 1 1 and 2 1 2 of the second movable electrode assembly 2 9 and the second fixed electrode assembly 2 3 0 move to their extensions When set, the spring 5 6 1 is designed to stretch to a linear position. Although the springs 56 1 and 562 will straighten when deflected in one direction, when the shuttle 109 moves in the opposite direction, the spring portions 566, 567 will bend more away from each other from their rest position. Springs 5 6 1, 5 6 2 operate in the same manner as described above with respect to springs 2 1 4, 2 1 7. Springs 2 1 7, 56 1 is a comb-shaped drive assembly 2 0 9 and 2 3 0 disposed on one side of the drive bar 1 202, and springs 214 and 562 are comb-shaped drive disposed on the other side of the drive bar 1202 The opposite ends of the components 208, 2 1 0. The first end portions 243, 563 of the springs 2 14, 217, 561, 562 are fixed to the base 2 1 in a manner close to the central longitudinal axis 1 2 0 3 3. The spring 2 1 7, 5 6 1 is a hard support 1 2 1 0 (read the notes on the back before reading '^ write this page) !, I i · -l · _ This paper size GM China's 8 standard labels (〇 阳 > 八 4 祝 格 (2 丨 0 > < 297mm) -98- 4 1.9602 : A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (96) connected to their individual discounts The parts 2 4 5 and 5 6 8 are actually similar to the hard support 1 3 1 and extend between the folded parts 245 and 568 and are parallel to the drive bar 1202. The spring 2 1 4, 5 6 2 are connected to their individual folding sections 245, 568 by hanging rigid support members 1 2 1 2. The support member 1210 is actually similar to the hard support member 1 3 1 at the folded portion. Parts 2 4 5 and 5 6 8 extend between and parallel to the driving bar 1 2 0 2. In an embodiment of the four springs of the actuator 1 2 0 1, one of the pair of springs bent at each end of the actuator 5 0 1 2 1 4 or 5 6 1 and 2 1 7 or 5 6 2 will Preferably straightened and another curved spring pair will bend at each deflection limit of the movable electrode assemblies 208, 209 and shuttle 109. The springs 214 '217, 561, 562 and shuttle 109 have high out-of-plane rigidity as described above. Printed by the Central Laboratories of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative (please read the note on the back, please write this page) Actuator 1 2 0 1 can be operated in a similar way to the actuator 5 0 1 described above . Use or drive the forward or upper end of the strip 1 2 0 2 to exert force or provide movement to the appropriate object. "As the lateral deflection of the comb drive members 208, 209 increases, the springs 214, 217, 5 6 1, 5 The stable lateral force provided by 62 increases faster than the electrostatic lateral force generated between the finger-shaped comb-shaped driving finger members 2 1 1 and 2 1 2. In the embodiment shown in Fig. 34, as the lateral deflection increases, the stable lateral force increases at least ten times faster than the electrostatic lateral force. The configuration of the comb drive assembly on the two sides of the drive bar 1 2 0 2 will increase the force of the actuator 1 2 0 1 but will not increase the length of the actuator and the length of the drive bar 1 2 0 2 Paper size adopts China National Standard (CNS > A4 specification (210X297mm) -99- 41 9 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Sample Rate Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Industrial and Commercial Cooperative Cooperatives) V. Description of invention (97) Backward or shrinking The action limiting mechanism or limiter 1 2 1 6 will be set on the rear end of the drive bar 1 2 0 2. When the shuttle 1 9 is in its retracted position, it will be fixed on the base 2 1 3 by chewing. Piece 1 2 1 6. It should be understood that the actuator 1 2 0 1 may be provided with or without the pliers 4 2 0, 4 2 1 and / or other features described in relation to the actuators described above and in the present invention. Within range. Figure 35 shows another embodiment of the optical micro switch using the actuator of the present invention. Among them, the optical micro switch 1 3 0 1 is formed by a microchip 1 302 and has a single input port 1 303, a single input port 1 3 0 3 is coupled to at least one input optical carrier element or optical fiber 98 on the micro chip 1 3 02. One side of the micro chip 1 302 extends Individual suitable optical components such as single-mode polarization maintaining (PM) fiber 9 7 are provided. Only part of fiber 97, 98 shown in Fig. 35 * Microchip 1 3 0 2 has a channel opening at input port 1 3 0 3 Or groove 1 3 0 7 to receive the input fiber 9 8 and a channel or groove 1 3 0 8 having a micro switch 1 3 0 1 at the outlet port 1 3 0 1 to receive each output fiber 9 7. The vertical axis 1 3 1 1 extends along the channel 1312 of the optical switch 1301 and extends parallel to the inlet port 1303 and perpendicular to the outlet port 1304. * Many two actuators 1 0 0 1 will be arranged along the dotted line. In the longitudinally spaced position, the dotted line extends parallel to and spaced from the longitudinal axis 1311. Both the first and second actuators 1001 have a mirror 103, and the mirror 103 is at a 4 5 β angle with respect to the longitudinal axis 1 3 1 1 Tilt to guide the appropriate input such as the linearly polarized laser light 1 9 1 provided by the entrance fiber 9 8 --H ----------- (Please read the precautions on the back, -Λ · write (This page)

.1T 線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS > Α4规格(210X297公釐).1〇〇 經濟部中夬橾率局負工消费合作社印装 4 1 9 ι 一 ‘ kl _B7_五、發明説明(98 ) 雷射光經過90°角。每一致動器10 01的鏡103會 安裝於托架2 1 9上且將雷射光向致動器1 0 0 1的前方 引導經過個別的出口埠1 304 ’出口埠1 304係配置 成相對縱軸與致動器1 0 0 1相對。鏡1 0 3均可由個別 的致動器1 0 0 1的梭7 1 2在第一或縮回位置與第二或 延伸位置之間移動,在第一或縮回位置中,鏡1 0 3係離 開雷射光1 9 1的路徑,在第二或延伸位置中’鏡1 0 3 係處於雷射光1 9 1的路徑中。固定的止動件2 9 2、 2 9 3會限制梭7 1 2的移動以決定鏡1 0 3的縮回及延 伸位置。應瞭解,光學開關8 3 0可設有致動器1 00 1 以將雷射光191導引回至致動器且在本發明的範圍之內 實際上類似於·鏡1 0 3之鏡1 3 1 6會藉由第一與第 二致動器1 0 0 1的鏡1 0 3之後方位於通道1 3 1 2的 頂部上的托架1 3 1 7剛性地安裝至微晶片1 3 0 2 *鏡 1 3 1 6會以實際上同於鏡1 0 3之方式操作並當第一及. 第二致動器1 0 0 1的鏡1 0 3均處於縮回位置中時•用 以將雷射光偏轉經過第三輸出埠1 3 0 4。諸如傳統的微 小陡度折射率準直透鏡1 0 2等適當的透鏡會配置於輸入 埠1303的內部且透鏡102會配置於每一鏡103、 1 3 1 6與個別的溝槽1 3 0 3的入口之間 '微型開關 1 3 0 1與其致動器1 0 0 1係以同於上述有關致動器中 所述之方式由具有基底213之矽晶圓所你成。 雖然將光學微型開關1 3 0 1說明成使用二個靜電微 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4规格(210X297公釐)·仙_~~ ---------^------,*τ------0 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項-ί:寫本頁) A7 B7 419602 五、發明说明(99 ) (請先W讀背面之注意事項辱填寫本頁) 致動器1 0 0 1,但是,應瞭解,可提供類似於微型開關 1 3 0 1或此處所述的任何開關且具有小於二個或多於二 個此處所述的型式或其它型式之微型致動器之任何開關且 在本發明的範圍之內。 由上述可知,所提供的光學開關或微型開關係利用至 少一靜電微型致動器,此靜電微型致動器具有至少一梳型 驅動組件於其中^在一簡單的實施例中(未顯示),其微 型開關設有單一的靜電微型致動器。在梳型驅動組件中的 側向不穩定力會最小化且利用梳型驅動組件的共振特徵以 取得大偏轉》在數個實施例中,眾多靜電微型致動器會延 著微型開關的至少一通道對齊。光學開關可用於磁光資料 儲存系統。 經濟部中夬橾準局貝工消费合作杜印裝 雖然已於此參考梳型驅動微型致動器的特定實施例及 利用梳型驅動微型致動器之光學微型開關的特定實施例, 說明本發明,但是,發明係範圍寬廣至足以包含修改、改 變及取代上述揭示的範圍之實施例。某些實施例的特徵可 以與其它實施例結合且在發明的範圍之內。此外•上述鉗 制電極、剛性電極及其它相關的元件,可個別地或集體地 被用於致動器中之外的它處》此處所揭示的微型開關可使 用不具有梳型驅動組件之致動器。此外’此處所揭示的任 —微型開關可以與多種其它微型致動器—起使用°上述均 可用於磁光資料儲存及取還系統中或是包含電信系統及網 路系統等多種其它系統中。 ‘ 本紙張尺度遑用中國困家榡準{ CNS > Α4规格(210Χ297公釐)_ <|〇2 _.1T line paper size is applicable to Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 size (210X297mm). 100 printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, China ’s Bureau of Labor and Consumer Cooperatives 4 1 9 ι 1 'kl _B7_ Description of the invention (98) The laser light passes through an angle of 90 °. The mirror 103 of each actuator 10 01 is mounted on the bracket 2 1 9 and guides the laser light to the front of the actuator 1 0 0 1 through the individual exit port. 1 304 'Exit port 1 304 is configured to be opposed to the actuator 1 0 0 1 with respect to the longitudinal axis. The mirror 1 0 3 can be used by the individual actuator 1 0 0 1 shuttle 7 1 2 in the first or retracted position And the second or extended position, in the first or retracted position, the mirror 1 0 3 is the path away from the laser light 1 9 1, in the second or extended position, the 'mirror 1 0 3 is in the laser light 1 9 1 in the path. The fixed stopper 2 9 2, 2 9 3 will restrict the movement of the shuttle 7 1 2 to determine the retracted and extended position of the mirror 103. It should be understood that the optical switch 8 30 can be provided with a Actuator 1 00 1 to direct the laser light 191 back to the actuator and within the scope of the present invention is actually similar to the mirror 1 0 3 and the mirror 1 3 1 6 is actuated by the first and second Device 1 0 0 1 Mirror 1 0 3 Behind the top of the channel 1 3 1 2 The bracket 1 3 1 7 is rigidly mounted to the microchip 1 3 0 2 * Mirror 1 3 1 6 will be virtually the same as the mirror 1 0 3 mode operation and when the mirrors 1 0 3 of the first and second actuators 1 0 0 1 are both in the retracted position • used to deflect the laser light through the third output port 1 3 0 4. Appropriate lenses such as the traditional micro-steep refractive index collimating lens 1 0 2 will be placed inside the input port 1303 and the lens 102 will be placed in each mirror 103, 1 3 1 6 and an individual groove 1 3 0 3 Between the entrance of the 'micro switch 1 3 0 1 and its actuator 1 0 0 1 are made of a silicon wafer with a substrate 213 in the same manner as described above for the actuator. Although the optical micro switch 1 3 0 1 indicates that the size of two electrostatic micro-papers is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) · xian _ ~~ --------- ^ ------, * τ ------ 0 (please read the precautions on the back-ί: write this page) A7 B7 419602 V. Description of the invention (99) (please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page first) Actuation器 1 0 0 1 However, it should be understood that classes can be provided Any switch similar to a miniature switch 1 3 0 1 or any switch described herein and having less than two or more than two types or other types of micro actuators described herein and is within the scope of the present invention Inside. It can be known from the above that the provided optical switch or micro-opening relationship utilizes at least one electrostatic micro-actuator. The electrostatic micro-actuator has at least one comb-type driving assembly therein. In a simple embodiment (not shown) Its micro switch is equipped with a single electrostatic micro actuator. The lateral instability force in the comb drive assembly is minimized and the resonance characteristics of the comb drive assembly are used to obtain a large deflection. In several embodiments, many electrostatic microactuators will extend at least one of the microswitches. Channel alignment. Optical switches can be used in magneto-optical data storage systems. Although the reference of the specific embodiment of the comb drive micro-actuator and the specific embodiment of the optical micro switch using the comb drive micro-actuator, The invention, however, is an embodiment that is broad enough to encompass modifications, variations, and substitutions of the scope disclosed above. The features of some embodiments may be combined with other embodiments and are within the scope of the invention. In addition, the clamping electrodes, rigid electrodes and other related components described above can be used individually or collectively in other parts of the actuator. The microswitches disclosed here can be actuated without comb drive components. Device. In addition, any of the micro switches disclosed herein can be used with a variety of other micro actuators. The foregoing can be used in magneto-optical data storage and retrieval systems or in various other systems including telecommunication systems and network systems. ‘This paper is based on China ’s standards {CNS > Α4 size (210 × 297 mm) _ < | 〇2 _

Claims (1)

經濟部中央標隼局負工消费合作社印装 4 1 9 6 Ο 2」镒 發 α _ D8 六、申請專利範圍 1 .—種光學微Μ開關,用於延著路徑延伸之雷射光 ,包括具有接收雷射光之入口埠及眾多出口埠之本體、由 該本體承載之多個鏡子、由該本髏承載之多個微型馬達、 附著機構、及控制器,該附著機構係用以將該多個鏡子稱 合至個別的多個微型馬達,因此,該微型馬達可選擇性地 將鏡子從離開雷射光路徑之第一位置移動至進入雷射光的 Ψ 路徑之第二位置以將雷群光導引至出口埠之一,每一微型 馬達均於其中具有至少一靜電驅動的梳型驅動組件以將個 別的馬達移動至第一與二位置中之一,該控制器係電耦合 至微型馬達以提供控制訊號給該微型馬達· 2 .如申請專利範圍第1項之光學微型開關,結合多 個磁光碟片表面、多個飛行讀寫頭及多個輸出載光元件, 每一飛行讀寫頭均可在磁光碟片表面之一上移動且輸出載 光元件之一會耦合至每一飛行讀寫頭。 3 .如申請專利範圍第2項之光學微型開關,其中該 多個磁光碟表面包含磁光碟片堆叠,每一磁光碟片均具有 至少一磁光碟片表面。 4 .如申請專利範圍第2項之光學微型開關,其中雷 射光係由磁光碟片表面之一反射以產生具有偏振旋轉之反 射雷射光*進一步包括由該本體承載之光學組件以量測反 射雷射光的偏振旋轉。 5 .如申請專利範圍第1項之光學微型開關,其中該 多個鏡子及多個微型致動器包含第一多個鏡子及對應的微 型馬達以及第二多個鏡子和對應的微型馬達,該雷射光的 -----------裝----7Ϊ訂------線 (請先W讀背面之注意寧項再本頁) 本紙诔尺度邊用中困國家椹準{ CNS ) A4洗格(公藿) -103- 419602 A8 Ββ C8 D8 經濟部中夹揉隼局βζ工消费合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 路徑可以在第一多個微型馬達與第二多個微型馬達之間延 伸以致於第一多個微型馬達與第二多個微型馬達會相對於 該雷射光的路徑而互相面對。 6.如申請專利範園第5項之光學微型開關,其中第 一多個鏡子及對應的微型馬達係延著第一虛線線性地配置 而第二多個鏡子及對應的微型馬達係延著第二虛線線性地 配置,該第二虛線係平行於該第一虛線及雷射光路徑延伸 〇 7 .如申請專利範圍第5項之光學微型開關,其中第 一多個微型馬達包含至少二微型馬達,該二微型馬達係延 著第一虛線以側邊接側邊之方式配置,該第一虛線係垂直 於雷射光的路徑延伸,第二多個微型馬達包含至少二微型 馬達,該二微型馬達係延著第二虛線以側邊接側邊之方式 配置,該第二虛線係垂直於雷射光的路徑延伸。 ·- -. 8 .如申請專利範圍第5項之光學微型開關,其中該 第一及第二多個鏡子均傾斜以將雷射光引導於一方向上》 9.如申請專利範圍第5項之光學微型開關,其中該 多個鏡子及多個微型馬達包含第三多個鏡子和對應的微型 馬達以及第四多個鏡子和對應的微型馬達,雷射光路徑可 在第三多個微型馬達與第四多個微型馬達之間延伸,以致 於第三多個微型馬達與第四多個微型馬達會相對於雷射光 路徑而互相面對,包含增加的鏡子及對應的增加微型馬達 之機構係用以選擇性地導引雷射光延著第i路徑及第二路 徑,第一路徑係在第一與第二多個微型馬達之間延伸,第 --^--^-----裝----.--;訂------線 {諸先《讀背面之注意事項«.窝本頁) ______ 1--.' 本纸張尺度逋Λ中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4*l格(210X297公釐) -104- Λ8 BS C8 D8 419602 六、申請專利範圍 二路徑係在第三與第四多個微型馬達之間延伸。 1 0 .如申請專利範圍第9項之光學微型開關,其中 第一和第二多個鏡子以及第三和第四多個鏡子係傾斜的以 將雷射光導引於一方向上。 1 1 .如申請專利範圔第1項之光學微型開關,其中 該多個鏡子及多個微型馬達包含至少一第一鏡子及對應的 第一微型馬達以及至少一第二鏡子和對應的第二微型馬達 ,雷射光的路徑可在至少一第一微型馬達與至少一第二微 型馬達之間延伸,以致於至少一第一微型馬達與至少一第 二微型馬達會相對於雷射光的路徑而相互面對,及其中多 個鏡子和多個微型馬達進一步包含至少一第三鏡子和對應 的第三微型馬達以及至少一第四鏡子和對應的第四微型馬 達,雷射光的路徑可在至少一第三微型馬達與至少一第四 微型馬達之間延伸,以致於至少一第三微型馬達與至少一 第四微型馬達會相對於雷射光的路徑而相互面對,包含增 加的鏡子及對應增加的微型馬達之機構用於選擇性地導引 雷射光延著第一路徑及第二路徑,該第一路徑係在至$ — 第一微型馬達與至少一第二微型馬達之間延伸,該第二路 徑係在至少一第三微型馬達與至少一第四微型馬達之間延 伸。 1 2 .如申請專利範圍第1項之光學微型開關*其中 該多個微型馬達包含延著虛線以側邊接側邊方式配置的多 個至少二微型馬達,該虛線係垂直於雷光的路徑延伸β 1 3 .如申請專利範圍第1項之光學微型開關,其中 —l·,--------裝— (請先聞讀背面之注意事項孓本頁) 訂 線 經濟部中央橾率局負工消费合作社印製 本紙張尺度逋用中困國家揉率(CNS ) A4说格(210XM7公釐) -105- 41 9602 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部中央輮隼局員工消费合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 多個至-少十二個鏡子及對應的微型馬達係用於選擇性地將 雷射光導引至眾多平行方向。 1 4 .如申請專利範圍第1項之光學微型開關,其中 每一鏡子均包括矽層及黏著至該矽層之反射材料,因此該 矽層提供低粗糙度及高平坦度之表面。 1 5 .如申請專利範圍第14項之光學微型開關,其 中每一鏡子進一步包括覆蓋該反射材料層之至少一對介電 層’該至少一對介電層包含第一低介電材料層及第二高介 電材料層。 1 6 .如申請專利範圍第1項之光學微型開關,其中 至少一微型馬達包含止動機構,用以將對應的鏡子之移動 限制於第二位置,因此,止動機構可便於光學微型開關操 作時有重覆性。 17·如申請專利範圍第16項之光學微型開關,進 一步包括導線機構,用以將該止動件電連接至該控制器, 因此,該止動機構可允許該控制器監視鏡子何時處於第二 位置* 1 8 .—種光學微型開關,用於延著路徑延伸之雷射 光,包括具有眾多出口埠之本體、由該本體承載之多個鏡 子、耦合機構、及控制器,該耦合機構係耦合至每一鏡子 以在離開該雷射光路徑之第一位置與進入該雷射光路徑之 第二位置之間靜電地驅動鏡子,以便將雷射光選擇性地引 導至出口之一,該控制器電耦合至該耦合‘機構以提供電控 制訊號給該機構。 本纸浪尺度遑用中國«家橾準(CMS M4规格(210X297公釐)_ 1〇6 1Ί 1 n n n I u n —i ^ ' - . -(诗先M讀背面之注意事項耳本頁) Π 9 60 2 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 經濟部中央梂隼局貝工消费合作社印装 六、申請專利範固 1 9 .如申請專利範圍第1 8項之光學微型開關,結 合多個輸出載光元件、多個飛行讀寫頭及多個光碟表面, 該多個輸出載光元件係配置於該本體的個別出口處,用以 選擇性地接收雷射光,該多個飛行讀寫頭係可於個別的光 碟表面上移動的。 2 0 . —種靜電微型致動器,包括基底、至少一梳型 驅動組件、第一及第二間隔的 '樑狀彈簧構件,該至少一 梳型驅動組件具有第一和第二梳型驅動構件,每一該第一 及第二梳型驅動構件均設有梳型驅動指構件,該第一梳型 驅動構件係安裝於基底上,該至少一梳型驅動組件係配置 於該第一與第二樑狀彈簧構件之間,該第二梳型驅動構件 係覆於基底之上,每一該第一及第二樑狀構件均具有固定 至該基底之第一端部份及固定至該第二梳型驅動構件之第 二端部份以將該第二梳型驅動構件懸置於該基底之上,該 第二梳型驅動構件可在第一位置與第二位置之間移動,在 該第一位置中,該第一及第二梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指 構件係間隔的,在該第二位置中,該第一及第二梳型驅動 構件的梳型驅動指構件係指狀組合的。 2 1 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 其中該第一及第二劈狀彈簧構件均於垂直於第二梳型驅動 構件之移動方向上具有剛性,每一該第一及第二樑狀彈簧 構件可在第一位置與第二位置之間移動,在該第一位置中 ,該樑狀彈簧構件會處於非線性配置且當'該第二梳型驅動 構件處於該第一位置時發生,在該第二位匿中,該樑狀彈 請 先 聞 面 之 注 項 寫裝 本衣 訂 線 本紙張遑用中國«家#準(CNS ) A4洗格(210XM7公釐).1〇7_ 經濟部中央搮隼局J.工消费合作社印«. 419602 i H C8 ____ D8 六、申請專利範圍 簧構件會處於垂直於移動方向延伸之線性配置且當該第二 梳型驅動構件處於該第二位置時發生,因此,當第二梳型 驅動構件是在第二位置中時,在垂直於移動方向之方向上 的第一及第二樑狀彈簧構件的剛性會最大。 2 2 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 其中該第二梳型驅動構件藉由該第一和第二樑狀彈簧構件 而單獨地固定於該基底。 2 3 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 其中該第二梳型驅動構件在該第一和第二樑狀彈簧構件的 力量之下可從該第二位置移動至該第一位置,該微犁致_動 器不用具有增加的梳型驅動組件,該增加的梳型驅動組件 具有第一及第二梳型驅動構件,該第一及第二梳型驅動構 件具有個別的梳型驅動指構件,其中該增加的梳型驅動組 件的該第二梳型驅動構件可移動至一位置,在該位置中· 當該首先提到的梳型驅動組件的梳型驅動指構件是相間隔 時,該增加的梳型驅動組件的該梳型驅動指構件係指狀組 合的。 2 4 .如申請專利範圔第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括第一及第二靜電鉗制電極,該第一及第二靜電 鉗制電極於垂直於該第二梳型驅動構件的移動方向延伸’ 該第一及第二鉗制電極可在第一位置與第二位置之間移動 ,在該第一位置中,鉗制電極是相閭隔的且發生於該第二 梳型驅動構件處於該第二位置時,在該第土位置中,該鉗 制電極是彼此緊密地接近且發生於該第二梳型驅動構件處 本紙浪尺度適用中SB家樣準< CNS } Α4规格(210X297公釐)^~,1〇g. — ^--------^------,ΤΓ------^ - - -(請先閲讀背面之注意事項¾..-寫本頁) 經濟部中央揉率局負工消费合作杜印策 經濟部中央揉牟局負工消费合作社印裝 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 於該第一位置時,因此,當施加電壓至配置於彼此緊密地 接近之該第二位置中的鉗制電極之間時,鉗制電極可便於 將該第二梳型驅動構件固持於該第一位置中》 2 5 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括增加的梳型驅動組件,該增加的梳型驅動組件 配置於該第一與第二樑狀彈簧構件之間且具有第一及第二 梳型驅動構件,該增加的梳型驅動組件的第一及第二梳_ 驅動構件均設有梳型驅動指構件,該增加的梳型驅動組# 之第一梳型驅動構件安裝於該基底上,該增加的梳型驅動 組件之第二梳型驅動構件覆蓋於該基底上且藉由該第一及 第二樑狀彈簧構件而懸置於該基底之上,該、增加的梳型驅 動組件之第二可在第一位置與第二位置、之間移動,在該第 一位置中,該增加的梳型驅動組件之第一及第二梳型驅動 構件的梳型驅動指構件是相間隔的,在該第二位置中,該 增加的梳型驅動組件之第一及第二梳型驅動構件的梳型驅 動指構件是指狀組合的,,當該第一次提到的梳型驅動組 件的第二梳型驅動構件處於該第一位置時,該增加的梳型 驅動組件之第二梳型驅動構件是在該第二位置。 2 6 .如申請專利範圍第2 5項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括垂直於該第二梳型驅動構件的移動方向延伸之 第一及第二組靜電鉗制電極,每一該第一及第二組鉗制電 極均具有第一及第二鉗制電極,該第一及第二鉗制電極可 第一位置與第二位置之間移動,在該第一位置中,鉗制電 極是相間隔的’在該第二位置中,鉗制電極是彼此緊密接 本纸張尺度逋用中國國家揉率(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐)_ 1〇g _ 4 9602 ‘ ϋ C8 _. _ D8 六、申請專利範園 近’當該首先提到的梳型驅動組件的第二梳型驅動構件處 於該第一位置時,第一組的鉗制電極是彼此緊密接近,當 該增加的梳型驅動組件的第二梳型驅動構件在該第一位置 時’第二組的鉗制電極是彼此緊密接近,因此*當電壓施 加至彼此緊密接近之該第二位置中的鉗制電極之間時,每 一組鉗制電極均可便於固持該第二梳型驅動構件於它們的 個別第一位置中。 2 7 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括通常關閉以將該第二驅動構件鎖在其第一及第 二位置中之微型致動器。 2 8 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 其中每一該第一及第二梳型驅動構件之梳型驅動指構件均 具有近端及遠端部份|每一近端部份均具有寬度且每一遠 端具有之寬度均小於個別近端部份的寬度。 2 9 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器· 其中該第一及第二梳型驅動構件的至少一者之梳型驅動指 構件具有不同的長度β 3 0 .如申請專利範園第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括止動構件*用以將該第二梳型驅動構件的移動 限制於該第二位置,因此,該止動構件便於微型致動器操 作的重覆性。 3 1 .如申請專利範圍第3 0項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括控制器及導線機構|該導線機_件用以將該止 動機構電連接至該控制器,因此,該止動機構可允許該控 -----r----;--裝-------^訂-----:1 線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項异呔寫本頁) 經濟部中央標準局Λ工消t-合作社印$. 本紙張尺度適用中國國家輮準(CNS ) A4洗格(210X297公* ) .11〇_ 419602 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範園 制器監視該第二梳型驅動構件何時位於該第二位置。 3 2 ♦如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器· 其中該第二梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指構件可在半行程中 從第一位置移動至第二位置及移動至第三位置,在該第一 位置中,該第一及第二梳型驅動構件之梳型驅動指構件是 相間隔的,在該第二位置中,該梳型驅動指構件是部份地 指狀組合,在該第三位置中,該梳型驅動指構件是完全地 指狀組合,控制器包含機構以在僅有一部份半行程期間提 供電壓至該第一與第二梳型驅動構件之間,以驅動該第二 梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指構件至該第三位置。 3 3 .如申請專利範圍第3 2項之靜電微型2致動器 *其中該控制器包含機構,以便當該梳型驅動指構件部份 地嚙合但在該梳型驅動指構件完全地嚙合之前,提供電壓 至該第一與第二梳型驅動構件之間。 3 4 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括鏡子及附著機構•該附著機構用以將該鏡子耦 合至該至少一梳型驅動組件,該附著機構包含托架構件, 該托架構件設有位於其中之凹壁,該鏡子具有設於其上之 樁部份以配置於該凹壁中而便於該鏡子在該托架構件上對 齊。 3 5 .如申請專利範圍第2 0項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括鏡子及附著機構,該附著機構用以將該鏡子耦 合至該至少一梳型驅動組件’該附著機梢ί包含設有容器以 容納該鏡子之托架構件、用以將該鏡子固定於該容器之內 本紙浪又度逋用中B a家橾车(CNS > A4規格(210X 297公釐)_ jj, —卜—-------装------訂------線 (請先聞讀背面之注^項4"罵本頁} 經濟部中央標率扃負工«费合作社印$L 419602 AS B8 Μ濟部中央糅率局Λ工消费合作社印It 六、申請專利範圍 的黏著機構、及可移動地安裝於該基底上以在固定期間將 該鏡子固持於該容器中之固持構件。 3 Θ ·—種操作梳型驅動組件之方法,該梳型驅動組 件具有第一和第二梳型驅動構件,該第一和第二梳型驅動 構件具有個別的梳型驅動指構件,其中該第二梳型驅動構 件可相對於該第一梳型驅動構件而在第一位置與第二位置 之間移動,在該第一位置中,該第一及第二梳型驅動構件 的梳型驅動指構件是相間隔的,在該第二位置中,該第一 及第二梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指構件是指狀組合的,該 方法包括以共振方式振盪該第二梳型驅動構件以將該第二 梳型驅動構件移動至該第二位置及將該第二梳型驅動構件 固持於該第二位置中β 3 7 .如申請專利範圍第3 6項之方法,其中該固持 步驟包含藉由靜電力將該第二梳型驅動構件固持於該第二 位置中。 3 8 .如申請專利範圍第3 7項之方法,其中該固持 步驟包含藉由機械力將該第二梳型驅動構件固持於該第二 位置中。' 3 9 .如申請專利範圍第3 8項之方法,進一步包括 釋放步驟,用以將該第二梳型驅動構件從該第二位置釋放 ,以允許該第二梳型驅動構件移動至該第一位置β 4 0 . —種靜電微型致動器,包括基底、至少一梳型 驅動組件、及至少一樑狀彈簧構件’該至少一梳型驅動組 件具有第一和第二梳型驅動構件,每一該第一及第二梳型 IK--1-----裝------訂------線 - (請先閲讀背面之注意事項',寫本頁) 本纸張尺度逋用中8«家揉準(《:阳)入4规格(210乂297公*) _112, A8 B8 C8 D8 41PB02 六、申請專利範圍 {請先W讀背面之注意事項再Λ^本頁) 驅動構件均設有梳型驅動指構件,該第一梳型驅動構件係 安裝於基底上,該第二梳型驅動構件係覆於基底之上,該 至少一樑狀彈簧構件具有固定至該基底之第一端部份及固 定至該第二梳型驅動構件之第二端部份,該第二梳型驅動 構件可在第一位置與第二位置之間的方向上移動,在該第 一位置中,該第一及第二梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指構件 實際上未完全地指狀組合,在該第二位置中,該第一及第 二梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指構件實際上完全地指狀組合 ,該至少一樑狀彈簧構件在垂直於該第二梳型驅動構件的 移動方向之方向上具有剛性且可在第一位置與第二位置之 間移動*在該第一位置中,該至少一樑狀彈簧構件是處於 非線性配置且發生於該第二梳型驅動構件在該第一位置時 ,在該第二位置中,該至少一樑狀彈簧構件是處於垂直於 移動方向延伸之縝性配置且發生於該第二梳型驅動構件在 該第二位置時*因此,在垂直於移動方向之方向上的該至 少一樑狀彈簧構件的剛性會隨著該第二梳型驅動構件從其 第一位置移動至其第二位置時增加。 鐘濟部中央橾牵局Λ工消费合作社印裝 4 1 .如申請專利範圍第4 0項之靜電微型致動器, 其中該第二梳型驅動構件可在第一位置與第二位置之間移 動•在該第一位置中,該第一及第二梳型驅動構件的梳型 驅動指構件是相間隔的,在該第二位置中,該第一及第二 梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指構件實際上完全地指狀組合。 4 2 .如申請專利範圔第4 1項之靜亀微型致動器· 進一步包括增加的樑狀彈簧構件,該增加的樑狀彈簧構件 本紙浪尺度適用中國國家揉準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐) -113- 經濟部中失揉率局I工消費合作社印装 A8!! D8六、申請專利範圍 具有固定至該基底之第一端部份及固定至該第二梳型驅動 構件之第二端部份,該增加的樑狀彈簧構件於垂直於該第 二梳型驅動構件的移動方向之方向上具有剛性且可在第一 位匱與第二位置之間择動,在該第一位置中,該增加的樑 狀彈簧構件是處於非線性配置且發生於該第二梳型驅動構 件處於該第一位置中時,在該第二位置中,該增加的樑狀 彈簧構件是處於垂直於移動方向延伸之線性配置且發生於 該第二梳型驅動構件處於該第二位置時。 4 3 .如申請專利範圍第4 1項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括垂直於該第二梳型驅動構件的移動方向延伸之 第一及第二靜電鉗制電極,該第一及第二鉗制電極可在第 一位置與第二位置之間移動,在該第一位置中,鉗制電極 是相間隔的且發生於該第二梳型驅動構件處於第二位置時 ,在第二位置中,鉗制電極是彼此緊密地接近且發生於該 第二梳型驅動構件處於該第一位置時,因此,當施加電壓 至配置於第二位置之彼此緊密接近的鉗制電極之間時,鉗 制電極可便於固持該第二梳型驅動構件於該第一位置中。 4 4 · 一種靜電微型致動器,包括基底、至少一梳型 驅動組件、及彈簧機構,該至少一梳型驅動組件具有第一 和第二梳型驅動構件,每一該第一及第二梳型驅動構件均 設有梳型驅動指構件,該第一梳型驅動構件係安裝於基底 上,該第二梳型驅動構件係覆於基底之上且可在第一位置 與第二位置之間的方向上移動,在該第‘一位置中,該第一 及第二梳型驅動構件的梳型驅動指構件實際上未完全地指 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度逍用令國國家嫖率(CNS ) A4規格< 210X297公釐)_ ”4 «濟部中央標隼烏員工消费合作社印製 19 60 2 ?88 D8六、申請專利範圍 狀組合*在該第二位置中,該第一及第二梳型驅動構件的 梳型驅動指構件實際上完全地指狀組合,該彈簧機構具有 固定至該逃底之第一端部份及固定至該第二梳型驅励構件 之第二端部份,用以在匪直於該第二梳型驅動構件的移動 方向之方向上提供剛性,該剛性會隨著該第二梳型驅動構 件從其第一位置移動至其第二位置時增加。 4 5 .如中請專利範圍第4 4項之靜電微型致動器, 進一步包括機構,該機構離開該第一及第二梳型驅励構件 ,用以將該第二梳型驅動構件靜電地固定於該第一位置中 0 4 6 .如申請專利範圍第4 5項之靜電微型致動器| 其:中該用以將第二梳型驅動構件靜電地固持於第一位置中 的機構包含第一及第二鉗制電極,該第一及第二鉗制電極 可在第·位置與第二位置之間移動,在該第一位置中,鉗 制電極是相間隔的丨1發生於該第二梳型驅動構件位於該第 二位匱時,在該第二位置中,鉗制電極是彼此緊密地接近 且發生於該第二梳型驅動構件處於該第一位置時^ (铕先W#背面之注意事項存靖寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國因家標率(CNS ) Λ4現格(210X297公釐) -115-Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives 4 1 9 6 Ο 2 ″ issued α _ D8 VI. Patent Application Scope 1. A type of optical micro M switch for laser light extending along the path, including The body of an inlet port and a plurality of outlet ports that receive laser light, a plurality of mirrors carried by the body, a plurality of micromotors carried by the skeleton, an attachment mechanism, and a controller, the attachment mechanism is used to connect the multiple The mirror is coupled to a plurality of individual micro motors. Therefore, the micro motor can selectively move the mirror from the first position leaving the laser light path to the second position entering the laser light Ψ path to guide the laser light. To one of the outlet ports, each micromotor has at least one electrostatically driven comb drive assembly to move the individual motor to one of the first and second positions. The controller is electrically coupled to the micromotor to provide The control signal is given to the micro-motor. 2. For example, the optical micro-switch of the first scope of the patent application, combining multiple magneto-optical disc surfaces, multiple flying read-write heads, and multiple output light-carrying elements, each Line head can be moved in the one surface of the magneto-optical disc contained in one of the optical element and the output will be coupled to each of the flying head. 3. The optical micro switch according to item 2 of the patent application, wherein the surfaces of the plurality of magneto-optical discs include a magneto-optical disc stack, and each magneto-optical disc has at least one magneto-optical disc surface. 4. The optical micro switch according to item 2 of the patent application scope, wherein the laser light is reflected by one of the surfaces of the magneto-optical disc to generate the reflected laser light with polarization rotation * further comprising an optical component carried by the body to measure the reflected laser The polarization of the incident light is rotated. 5. The optical micro switch according to item 1 of the patent application scope, wherein the plurality of mirrors and the plurality of micro actuators include a first plurality of mirrors and corresponding micro motors, and a second plurality of mirrors and corresponding micro motors, the Laser light --------------------------- 7-line order (please read the note on the back first, and then this page). This paper is used for countries with difficulty in measuring the edge.椹 准 {CNS) A4 wash grid (public) -103- 419602 A8 Ββ C8 D8 Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau βζ 工 consuming cooperatives 6. The scope of patent application can be in the first multiple micromotors and the second The plurality of micromotors extend between such that the first plurality of micromotors and the second plurality of micromotors face each other with respect to the path of the laser light. 6. The optical micro switch according to item 5 of the patent application park, wherein the first plurality of mirrors and corresponding micro motors are linearly arranged along the first dotted line and the second plurality of mirrors and corresponding micro motors are extended along the first Two dashed lines are arranged linearly, and the second dashed line extends parallel to the first dashed line and the laser light path. For example, the optical micro switch of item 5 of the patent application scope, wherein the first plurality of micro motors includes at least two micro motors, The two micro motors are arranged side by side along the first dotted line, the first dotted line extends perpendicular to the path of the laser light, and the second plurality of micro motors includes at least two micro motors. The second dashed line is arranged side by side, and the second dashed line extends perpendicular to the path of the laser light. ·--. 8. If the optical micro switch of the scope of the patent application No. 5, wherein the first and second plurality of mirrors are inclined to guide the laser light to one side "9. If the optics of the scope of the patent application No. 5 The micro switch, wherein the plurality of mirrors and the plurality of micro motors include a third plurality of mirrors and corresponding micro motors, and a fourth plurality of mirrors and corresponding micro motors. The laser light path may be between the third plurality of micro motors and the fourth micro motor. The plurality of micromotors extend between the third micromotors and the fourth micromotors so as to face each other with respect to the laser light path. The mechanism including an additional mirror and a corresponding additional micromotor is used for selection. The laser light is guided linearly along the i-th path and the second path. The first path extends between the first and second micro motors. The first-^-^ ----- install --- -.--; Order ------ line {zhuxian "Precautions for reading the back«. Nest page) ______ 1--. 'This paper size 逋 Λ Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 * l Grid (210X297 mm) -104- Λ8 BS C8 D8 419602 6. The scope of patent application is in the third and fourth paths Extending between the micro-motor. 10. The optical micro switch according to item 9 of the patent application scope, wherein the first and second plurality of mirrors and the third and fourth plurality of mirrors are inclined to guide the laser light in one direction. 1 1. The optical micro switch according to item 1 of the patent application, wherein the plurality of mirrors and the plurality of micro motors include at least a first mirror and a corresponding first micro motor, and at least a second mirror and a corresponding second Micro-motor, the path of laser light may extend between at least one first micro-motor and at least one second micro-motor, so that at least one first micro-motor and at least one second micro-motor will be mutually relative to the path of laser light Faced with the plurality of mirrors and the plurality of micromotors further including at least a third mirror and a corresponding third micromotor, and at least a fourth mirror and a corresponding fourth micromotor, the path of the laser light may be at least one first The three micro motors extend between at least one fourth micro motor, so that at least one third micro motor and at least one fourth micro motor face each other with respect to the path of the laser light, including an increased mirror and a correspondingly increased micro The mechanism of the motor is used to selectively guide the laser light along the first path and the second path, the first path is from to — the first micromotor and the Extending between a second micro-motor, the second path based at least extends between at least a third and a fourth micromotor micromotor. 1 2. The optical micro switch according to item 1 of the scope of patent application *, wherein the plurality of micro motors include a plurality of at least two micro motors arranged side by side along a dotted line that extends perpendicular to the path of the light β 1 3. If the optical micro switch of item 1 of the scope of patent application, where -l ·, -------- installation-(please read the precautions on the back first) This page is the center of the Ministry of Economics Printed by the Bureau of Work and Consumer Cooperatives, printed on paper scales and used in poor countries (CNS) A4 format (210XM7 mm) -105- 41 9602 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Consumer Affairs Cooperative of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The scope of the patent application is that at least twelve mirrors and corresponding micromotors are used to selectively guide the laser light to a plurality of parallel directions. 14. The optical micro switch according to item 1 of the patent application scope, wherein each mirror includes a silicon layer and a reflective material adhered to the silicon layer, so the silicon layer provides a surface with low roughness and high flatness. 15. The optical micro switch according to item 14 of the scope of patent application, wherein each mirror further includes at least one pair of dielectric layers covering the reflective material layer. The at least one pair of dielectric layers includes a first low-dielectric material layer and Second layer of high dielectric material. 16. According to the optical micro switch of the first patent application range, at least one of the micro motors includes a stopper mechanism to limit the movement of the corresponding mirror to the second position. Therefore, the stopper mechanism can facilitate the operation of the optical micro switch. Repeated from time to time. 17. The optical micro-switch according to item 16 of the patent application, further comprising a wire mechanism for electrically connecting the stopper to the controller. Therefore, the stopper mechanism may allow the controller to monitor when the mirror is in the second position. Position * 1 8 .—An optical micro switch for laser light extending along a path, including a body with numerous exit ports, a plurality of mirrors carried by the body, a coupling mechanism, and a controller, the coupling mechanism is coupled To each mirror to electrostatically drive the mirror between a first position leaving the laser light path and a second position entering the laser light path to selectively direct the laser light to one of the exits, the controller is electrically coupled To the coupling 'mechanism to provide electrical control signals to the mechanism. The scale of this paper is in Chinese «Home Standard (CMS M4 Specification (210X297 mm) _ 1〇6 1Ί 1 nnn I un —i ^ '-.-(Notes on the back of Shixian M reading this page) Π 9 60 2 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 Printed by the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives 6. Application for patent Fangu 1 9. For example, the optical micro switch of the patent application No. 18, combined with multiple output light-carrying elements, multiple Flying read-write heads and multiple optical disc surfaces, the multiple output light-carrying elements are arranged at individual exits of the body to selectively receive laser light, and the multiple flying read-write heads can be mounted on individual optical discs 2 0. An electrostatic miniature actuator including a base, at least one comb-shaped drive assembly, and first and second spaced-apart beam-shaped spring members, the at least one comb-shaped drive assembly having a first and A second comb drive member, each of the first and second comb drive members is provided with a comb drive finger member, the first comb drive member is mounted on a base, and the at least one comb drive assembly is configured Between the first and second beam-shaped spring members, the Two comb-shaped driving members are covered on the base, and each of the first and second beam-shaped members has a first end portion fixed to the base and a second end portion fixed to the second comb-shaped driving member. The second comb-shaped driving member is suspended on the base, and the second comb-shaped driving member is movable between a first position and a second position. In the first position, the first and second The comb-shaped driving finger members of the two comb-shaped driving members are spaced apart, and in this second position, the comb-shaped driving finger members of the first and second comb-shaped driving members are finger-shaped combinations. 2 1. As patented The electrostatic micro-actuator of the range item 20, wherein the first and second split spring members are rigid in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the second comb-shaped driving member, and each of the first and second beam-shaped members is rigid. The spring member is movable between a first position and a second position, in which the beam-like spring member is in a non-linear configuration and occurs when the second comb drive member is in the first position, In the second place, please listen to the beam-like bullet first Item binding, clothing, binding, paper, China «家 # 准 (CNS) A4 wash grid (210XM7 mm). 1〇7_ Printed by the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs J. Industry and Consumer Cooperative«. 419602 i H C8 ____ D8 VI. Patent application scope The spring member will be in a linear configuration extending perpendicular to the moving direction and occurs when the second comb-type drive member is in the second position. Therefore, when the second comb-type drive member is in the second position The rigidity of the first and second beam-shaped spring members in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction will be the largest. 2 2. For example, the electrostatic micro-actuator of the scope of application for patent No. 20, wherein the second comb drive The members are individually fixed to the base by the first and second beam-like spring members. 2 3. The electrostatic micro-actuator according to item 20 of the patent application scope, wherein the second comb-shaped driving member is movable from the second position to the second force under the force of the first and second beam-shaped spring members. In the first position, the micro-plough actuator does not need to have an additional comb-type drive assembly, the additional comb-type drive assembly has first and second comb-type drive members, and the first and second comb-type drive members have individual Comb drive finger member, wherein the second comb drive member of the added comb drive assembly can be moved to a position in which the comb drive finger member of the first mentioned comb drive assembly When it is spaced apart, the comb-shaped driving finger member of the added comb-shaped driving assembly is a combination of fingers. 24. The electrostatic microactuator according to item 20 of the patent application, further comprising first and second electrostatic clamping electrodes, the first and second electrostatic clamping electrodes being perpendicular to the second comb-shaped driving member. Extending in the direction of movement 'The first and second clamp electrodes can be moved between a first position and a second position in which the clamp electrodes are spaced apart and occur when the second comb drive member is in In the second position, in the first soil position, the clamped electrodes are in close proximity to each other and occur at the second comb-shaped driving member. The paper wave standard is applicable in the SB home sample standard < CNS} Α4 size (210X297 male ^) ^ ~, 1〇g. — ^ -------- ^ ------, ΤΓ ------ ^---(Please read the notes on the back first ...- (Written on this page) The Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Affairs Cooperation Du Yince The Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Affairs Cooperatives printed A8 B8 C8 D8 6. When the scope of patent application is in this first position, therefore, when voltage is applied When the clamp electrodes are arranged between the clamp electrodes in the second position in close proximity to each other, the clamp electrodes can easily The two comb-type driving members are held in the first position. "2 5. If the electrostatic micro-actuator of item 20 of the patent application scope further includes an additional comb-type driving assembly, the additional comb-type driving assembly is arranged in the There are first and second comb-shaped drive members between the first and second beam-shaped spring members, and the first and second comb-drive members of the additional comb-shaped drive assembly are provided with comb-shaped drive finger members. The first comb-shaped driving member of the added comb-shaped driving group # is installed on the substrate, and the second comb-shaped driving member of the added comb-shaped driving assembly covers the substrate and passes through the first and second beams. The spring member is suspended on the base, and the second of the added comb drive assembly is movable between a first position and a second position. In the first position, the added comb drive assembly The comb drive finger members of the first and second comb drive members are spaced apart. In the second position, the comb drive fingers of the first and second comb drive members of the additional comb drive assembly are added. Component is a combination of fingers, when the first When the second comb drive member of the comb drive assembly mentioned at once is in the first position, the second comb drive member of the added comb drive assembly is in the second position. 26. The electrostatic miniature actuator according to item 25 of the patent application scope, further comprising first and second sets of electrostatic clamping electrodes extending perpendicular to the moving direction of the second comb drive member, each of the first and The second set of clamp electrodes each has a first and a second clamp electrode, and the first and second clamp electrodes are movable between a first position and a second position, in which the clamp electrodes are spaced apart from each other in the In this second position, the clamp electrodes are in close contact with each other on the paper scale. The Chinese national kneading rate (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _ 1〇g _ 4 9602 'ϋ C8 _. _ D8 VI. Patent application Fan Yuanjin 'When the first comb drive member of the comb drive assembly mentioned above is in the first position, the clamping electrodes of the first group are close to each other, and when the second comb drive assembly When the comb drive member is in the first position, the clamp electrodes of the second group are in close proximity to each other, so * when a voltage is applied between the clamp electrodes in the second position in close proximity to each other, each group of clamp electrodes is Easy to hold A second comb drive member to the respective first position thereof. 27. The electrostatic microactuator of claim 20, further comprising a microactuator that is normally closed to lock the second drive member in its first and second positions. 28. If the electrostatic miniature actuator of the scope of patent application No. 20, wherein each of the first and second comb-type driving members has a comb-shaped driving finger member having a proximal end and a distal end portion | each near The end portions have a width and each distal end has a width that is less than the width of the individual proximal portions. 2 9. The electrostatic miniature actuator according to the scope of patent application No. 20, wherein the comb-type driving finger members of at least one of the first and second comb-type driving members have different lengths β 3 0. Fanyuan's electrostatic microactuator of item 20 further includes a stopper member * to limit the movement of the second comb-type drive member to the second position, so the stopper member facilitates the operation of the microactuator. Repeatability. 31. If the electrostatic miniature actuator of the 30th scope of the patent application, further includes a controller and a wire mechanism | the wire mechanism is used to electrically connect the stop mechanism to the controller, so the stop Institutions can allow this control ----- r ----; --- install ------- ^ order -----: 1 line (please read the precautions on the back first and write this page) Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 工 工 消 t-cooperative print $. This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 wash (210X297) *. 11〇_ 419602 A8 B8 C8 D8 It is monitored when the second comb drive member is in the second position. 3 2 ♦ If the electrostatic miniature actuator of the scope of patent application No. 20, wherein the comb-shaped driving finger member of the second comb-shaped driving member can be moved from the first position to the second position and to the second Three positions. In the first position, the comb-shaped driving finger members of the first and second comb-shaped driving members are spaced apart. In the second position, the comb-shaped driving finger members are partially finger-shaped. Combination, in the third position, the comb drive finger member is a completely finger combination, and the controller includes a mechanism to provide a voltage between the first and second comb drive members during only a part of a half stroke To drive the comb-type driving finger member of the second comb-type driving member to the third position. 3 3. The electrostatic miniature 2 actuator according to item 32 of the patent application scope * wherein the controller includes a mechanism so that when the comb-type driving finger member is partially engaged but before the comb-type driving finger member is fully engaged , Providing a voltage between the first and second comb-type driving members. 34. The electrostatic miniature actuator according to claim 20, further comprising a mirror and an attachment mechanism. The attachment mechanism is used to couple the mirror to the at least one comb drive assembly, and the attachment mechanism includes a bracket member. The bracket member is provided with a concave wall therein, and the mirror has a pile portion provided thereon to be arranged in the concave wall to facilitate the alignment of the mirror on the bracket member. 35. The electrostatic miniature actuator according to claim 20 of the patent application scope, further comprising a mirror and an attachment mechanism, the attachment mechanism is used to couple the mirror to the at least one comb-type drive assembly, and the attachment machine tip includes a device. There is a bracket member with a container to accommodate the mirror, and the mirror is used to fix the mirror inside the container. The B a car (CNS > A4 size (210X 297 mm) _jj, — Bu -------- installed ------ order ------ line (please read the note on the back ^ item 4 " scold this page} Ministry of Economic Affairs central standard rate negative work «fees Cooperative seal $ L 419602 AS B8 Μ Central Consumers ’Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 工 Industrial Cooperative Cooperative Seal It 6. The patent-applied adhesive mechanism and movably mounted on the substrate to hold the mirror in the container during the fixed period 3 Θ · A method of operating a comb drive assembly, the comb drive assembly having first and second comb drive members, the first and second comb drive members having individual comb drive fingers Component, wherein the second comb-type drive member may be positioned relative to the first comb-type drive member at Move between a position and a second position, in which the comb drive finger members of the first and second comb drive members are spaced apart, in the second position, the first and second comb drive members The comb-shaped driving finger members of the two comb-shaped driving members are combined in a finger shape, and the method includes oscillating the second comb-shaped driving member in a resonant manner to move the second comb-shaped driving member to the second position and the first The two-comb driving member is held in the second position β 3 7. The method according to item 36 of the patent application scope, wherein the holding step includes holding the second comb-driving member in the second position by electrostatic force. Medium. 38. The method according to item 37 of the scope of patent application, wherein the holding step includes holding the second comb-type driving member in the second position by mechanical force. '39. The method of item 38, further comprising a releasing step for releasing the second comb-shaped driving member from the second position to allow the second comb-shaped driving member to move to the first position β 4 0. — Static electricity Miniature actuators including substrate, At least one comb-shaped drive assembly and at least one beam-like spring member 'The at least one comb-shaped drive assembly has first and second comb-shaped drive members, each of the first and second comb-shaped IK--1-- --Installation ------ Order ------ Line- (Please read the Precautions on the back ', write this page) This paper size is in use 8 «Home rubbing (": Yang ") 4 specifications (210 乂 297 male *) _112, A8 B8 C8 D8 41PB02 6. Scope of patent application (please read the precautions on the back first, and then ^^ this page) The driving members are provided with comb-shaped driving finger members, the first The comb-shaped driving member is mounted on the base, and the second comb-shaped driving member is covered on the base. The at least one beam-shaped spring member has a first end portion fixed to the base and fixed to the second comb. A second end portion of the driving member, the second comb-shaped driving member is movable in a direction between a first position and a second position, in which the first and second comb-shaped driving members are The comb drive finger members are not actually fully finger-shaped, and in this second position, the comb drives of the first and second comb drive members The members are actually completely finger-shaped combinations, the at least one beam-like spring member is rigid in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the second comb-shaped drive member and is movable between a first position and a second position * In the first position, the at least one beam-shaped spring member is in a non-linear configuration and occurs when the second comb-shaped drive member is in the first position, in the second position, the at least one beam-shaped spring member is in The flexible configuration extending perpendicular to the moving direction occurs when the second comb drive member is in the second position *. Therefore, the rigidity of the at least one beam-shaped spring member in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction will follow the The second comb-shaped drive member is increased when moving from its first position to its second position. Printed by the Central Cooperative Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China, such as the electrostatic micro-actuator of the patent application No. 40, wherein the second comb-shaped driving member can be between the first position and the second position. Movement • In the first position, the comb drive finger members of the first and second comb drive members are spaced apart. In the second position, the comb shapes of the first and second comb drive members are spaced apart. The drive finger members are actually completely finger-shaped. 4 2. The static micro-actuator according to item 41 of the patent application, further including an additional beam-shaped spring member, the paper beam size of the additional beam-shaped spring member is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( (210X297 mm) -113- Printed A8 by I Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. D8 6. The scope of patent application has a first end part fixed to the base and a second comb drive member. In the second end portion, the added beam-shaped spring member is rigid in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the second comb-shaped driving member and can be selected between the first position and the second position. In the first position, the added beam-shaped spring member is in a non-linear configuration and occurs when the second comb-shaped drive member is in the first position. In the second position, the added beam-shaped spring member is It is in a linear configuration extending perpendicular to the moving direction and occurs when the second comb drive member is in the second position. 43. The electrostatic miniature actuator according to item 41 of the scope of patent application, further comprising first and second electrostatic clamping electrodes extending perpendicular to the moving direction of the second comb-shaped driving member, the first and second clamping The electrode is movable between a first position and a second position, in which the clamped electrodes are spaced apart and occur when the second comb drive member is in the second position, and in the second position, the clamped The electrodes are in close proximity to each other and occur when the second comb-type driving member is in the first position. Therefore, when a voltage is applied between the clamp electrodes disposed in close proximity to each other in the second position, the clamp electrodes can be easily held. The second comb-shaped driving member is in the first position. 4 4 · An electrostatic micro-actuator comprising a base, at least one comb-type drive assembly, and a spring mechanism, the at least one comb-type drive assembly has first and second comb-type drive members, each of the first and second Each of the comb-shaped driving members is provided with a comb-shaped driving finger member. The first comb-shaped driving member is mounted on the base, and the second comb-shaped driving member is covered on the base and can be positioned between the first position and the second position. In the first position, the comb drive finger members of the first and second comb drive members are not actually pointed completely (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Paper size free use country national rate (CNS) A4 specifications < 210X297 mm) _ '' 4 «Printed by the Central Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Wuwu Employee Consumer Cooperative 19 60 2? 88 D8 In the second position, the comb-shaped driving finger members of the first and second comb-shaped driving members are actually completely finger-shaped combinations, and the spring mechanism has a first end portion fixed to the escape bottom and fixed to the Second end portion of second comb drive member To provide rigidity in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the second comb drive member, and the rigidity increases as the second comb drive member moves from its first position to its second position. 4 5. The electrostatic micro-actuator according to item 44 of the patent, further comprising a mechanism that leaves the first and second comb-type driving members for electrostatically fixing the second comb-type driving member. 0 4 6 in the first position. The electrostatic micro-actuator according to item 45 of the scope of patent application | wherein: the mechanism for electrostatically holding the second comb-type driving member in the first position includes the first First and second clamp electrodes, the first and second clamp electrodes are movable between a first position and a second position, in which the clamp electrodes are spaced apart from each other in the second comb type When the driving member is in the second position, in the second position, the clamp electrodes are close to each other and occur when the second comb-shaped driving member is in the first position ^ (铕 先 W # Note on the back side Cun Jing wrote this page) This paper is suitable for Chinese families Rate (CNS) Λ4 current grid (210X297 mm) -115-
TW088100403A 1998-01-13 1999-01-12 Optical microswitch having electrostatic microactuator and method for use thereof TW419602B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US7103898P 1998-01-13 1998-01-13
US9680698P 1998-08-17 1998-08-17

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW419602B true TW419602B (en) 2001-01-21

Family

ID=26751766

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW088100403A TW419602B (en) 1998-01-13 1999-01-12 Optical microswitch having electrostatic microactuator and method for use thereof

Country Status (9)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1055281A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2002510059A (en)
KR (1) KR20010034130A (en)
CN (1) CN1292945A (en)
AU (1) AU2223299A (en)
CA (1) CA2318060A1 (en)
MY (1) MY133235A (en)
TW (1) TW419602B (en)
WO (1) WO1999037013A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6887615B1 (en) 1999-07-30 2005-05-03 The Procter & Gamble Company Microvalve for controlling fluid flow
AU6356700A (en) * 1999-07-30 2001-02-19 Procter & Gamble Company, The Microvalve for controlling fluid flow
US6962170B1 (en) 1999-07-30 2005-11-08 The Procter & Gamble Company Microvalve for controlling fluid flow
US6856632B1 (en) * 1999-09-20 2005-02-15 Iolon, Inc. Widely tunable laser
EP1089261B1 (en) * 1999-10-01 2006-05-17 STMicroelectronics S.r.l. A method of producing suspended elements for electrical connection between two portions of a micro-mechanism which can move relative to one another
US6259835B1 (en) * 1999-10-12 2001-07-10 Primawave Photonics, Inc. Mechanically actuated optical switch
US6424759B1 (en) 1999-10-12 2002-07-23 Primawave Photonics, Inc. Mechanically actuated MXN optical switch matrix
US6903486B2 (en) 1999-11-29 2005-06-07 Iolon, Inc. Balanced microdevice
WO2001043268A2 (en) 1999-11-29 2001-06-14 Iolon, Inc. Balanced microdevice and rotary electrostatic microactuator for use therewith
CN100520484C (en) 2000-01-06 2009-07-29 保乐提斯有限公司 Optical fibre switching assembly
US6901180B2 (en) 2001-01-24 2005-05-31 Adc Telecommunications, Inc. MEMS optical switch on a single chip and method
US6792173B2 (en) 2001-05-16 2004-09-14 International Business Machines Corporation Device and method for switching optical signals
JP2003057569A (en) * 2001-06-07 2003-02-26 Sumitomo Electric Ind Ltd Optical switch and optical switch array
US6717325B2 (en) * 2002-03-06 2004-04-06 Glimmerglass Networks, Inc. Method and apparatus for actuation of a two-axis MEMS device using three actuation elements
EP1398766A3 (en) 2002-08-13 2005-08-17 Lg Electronics Inc. Micro-actuator, manufacturing method thereof, optical pickup head of optical recording/reproducing apparatus with micro-actuator and fabrication method thereof
KR100455122B1 (en) * 2002-08-13 2004-11-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Apparatus for focusing servo
US9621772B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2017-04-11 Digitaloptics Corporation Integrated lens barrel, actuator, and MEMS snubber systems and methods
US9465187B2 (en) 2010-11-15 2016-10-11 DigitalOptics Corporation MEMS Thermal despace compensation systems and methods
US8947797B2 (en) 2010-11-15 2015-02-03 DigitalOptics Corporation MEMS Miniature MEMS actuator assemblies
US9397585B2 (en) 2010-11-15 2016-07-19 DigitalOptics Corporation MEMS MEMS shock cushion spring systems and methods
US8947671B2 (en) * 2013-02-22 2015-02-03 Honeywell International Inc. Method and system for detecting optical ring resonator resonance frequencies and free spectral range to reduce the number of lasers in a resonator fiber optic gyroscope
CN105209370B (en) * 2013-03-15 2018-01-19 数位光学Mems有限公司 Arcuate movement control in electrostatic actuator
US9641103B2 (en) * 2014-12-30 2017-05-02 Mems Drive, Inc. MEMS driver
US10908361B2 (en) * 2018-06-06 2021-02-02 Apple Inc. Capacitive position sensing for capacitive drive MEMS devices

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5025346A (en) * 1989-02-17 1991-06-18 Regents Of The University Of California Laterally driven resonant microstructures
US6108163A (en) * 1994-10-12 2000-08-22 International Business Machines Corporation Sensitive sensor internally mounted shock for a disk drive
US5646928A (en) * 1995-06-22 1997-07-08 The Regents Of The University Of California Free-space integrated micro-pickup head for optical data storage and a micro-optical bench
KR100363247B1 (en) * 1995-10-28 2003-02-14 삼성전자 주식회사 Vibrating structure and method for controlling natural frequency of vibrating structure
JP3576677B2 (en) * 1996-01-19 2004-10-13 キヤノン株式会社 Electrostatic actuator, probe using the actuator, scanning probe microscope, processing device, recording / reproducing device
ES2175454T3 (en) * 1996-09-20 2002-11-16 Ascom Ag OPTICAL FIBER CIRCUIT SWITCH AND PROCEDURE FOR THE MANUFACTURING OF THE SAME.

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
MY133235A (en) 2007-10-31
WO1999037013A9 (en) 1999-10-07
EP1055281A1 (en) 2000-11-29
AU2223299A (en) 1999-08-02
CA2318060A1 (en) 1999-07-22
KR20010034130A (en) 2001-04-25
WO1999037013A1 (en) 1999-07-22
EP1055281A4 (en) 2003-06-11
CN1292945A (en) 2001-04-25
JP2002510059A (en) 2002-04-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW419602B (en) Optical microswitch having electrostatic microactuator and method for use thereof
US5998906A (en) Electrostatic microactuator and method for use thereof
Marxer et al. Micro-Opto-Mechanical 2\;\times\; 2 switch for single-mode fibers based on plasma-etched silicon mirror and electrostatic actuation
US6594057B1 (en) Micromachined device with stretchable restoring force member
Wu Micromachining for optical and optoelectronic systems
US6449406B1 (en) Micromachined optomechanical switching devices
EP1130442B1 (en) Optical switches using dual axis micromirrors
Grade et al. A large-deflection electrostatic actuator for optical switching applications
US6392220B1 (en) Micromachined members coupled for relative rotation by hinges
US6301403B1 (en) Optical microswitch with rotary electrostatic microactuator
US6813412B2 (en) Mems element having perpendicular portion formed from substrate
US20020164113A1 (en) Micro-electromechanical optical switch assembly for optical data networks
US6134207A (en) Optical data storage system having optical microswitch
US6384510B1 (en) Electrostatic microactuator with offset and/or inclined comb drive fingers
WO2000036447A9 (en) Optical microswitch with rotary electrostatic microactuator
EP1277072A2 (en) Optical mirror system with multi-axis rotational control
JP2001525972A (en) Optical head using micromachining
Lammel et al. Optical microscanners and microspectrometers using thermal bimorph actuators
CA2356905A1 (en) Optical microswitch with rotary electrostatic microactuator
US6836584B1 (en) Optical microswitch
Tien et al. MEMS actuators for silicon micro-optical elements
CA2370044A1 (en) Electrostatic microactuator with offset and/or inclined comb drive fingers
WO2001095014A1 (en) Optical mirror system with multi-axis rotational control
Su MEMS high-quality micromirrors for optical interconnect and optical pick-up heads
CA2419380A1 (en) Tapered lensed fiber optical switch

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees